project manual...may 2019 project no. 812008 project manual kinross charter township chippewa...

May 2019 Project No. 812008

PROJECT MANUAL

KINROSS CHARTER TOWNSHIP CHIPPEWA COUNTY, MI

FOOD WASTE HANDLING BUILDING

SRF PROJECT NO. 5611-03

VOLUME 1 OF 2

812008 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 2 SECTION

PAGES

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 01 01 – PROJECT TITLE PAGE 1

00 01 10 – TABLE OF CONTENTS 7

00 11 13 – ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 2

00 21 13 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 9

00 41 00 – BID FORM 7

00 43 13 – BID BOND 2

00 45 46 – GOVERNMENTAL CERTIFICATIONS 58

00 51 00 – NOTICE OF AWARD 2

00 52 00 – AGREEMENT 7

00 55 00 – NOTICE TO PROCEED 1

00 61 13 – PERFORMANCE BOND 3

00 61 14 – PAYMENT BOND 3

00 72 00 – GENERAL CONDITIONS EJCDC C-700 2013 EDITION 73

00 73 00 – SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 8

00 91 13 – ADDENDUM 1

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK 2

01 22 00 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4

01 26 00 – CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 6

01 29 73 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES 2

01 31 19 – PROJECT MEETINGS 2

01 33 00 – SUBMITTALS 4

01 42 13 – ABBREVIATIONS

1

01 45 00 – QUALITY CONTROL 3

SECTION PAGES


01 45 57 – TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS 4

01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

5

01 57 13 – TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 8

01 61 00 – COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 4

01 74 00 – CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 3

01 78 00 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 7

01 78 23 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 18

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 00 – DEMOLITION 4

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 15 30 – WATERSTOPS 5

03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 27

03 60 00 – GROUTING 3

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS 5

05 50 03 – CONCRETE ADHESIVE ANCHORS 1

05 51 00 – METAL STAIRS 5

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY 3

06 82 13 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FABRICATIONS 4

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 11 00 – DAMPPROOFING 2

07 21 00 – THERMAL INSULATION 2

07 25 00 – WEATHER BARRIERS 2

07 62 00 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 3

SECTION PAGES


07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS 4

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 17 43 – FRP DOORS AND FRAMES 5

08 31 00 – ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 2

08 36 13 – SECTIONAL DOORS 5

08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE 5

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 96 00 – HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 13

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 44 13 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES 2

DIVISION 11 THRU 12 – (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 34 19 – METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 7

DIVISION 14 – (NOT USED)

DIVISION 15 THRU 20 - Reserved


DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 00 00 – PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 6

22 00 05 – PLUMBING SYSTEMS 9

22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION 4

SECTION PAGES


DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 00 – MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 7

23 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 5

23 05 93 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 4

23 07 00 – HVAC INSULATION 4

23 09 00 – SEQUENCES OF OPERATION FOR HVAC 10

23 11 23 – FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 4

23 21 13 – HYDRONIC PIPING 9

23 21 16 – HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 3

23 21 23 – HYDRONIC PUMPS 2

23 31 13 – METAL DUCTS 6

23 34 23 – HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 3

23 37 00 – AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 6

23 52 33 – FIRE TUBE BOILERS 7

23 55 23 – GAS FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 5

23 55 33 – GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS 4

23 73 33 – DIRECT FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS 6

DIVISION 24 – Reserved



VOLUME 2 OF 2

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 01 26 – ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6

26 05 00 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 5

26 05 19 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 7

26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6

26 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3

26 05 33 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 8

26 05 43 – UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5

26 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5

26 05 83 – ELECTRICAL MOTORS UNDER 200HP 6

26 22 00 – LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 3

26 24 16 – PANELBOARDS 4

26 24 19 – MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 7

26 27 00 – LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 7

26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES 4

26 28 00 – LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICES 4

26 29 26 – VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 5

26 35 00 – POWER FILTERS AND CONDITIONERS 5

26 44 00 – ELECTRIC HEAT TRACE 5

26 51 00 – LIGHTING 5


DIVISION 29 THRU 30 - Reserved

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 20 00 – EARTHWORK 4

31 23 33 – TRENCHING, EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING 4

31 41 00 – SHORING 1

SECTION PAGES


DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 – HOT MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 6

32 13 14 – CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND SIDEWALK RAMPS 4

32 92 00 – SURFACE PROTECTION AND RESTORATION 3

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 05 20 – SITE PROCESS PIPING 8

33 41 00 – STORM SEWERS 5


DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION

40 05 06 – COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING 3

40 05 07 – PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORTS 7

40 05 09 – PIPE SEALS 3

40 05 13 – PROCESS PIPING 6

40 05 23 – PROCESS VALVES 7

40 61 13 – PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PCS) GENERAL PROVISIONS 6

40 61 16 – PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PCS) REQUIREMENTS 3

40 61 63 – PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – TRAINING 2

40 61 73 – PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – TESTING 4

40 61 83 – PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – O&M DATA 3

40 61 93 – PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – INPUT/OUTPUT LIST 7

40 64 00 – PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 3

40 66 00 – NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT 10

40 67 03 – CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PANEL CONSTRUCTION 6

40 67 06 – MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL PANEL DEVICES 8

40 67 09 – UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) 2

40 67 11 – MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL SYSTEM FIELD DEVICES 4

40 68 83 – SOFTWARE CONTROL BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS 18

40 70 00 – INSTRUMENTATION OF PROCESS SYSTEMS 3

40 71 00 – FLOW MEASUREMENT 3

SECTION PAGES


40 72 00 – LEVEL MEASUREMENT 2

40 73 00 – PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 3

40 74 00 – TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION 3

40 91 13 – GAS ANALYSIS PROCESS MEASUREMENT DEVICES 5

DIVISION 41 – MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

41 13 23 – FOOD WASTE PROCESSING EQUIPMENT

6


DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND

STORAGE EQUIPMENT

43 21 43 – PROCESS SUMP PUMPS 5

43 23 79 – PLUNGER PUMPS 5


DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

46 05 01 – PROCESS EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2

46 24 23 – INLINE GRINDERS 6

46 41 41 – MECHANICAL TANK MIXERS 6

46 73 11 – ALUMINUM FOG TANK COVER 6

APPENDIX A – NPDES PERMIT

APPENDIX B – GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

812008 00 11 13 - 1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

SECTION 00 11 13

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

KINROSS CHARTER TOWNSHIP

CHIPPEWA COUNTY, MICHIGAN

Food Waste Handling Building

SRF Project No. 5611-03

Sealed Bids will be received by Kinross Charter Township located at 4884 West Curtis Street,

Kincheloe, MI 49788, until 2 p.m. local time, Thursday, June 27, 2019, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud. Items of work include construction of a food waste handling building to include receiving and storage areas, sorting and processing equipment, concrete tanks, mixing and transfer pumping equipment, all associated HVAC, electrical, instrumentation and controls, excavation, site restoration, painting, and all related work.

The Issuing Office for the Bidding Documents is: Fleis & VandenBrink Engineering, Inc.,

Telephone: (616) 977-1000. Bidding Documents may be obtained at the office of Fleis & VandenBrink Engineering, Inc., 2960 Lucerne Drive SE, Grand Rapids, MI 49546 during normal working hours Monday through Friday. Bidding Documents are available electronically in portable document format (PDF) files for a non-

refundable payment of Twenty-Five Dollars ($25.00). Alternatively, printed Bidding Documents may

be obtained for a non-refundable payment of Ninety Dollars ($90.00), plus a non-refundable payment

of Ten Dollars ($10.00) for mailing. The date that the Bidding Documents are transmitted by the Issuing Office will be considered the prospective Bidder’s date of receipt of the Bidding Documents. Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be available from the Issuing Office. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be responsible for full or partial sets of Bidding Documents, including Addenda if any, obtained from sources other than the Issuing Office.

Bidding Documents may be examined at the following locations on or after May 28, 2019: Fleis & VandenBrink Engineering, Inc., 2960 Lucerne Drive SE, Grand Rapids, MI 49546 Kinross Charter Township, 4884 West Curtis Street, Kincheloe, MI 49788 Builders Exchange of Michigan: 4461 Cascade Road SE, Grand Rapids, MI 49546 Builders Exchange of Kalamazoo: 3431 East Kilgore Road, Kalamazoo, MI 49001 Builders Exchange of Lansing: 1240 East Saginaw Street, Lansing, MI 48906 Dodge Data & Analytics – formerly McGraw-Hill Construction Dodge Construction Association of Michigan: 43636 Woodward Avenue, Bloomfield Hills, MI 48302 Construction Data Company: 4201 W. Parmer Lane, Suite A200, Austin, TX 78727 Bidclerk: 28 N. Clark Street, Suite 450, Chicago, IL 60602 Construction Journal, 7261 Engle Road, Suite 101, Cleveland, OH 44130 Michigan Infrastructure and Transportation Association website: http://www.mitaads.com/

A pre-bid conference will be held on June 11, 2019 at 1:30 p.m. local time at the Kinross Township

WWTP, 16350 S. D’Arcy Road, Kincheloe, MI 49788 to discuss the project. Attendance at the pre-bid conference is highly encouraged but is not mandatory. Special project requirements include:

812008 00 11 13 - 2 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Solicitations for Quotes/Proposals; Good Faith Efforts Worksheets must to completed and submitted with bids Davis-Bacon/Prevailing Federal Wage Rates American Iron and Steel

Bid security shall be furnished in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Kinross Charter Township reserves the right to accept any bid, reject any or all bids, to waive informalities and make the award in any manner deemed in the best interest of the project.

END OF SECTION

812008 00 21 13 - 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

SECTION 00 21 13

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

ARTICLE 1 - DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General

Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below:

A. Issuing Office -- The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued. B. Plan Holders of Record – Entities that purchase Bidding Documents from the Issuing Office.

ARTICLE 2 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and format, and for the payment, if

any, stated in the advertisement or invitation to bid may be obtained only from the Issuing Office. The payment will not be refunded, unless otherwise indicated. Bids will be accepted only from Plan Holders of Record.

2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER nor

ENGINEER assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.03 OWNER and ENGINEER, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above

terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license for any other use.

ARTICLE 3 - QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.01 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, after submitting its Bid and within

five (5) days of OWNER’s request, Bidder shall submit (a) written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments, and (b) other data as may be requested.

3.02 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s

representations and certifications.

ARTICLE 4 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE;

SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

4.01 Site and Other Areas

A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by OWNER for the use of the CONTRACTOR. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by CONTRACTOR.

4.02 Existing Site Conditions

A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions


1. The Supplementary Conditions may identify: a. those reports known to OWNER of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at

or adjacent to the Site.

b. those drawings known to OWNER of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).

c. Reports and drawings known to OWNER relating to Hazardous Environmental

Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.

d. Copies of reports and drawings referenced above will be made available to any Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.

B. Underground Facilities: Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents

with respect to existing Underground facilities at or contiguous to the Site are set forth in the Contract Documents and are based upon information and data furnished to OWNER and ENGINEER by owners of such Underground facilities, including OWNER, or others.

C. Adequacy of Data: Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated subsurface or physical conditions appear in Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work, appear in Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions.

4.03 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders

A. Bidder shall conduct the required Site visit during normal working hours and shall not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site.

B. Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of Site conditions.

C. On request, and to the extent OWNER has control over the Site, and schedule permitting, the

OWNER will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for preparing and submitting a successful Bid. OWNER will not have any obligation to grant such access if doing so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints on OWNER’S authority regarding the Site.

D. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions established by OWNER or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety programs.


E. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.

4.04 OWNER’S Safety program

A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. As the General Conditions indicate, if an Owner safety program exists, it may be noted in the Supplementary Conditions.

4.05 Other Work at the Site

A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of other work of which OWNER is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the Site by OWNER or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If OWNER is party to a written contract for such other work, then on request, OWNER will provide to each Bidder access to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any.

ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

5.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference items identified in the Bidding Documents;

B. visit the Site, conduct a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfy itself as to the general, local and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;

C. become familiar with and satisfy itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work;

D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that may be identified in the Supplemental Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that may be identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings;

E. consider the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings that may be identified in the Bidding Documents; with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs;

F. agree, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, that at the time of submitting its Bid no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents;

G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;


H. promptly give ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder;

I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work; and

J. agree that the submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 6 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE

6.01 A pre-Bid conference will be held at the time and location stated in the invitation or

advertisement to bid. Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective.

ARTICLE 7 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to

ENGINEER in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all parties recorded by ENGINEER as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than seven (7) days prior to the date for opening Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.

7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 8 - BID SECURITY

8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to OWNER in an amount of 5% of

Bidder’s maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified check, bank money order, or a Bid Bond (on the form included in the Bidding Documents) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 6.01 and 6.02 of the General Conditions.

8.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until OWNER awards the

contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, OWNER may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture shall be OWNER’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults.

8.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that OWNER believes to have a reasonable chance of

receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of seven (7) days after the Effective Date of the Contract or 91 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be released.


8.04 Bid security of other Bidders that OWNER believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be released within seven (7) days after the Bid opening.

ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT TIMES

9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially

completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 10 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial

Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 11 - SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS

11.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment

specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration during the bidding and Contract award process of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. In cases in which the Contract allows the CONTRACTOR to request that ENGINEER authorize the use of a substitute or “or-equal” item of material or equipment, application for such acceptance will not be made to and will not be considered by ENGINEER until after the Effective Date of the Contract.

11.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid shall be based on the presumption that the

Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-Bid approvals of “or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk.

ARTICLE 12 - SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS

12.01 A Bidder shall be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or

entities for the performance of the Work if required by the Bidding Documents (most commonly in the Specifications) to do so. If a prospective Bidder objects to retaining any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the concern is not relieved by an Addendum, then the prospective Bidder should refrain from submitting a Bid.

12.02 Subsequent to the submittal of the Bid, Owner may not require the Successful Bidder or

Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity against which Contractor has reasonable objection.

12.03 The apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five (5) days

after Bid opening, submit to OWNER a list of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. If requested by Owner, such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. If OWNER or ENGINEER, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, OWNER may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit a substitute. Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and OWNER may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award.


12.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, OWNER may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which OWNER or ENGINEER makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.06 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 13 - PREPARATION OF BID

13.01 The Bid form is included with the Bidding Documents.

A. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item listed therein.

B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.”

13.02 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose

title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown.

13.03 A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner

(whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official address of the partnership shall be shown.

13.04 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member or

other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown.

13.05 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address. 13.06 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by an authorized representative of each joint

venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown.

13.07 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures. 13.08 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which

shall be filled in on the Bid Form. 13.09 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid

shall be shown. 13.10 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the

state where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid Form.

13.11 Submit all required attachments as listed in Article 7 of the Bid Form.


ARTICLE 14 - BASIS OF BID

14.01 Lump Sum – Base Bid with Alternates

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis for the base Bid and include a separate price for each alternate described in the Bidding Documents as provided for in the Bid form. The price for each alternate will be the amount added to or deleted from the base Bid if OWNER selects the alternate.

B. In the comparison of Bids, alternates will be evaluated equally until doing so would cause the budget to be exceeded.

14.02 Unit Price

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit price section of the Bid Form.

B. The “Bid Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Bid item will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity” (which Owner or its representative has set forth in the Bid Form) for the item and the corresponding “Bid Unit Price” offered by the Bidder. The total of all unit price Bid items will be the sum of these “Bid Prices”; such total will be used by Owner for Bid comparison purposes. The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions.

C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.

ARTICLE 15 - SUBMITTAL OF BID

15.01 With each copy of the Bidding Documents, a Bidder is furnished one separate unbound copy

of the Bid Form. The unbound copy of the Bid form is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security and other documents required to be submitted under the terms of Article 7 of the Bid Form.

15.02 A Bid shall be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated

in the advertisement or invitation to bid and shall be enclosed in a plainly marked package with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED”.

15.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at

the correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the Bidder unopened.

ARTICLE 16 - MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID

16.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that

a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder.


16.02 If a Bidder wished to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in the manner specified in Paragraph 16.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids.

16.02 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with

OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work.

ARTICLE 17 - OPENING OF BIDS

17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid

and, unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.

ARTICLE 19 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT

19.01 OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, non-

conforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. OWNER will reject the Bid of any Bidder that OWNER finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, then the OWNER will reject the Bid as nonresponsive; provided that OWNER also reserves the right to waive all minor informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work.

19.02 If OWNER awards the contract for the Work, such award will be to the responsible Bidder

submitting the lowest responsive Bid. 19.03 Evaluation of Bids

A. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.

B. In the comparison of Bids, alternates will be evaluated equally until doing so would cause the budget to be exceeded. After determination of the Successful Bidder based on this comparative process and on the responsiveness, responsibility, and other factors set forth in these instructions, the award may be made to said Successful Bidder on its base Bid and any combination of its additive alternate Bids for which OWNER determines funds will be available at the time of award.

. 19.04 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the

Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents.

19.05 OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to establish the

responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers.


ARTICLE 20 - BONDS AND INSURANCE

20.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions,

sets forth OWNER’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the Agreement (executed by Successful Bidder) to OWNER, it shall be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation.

ARTICLE 21 - SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

21.01 When ENGINEER, on behalf of the OWNER, issues a Notice of Award to the Successful

Bidder, it will be accompanied by the unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement (and any bonds and insurance documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents) to OWNER. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER shall deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 22 – CLEAN WATER STATE REVOLVING FUND REQUIREMENTS 22.01 This project is subject to Buy American Requirements as outlined in H.R. 3547, “Consolidated

Appropriations Act, 2014.” Refer to the Buy American Requirements and Contract Language included in Section 00 45 46 – Governmental Certifications.

22.02 This project is subject to the requirements of David Bacon and Related Acts. Refer to the

Required Standard Contract Language included in Section 00 45 46 – Governmental Certifications.

22.03 Bidders are required to perform Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) solicitations for

quotes/proposals, document Good Faith Efforts, and submit this documentation with the bid. Refer to the Required Standard Contract Language included in Section 00 45 46 – Governmental Certifications.

END OF SECTION

812008 00 41 00 - 1 BID FORM

SECTION 00 41 00

BID FORM

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:

Kinross Charter Township

Chippewa County, Michigan

Food Waste Handling Building

SRF Project No. 5611-03

ARTICLE 1 – BID RECIPIENT

1.01 This Bid is submitted to:

Kinross Charter Township

4884 West Curtis Street

Kincheloe, MI 49788

1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 2 – BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to

acceptance for 90 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of OWNER.

ARTICLE 3 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:

A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, and any data andreference items identified in the Bidding Documents, and hereby acknowledges receipt ofthe following Addenda:

Addendum No. Addendum Date

B. Bidder has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site andadjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfied itself as to the general, local andSite conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Bidder is familiar with and has satisfied itself as to all Laws and Regulations that mayaffect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

NOT FOR BIDDING

812008 00 41 00 - 2 BID FORM

D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurfaceconditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating toexisting surface or subsurface structures at the Site that may be identified in theSupplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports anddrawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions,if any, at or adjacent to the Site that may be identified in the Supplementary Conditions,especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

E. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder itself; information commonlyknown to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information andobservations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and any Site-relatedreports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect ofsuch information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, andperformance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, andprocedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautionsand programs.

F. Bidder agrees, based on the information and observations referred to in the precedingparagraph, that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, ordata are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at theprice(s) bid, within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms andconditions of the Bidding Documents.

G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others atthe Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.

H. Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities ordiscrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and confirms thatthe written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder.

I. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding ofall terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work.

J. The submission of this Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder thatBidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, and that without exception theBid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Workrequired by the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 4 – BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION

4.01 Bidder certifies that:

A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individualor entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or rules of anygroup, association, organization, or corporation;

B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false orsham Bid;

C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and

D. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competingfor the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 4.01.D:

NOT FOR BIDDING

812008 00 41 00 - 3 BID FORM

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of valuelikely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) toinfluence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices atartificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and opencompetition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, withor without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices atartificial, non-competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, personsor their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect theexecution of the Contract.

ARTICLE 5 – BASIS OF BID

5.01 Bidder shall provide Bid prices for all of the individual Work Items listed below. Each Work Item price provided is to become an integral part of the Bid Total amount. Refer to Section 01 22 00 – Measurement and Payment for descriptions of each Item.

5.02 Bidder understands that each Work Item shall include all related General Conditions, SESC Measures, Site Work (Excavation, Backfill, Grading, Surface Restoration, etc.), Demolition, Paving, Architectural, Structural, Process, Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation and Control work necessary to produce/deliver each Work Item in accordance with the Contract Documents and as a complete and fully functional facility improvement.

5.03 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s):

Item

No. Work Area Unit Qty Unit Price Amount

1 Food Waste Building LS 1 $ $

BASE BID TOTAL:

($ ) (use words) (use figures)

NOT FOR BIDDING

812008 00 41 00 - 4 BID FORM

ARTICLE 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION

6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.

6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.

6.03 TIME ALTERNATE:

If Bidder takes exception to the Contract Time(s) stipulated in the Agreement, Bidder is requested to stipulate below his proposed alternate time(s) and completion dates for performance of the Work.

6.04 SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING:

Bid is submitted on the basis of the use of the following Subcontractors:

WORK ITEM FIRM CITY

Excavating/Site Work

Concrete Work

Painting

Mechanical

Electrical

Instrumentation

Please note for each work item, if work is to be performed by Bidder or Subcontractor. If by Subcontractor, provide name and City for each Subcontractor. Failure to list Subcontractors with the Bid waives Bidder's rights to a change in Contract Time or Price or withdrawal of Bid and Bid Security, in the event OWNER has reasonable objections to any Subcontractor.

If Subcontractors are not identified above, OWNER shall have the right to reject any Subcontractor for reasonable cause. In this case, the apparent low Bidder shall engage a Subcontractor acceptable to OWNER and waives the right to withdraw Bid and Bid Security, and further, waives right to a change in Contract Time or Price due to failure to list.

NOT FOR BIDDING

812008 00 41 00 - 5 BID FORM

ARTICLE 7 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID

7.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid:

A. Required Bid security;

B. List of Proposed Subcontractors;

C. List of Proposed Suppliers;

D. Good Faith Efforts Worksheets along with the required supporting documentation;

E. Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension and Other Responsibility Matters.

ARTICLE 8 – DEFINED TERMS

8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 9 – BID SUBMITTAL

9.01 This Bid is submitted by:

If Bidder is:

An Individual

Name (typed or printed):

By: (Individual’s signature)

Doing business as:

A Partnership

Partnership Name:

By: (Signature of general partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)


A Corporation

Corporation Name: (SEAL)

State of Incorporation:

Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability):

By: (Signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign)

NOT FOR BIDDING

812008 00 41 00 - 6 BID FORM


Title: (CORPORATE SEAL)

Attest

Date of Qualification to do business in Michigan is ____/____/_________.

A Joint Venture

Name of Joint Venture:

First Joint Venturer Name: (SEAL)

By: (Signature of first joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)


Title:

Second Joint Venturer Name: (SEAL)

By: (Signature of second joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)


Title:

(Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.)

Bidder's Business Address

Phone No. _____________________________________ Fax No.

E-mail ________________________________________

NOT FOR BIDDING

812008 00 41 00 - 7 BID FORM

SUBMITTED on , 20____.

State Contractor License No. (where applicable).

END OF SECTION NOT FOR BIDDING

PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Published 2013. Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 00 43 13

BID BOND

Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

BIDDER (Name and Address):

SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of Business):

OWNER (Name and Address):

Kinross Charter Township 4884 West Curtis Street

Kincheloe, MI 49788

BID

Bid Due Date:

Description (Project Name— Include Location):

BOND

Bond Number:

Date:

Penal sum $

(Words) (Figures) Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. BIDDER SURETY

(Seal) (Seal)

Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Published 2013. Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 2 of 2

Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.

1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.

2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.

3. This obligation shall be null and void if:

3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or

3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or

3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof).

4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.

5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent.

6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after the Bid due date.

7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located.

8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned.

9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.

10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.

11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.

812008 00 45 46 GOVERNMENTAL CERTIFICATIONS

SECTION 00 45 46

GOVERNMENTAL CERTIFICATIONS

REQUIRED STANDARD CONTRACT LANGUAGE: CLEAN WATER STATE REVOLVING FUND AND DRINKING

WATER REVOLVING FUND

1 TITLE PAGE, PAGES 1 THROUGH 11 AND 3 ATTACHMENTS

REQUIRED STANDARD CONTRACT LANGUAGE: CLEAN WATER STATE REVOLVING FUND AND DRINKING

WATER REVOLVING FUND

• Davis-Bacon/Prevailing Federal Wages, Including Labor Standards Provisions

• Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Requirements*

• Debarment/Suspension Certification*

* Bidders should note these sections contain instructions regarding forms/information that must be completed/included with any

submitted bid.

Rev. 3-2015

Davis-Bacon/Prevailing Federal Wage Rates P.L. 111-88 requires compliance with the Davis Bacon Act and adherence to the current U.S. Department of Labor Wage Decision. Attention is called to the fact that not less than the minimum salaries and wages as set forth in the Contract Documents (see Wage Decision included herein) must be paid on this project. The Wage Decision, including modifications, must be posted by the Contractor on the job site. A copy of the Federal Labor Standards Provisions is included and is hereby a part of this contract.

1 Rev. 3/2015

29 CFR Part 5 – Labor Standards Provisions for Federally Assisted Projects

§ 5.5 Contract provisions and related matters. (a) The Agency head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in full in any contract in excess of $2,000 which is entered into for the actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating, of a public building or public work, or building or work financed in whole or in part from Federal funds or in accordance with guarantees of a Federal agency or financed from funds obtained by pledge of any contract of a Federal agency to make a loan, grant or annual contribution (except where a different meaning is expressly indicated), and which is subject to the labor standards provisions of any of the acts listed in Sec. 5.1, the following clauses (or any modifications thereof to meet the particular needs of the agency, Provided, That such modifications are first approved by the Department of Labor): (1) Minimum wages. (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in Sec. 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (ii)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and

3 Rev. 3/2015

(2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (2) Withholding. The (write in name of Federal Agency or the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of

4 Rev. 3/2015

1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the (Agency) may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the (write in name of appropriate federal agency) if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the (write in name of agency). The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the (write in name of appropriate federal agency) if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit them to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the (write in name of agency), the contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the sponsoring government agency (or the applicant, sponsor, or owner). (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a ``Statement of Compliance,'' signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:

5 Rev. 3/2015

http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm

(1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the ``Statement of Compliance'' required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the (write the name of the agency) or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. (4) Apprentices and trainees--(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its

6 Rev. 3/2015

program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the (write in the name of the Federal agency) may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5.

7 Rev. 3/2015

(7) Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility. (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. (b) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by Sec. 5.5(a) or 4.6 of part 4 of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. (1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible there for shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.

8 Rev. 3/2015

(3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The (write in the name of the Federal agency or the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section. (c) In addition to the clauses contained in paragraph (b), in any contract subject only to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in Sec. 5.1, the Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert a clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number, correct classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in any such contract a clause providing that the records to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the (write the name of agency) and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job.

9 Rev. 3/2015

Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) Prime contractors bidding on this project must follow, document, and maintain documentation of their Good Faith Efforts, as listed below, to ensure that Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBEs) have the opportunity to participate in the project by increasing DBE awareness of procurement efforts and outreach. Bidders must make the following Good Faith Efforts for any work that will be subcontracted.

1. Ensure DBEs are made aware of contracting opportunities to the fullest extent practicable through outreach and recruitment activities. Place DBEs on solicitation lists and solicit DBEs whenever they are potential sources.

2. Make information on forthcoming opportunities available to DBEs. Arrange time-

frames for contracts and establish delivery schedules, where the requirements permit, in a way that encourages and facilitates participation by DBEs in the competitive process. Whenever possible, post solicitation for bids or proposals for a minimum of 30 calendar days before the bid or proposal closing date. The DBEs should be given a minimum of 5 days to respond to the posting.

3. Consider in the contracting process whether firms competing for large contracts can

be subcontracted with DBEs. Divide total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by DBEs in the competitive process.

4. Encourage contracting with a consortium of DBEs when a contract is too large for

one DBE firm to handle individually.

5. Use the services and assistance of the Small Business Administration and the Minority Business Development Agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce.

Subsequent to compliance with the Good Faith Efforts, the following conditions also apply under the DBE requirements. Completed Good Faith Efforts Worksheets (Attachment 1), along with the required supporting documentation outlined in the instructions, must be submitted with your bid proposal. EPA form 6100-2 must also be provided at the pre-bid meeting. A copy of this form is available on the Forms and Guidance page of the Revolving Loan website.

1. The prime contractor must pay its subcontractor for work that has been satisfactorily completed no more than 30 days from the prime contractor’s receipt of payment from the owner.

2. The prime contractor must notify the owner in writing prior to the termination of any

DBE subcontractor for convenience by the prime contractor and employ the Good Faith Efforts if soliciting a replacement contractor.

3. If a DBE contractor fails to complete work under the subcontract for any reason, the

prime contractor must employ the Good Faith Efforts if soliciting a replacement contractor.

4. The prime contractor must employ the Good Faith Efforts.

10 Rev. 3/2015

Debarment Certification

The prime contractor must provide a completed Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters Form with its bid or proposal package to the owner (Attachment 2).

11 Rev. 3/2015

Attachment 1

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Utilization GOOD FAITH EFFORTS WORKSHEET

Michigan Department of Environmental Quality Office of Drinking Water and Municipal Assistance– Revolving Loan Section

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Utilization State Revolving Fund/Drinking Water Revolving Fund

GOOD FAITH EFFORTS WORKSHEET Bidder:______________________________________________________________________ Subcontract Area of Work (one per worksheet:_______________________________________________ Outreach Goal: Solicit a minimum of three (3) DBEs via email/letter/fax. It is recommended that various sources be used to locate the minimum number of DBEs. The Michigan Department of Transportation (MDOT) website and www.sam.gov registries may be two resources used to find a minimum of three DBEs. List the DBEs contacted for the above area of work and complete the following information for each DBE.

Company Name Type of Contact

Date of Contact

Price Quote Received

Accepted/ Rejected

Please Explain if Rejected

A R

A R

A R

A R

A R

A R

Explanation for Not Achieving a Minimum of Three Contacts; you may include a printout of the MDOT and www.sam.gov search results (attach extra sheets if necessary): MITA DBE Posting Date (if applicable): _____________________________ (attach a copy of the DBE advertisement) Other Efforts (attach extra sheets if necessary):

Please include the completed worksheet and supporting documentation with the bid proposal. Rev.3-2015

Rick Snyder, Governor Dan Wyant, Director

Authorized under Parts 53 & 54 of the Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act, 1994 PA 451, as amended. www.michigan.gov/deq

http://www.sam.gov/

http://www.sam.gov/

Michigan Department of Environmental Quality Office of Drinking Water and Municipal Assistance– Revolving Loan Section

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Utilization State Revolving Fund/Drinking Water Revolving Fund

GOOD FAITH EFFORTS WORKSHEET

Instructions to Bidders for the Completion of the Good Faith Efforts Worksheet

1. Separate worksheets must be provided for each area of work to be subcontracted out. This includes both major and minor subcontracts.

2. A minimum of three (3) DBEs must be contacted by a verifiable means of communication such as

e-mail, letter, or fax for each area of work to be subcontracted out. Copies of the solicitation letters/e-mails and fax confirmation sheets must be provided with the worksheet.

3. If less that three (3) DBEs exist statewide for the area of work, then provide documentation that

other DBE resources were consulted. This may include the MDOT and www.sam.gov registries and an advertisement is a publication. A printout of the website searched (conducted prior to the end of the bid period) must be submitted.

4. Posting solicitations for quotes/proposals from DBEs on the MITA website (www.mitadbe.com)

is highly recommended to facilitate participation in the competitive process whenever possible. The solicitation needs to identify the project and the areas of work to be subcontracted out. A copy of the MITA DBE advertisement must be submitted with the Good Faith Efforts worksheet, if used, or a printout of the resulting quotes posted to the MITA website can be submitted with this form as supporting documentation.

5. If the area of work is so specialized that no DBEs exist, then an explanation is required to support

that conclusion, including the documentation required in No. 3 above. 6. The date of the DBE contact must be identified, as it is important to document that the DBE

solicitation was made during the bid period and that sufficient time was given for the DBE to return a quote.

7. Each DBE firm’s price quote must be identified if one was received or N/A entered on the

worksheet if a quote was not received. Copies of all quotes must be submitted with the worksheet.

8. If a quote was received, indicate if it was accepted or rejected. Justification for not accepting a

quote and not using the DBE subcontractor must be provided. 9. Under Other Efforts, please indicate additional steps you have taken to obtain DBE contractors

and provide the appropriate supporting documentation such as: • Follow-up e-mails, faxes, or letters. • Copies of announcements/postings in newspapers, trade publications, or minority media that

target DBE firms.

Rev. 3-2015

Rick Snyder, Governor Dan Wyant, Director

Authorized under Parts 53 & 54 of the Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act, 1994 PA 451, as amended. www.michigan.gov/deq

http://www.sam.gov/

http://www.mitadbe.com/

Attachment 2

Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters

Certification Regarding

Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters The prospective participant certifies, to the best of its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals: (1) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or

voluntarily excluded from participation in transactions under federal nonprocurement programs by any federal department or agency;

(2) Have not, within the three year period preceding the proposal, had one or more public

transactions (federal, state, or local) terminated for cause or default; and (3) Are not presently indicted or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a government entity

(federal, state, or local) and have not, within the three year period preceding the proposal, been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against it:

(a) For the commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining,

attempting to obtain, or performing a public transaction (federal, state, or local) or a procurement contract under such a public transaction;

(b) For the violation of federal or state antitrust statutes, including those proscribing

price fixing between competitors, the allocation of customers between competitors, or bid rigging; or

(c) For the commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or

destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property. I understand that a false statement on this certification may be grounds for the rejection of this proposal or the termination of the award. In addition, under 18 U.S.C. §1001, a false statement may result in a fine of up to $10,000 or imprisonment for up to five years, or both. _____________________________________________________________________________ Name and Title of Authorized Representative _____________________________________________________________________________ Name of Participant Agency or Firm _____________________________________________________________________________ Signature of Authorized Representative Date I am unable to certify to the above statement. Attached is my explanation.

Attachment 3

Frequently Asked Questions About Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Solicitation

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Requirements Frequently Asked Questions Regarding Contractor Compliance

Q: What is the Good Faith Efforts Worksheet form and how is it to be completed? A: This form captures efforts by the prime contractor to solicit DBEs for each area of work type

that will be subcontracted out. A separate Good Faith Efforts Worksheet must be provided by the prime contractor for each area of work type to be subcontracted out. There are specific instructions that accompany this form that prescribe minimum efforts which bidders must make in order to be in compliance with the DBE requirements.

Q: Can non-certified DBEs be used? A: While non-certified DBEs can be used, only DBEs, MBEs, and WBEs that are certified by

EPA, SBA, or MDOT (or by tribal, state and local governments, as long as their standards for certification meet or exceed the standards in EPA policy) can be counted toward the fair share goal. Proof of certification by one of these recognized and approved agencies should be sought from each DBE.

Q: How does a DBE get certified? A: Applications for certification under MDOT can be found at

http://mdotjboss.state.mi.us/UCP/LearnHowServlet.

Applications for certification under EPA can be found on EPA’s Small Business Programs website at http://www.epa.gov/osbp/dbe_firm.htm under Certification Forms.

Q: If a bidder follows the MDOT DBE requirements, will the bidder be in compliance with the

SRF/DWRF DBE requirements? A: No. Federally funded highway projects utilize DBE goals, which require that a certain

percentage of work be performed by DBE subcontractors. For SRF/DWRF projects, there is no financial goal. However, there is a solicitation effort goal. Bidders must use Good Faith Efforts for each and every area of work to be subcontracted out to obtain DBEs. The bidders are not required to use DBEs if the quotes are higher than non-DBE subcontractors. There is no required DBE participation percentage contract goal for the SRF/DWRF. However, if the SRF/DWRF project is part of a joint project with MDOT, the project can be excluded from SRF/DWRF DBE requirements (i.e., the Good Faith Efforts Worksheet is not required) as it would be difficult to comply with both programs’ requirements.

Q. Must the Good Faith Efforts Worksheet and supporting documentation be turned in with the

bid proposals? A: Yes. This is a requirement to document that the contractor has complied with the DBE

requirements and the Good Faith Efforts. These compliance efforts must be done during the bidding phase and not after-the-fact. It is highly recommended that the need for these efforts and the submittal of the forms with the bid proposals be emphasized at the pre-bid meetings. Failure to show that the Good Faith Efforts were complied with during the bidding process can lead to a prime contractor being found non-responsive.

Q: Does EPA form 6100-2 need to be provided at the pre-bid meeting?

A: Yes. The form must be made available at the pre-bid meeting.

http://mdotjboss.state.mi.us/UCP/LearnHowServlet

http://www.epa.gov/osbp/dbe_firm.htm

Q: What kinds of documentation should a contractor provide to document solicitation efforts? A: Documentation can include fax confirmation sheets, copies of solicitation letters/e-mails,

printouts of online solicitations, printouts of online search results, affidavits of publication in newspapers, etc.

Q: How much time will compliance with the Good Faith Efforts require in terms of structuring an

adequate bidding period? A: Due to the extent of the efforts required, a minimum of 30 calendar days is recommended

between bid posting and bid opening to ensure adequate time for contractors to locate certified DBEs and solicit quotes.

Q: How does a contractor locate certified DBEs? A: The Michigan Department of Transportation has a directory of all Michigan certified entities

located at http://mdotjboss.state.mi.us/UCP/. Additionally, the federal System for Award Management (SAM) is another place to search and can be found at www.sam.gov. SAM contains information from the former Central Contractor Registration (CCR) database.

Q: If the bidder does not intend to subcontract any work, what forms, if any, must be provided

with the bid proposal? A: The bidder should complete the Good Faith Efforts Worksheet with a notation that no

subcontracting will be done. However, if the bidder is awarded the contract and then decides to subcontract work at any point, then the Good Faith Efforts must be made to solicit DBEs.

Q: In the perfect world, the Good Faith Efforts Worksheet is required to be turned in with the

proposal. What if no forms are turned in with the bid proposal or forms are blank or incomplete? Should this be cause to determine that the bidder is non-responsive?

A: While the Good Faith Efforts Worksheet is important, it is more critical to confirm that the

contractor complied with the DBE requirements prior to bid opening. The owner should contact the bidder as soon as deficiencies are noted for a determination/documentation of efforts taken to comply with the DBE requirements. Immediate submittal of the completed forms will be acceptable provided the Good Faith Efforts were made and it is just a matter of transferring information to the forms.

Q: If the prime contractor is a DBE, does he have to solicit DBE subcontractors? A: Yes, the DBE requirements still apply if the prime intends to subcontract work out. Good

Faith Efforts must be used to solicit DBEs. Q: If the area of work is one where there are less than three DBE contractors, how is the

contractor to document this? A: Copies of printouts from MDOT and SAM showing no DBEs and advertisements soliciting

quotes for all subcontract areas, including the questionable areas, will be adequate if the dates on the printouts are prior to the bid or proposal closing date.

http://mdotjboss.state.mi.us/UCP/

http://www.sam.gov/

American Iron and Steel Contract Language

The Contractor acknowledges to and for the benefit of Kinross Charter Township (“Purchaser”) and the Michigan Department of Environmental Quality (the “State”) that it understands the goods and services under this Agreement are being funded with monies made available by the State Revolving Fund and/or the Drinking Water Revolving Fund and such law contains provisions commonly known as “American Iron and Steel (AIS);” that requires all iron and steel products used in the project be produced in the United States (“AIS Requirements”) including iron and steel provided by the Contractor pursuant to this Agreement. The Contractor hereby represents and warrants to and for the benefit of the Purchaser and the State that (a) the Contractor has reviewed and understands the AIS Requirements, (b) all iron and steel used in the project will be and/or have been produced in the United States in a manner that complies with the AIS Requirements, unless a waiver of the requirements is approved or the State made the determination in writing that the AIS Requirements do not apply to the project, and (c) the Contractor will provide any further verified information, certification or assurance of compliance with this paragraph, or information necessary to support a waiver of the AIS requirements, as may be requested by the Purchaser. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, any failure to comply with this paragraph by the Contractor shall permit the Purchaser or State to recover as damages against the Contractor any loss, expense or cost (including without limitation attorney’s fees) incurred by the Purchaser or State resulting from any such failure (including without limitation any impairment or loss of funding, whether in whole or in part, from the State or any damages owed to the State by the Purchaser). While the Contractor has no direct contractual privity with the State, as a lender to the Purchaser for the funding of its project, the Purchaser and the Contractor agree that the State is a third-party beneficiary and neither this paragraph (nor any other provision of this Agreement necessary to give this paragraph force or effect) shall be amended or waived without the prior written consent of the State.

812008 00 51 00 - 1 NOTICE OF AWARD

SECTION 00 51 00

NOTICE OF AWARD (on ENGINEER’s Letterhead)

Dated

TO:

(BIDDER)

ADDRESS:

Owner:

Contract: (Insert name of Contract as it appears in the Bidding Documents)

Project:

OWNER’s Contract No. ENGINEER’s Project No.

You are notified that Kinross Charter Township has accepted your Bid dated

for the above Contract, and that you are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for:

(describe Work, alternates, or sections of Work awarded)

The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is:

Dollars ($ ).

Five unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award. A set of the Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award.

1. Deliver to ENGINEER five counterparts of the Agreement, fully executed by Bidder.

2. Deliver with the executed Agreement(s) the Contract security (Bonds) and insurance certificates as specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions.

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited. The information provided will be reviewed, bound into the Contract Documents, submitted to the OWNER for signature, and distributed to the appropriate parties. Two fully executed counterparts of the Contract Documents will be returned to you.

812008 00 51 00 - 2 NOTICE OF AWARD

Sincerely,

FLEIS & VANDENBRINK ENGINEERING, INC.

By: Signature Title

cc: KINROSS CHARTER TOWNSHIP Enclosure

END OF SECTION

812008 00 52 00 - 1 AGREEMENT

SECTION 00 52 00

AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT is by and between Kinross Charter Township (OWNER) and

(CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereby agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 - WORK 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents.

The Work is generally described as follows:

FOOD WASTE HANDLING BUILDING

ARTICLE 2 - THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is a part, is generally

described as follows: Kinross Charter Township Chippewa County, Michigan

Food Waste Handling Building SRF Project No. 5611-03

ARTICLE 3 - ENGINEER 3.01 The Project has been designed by FLEIS & VANDENBRINK ENGINEERING, INC.

(ENGINEER), which is to act as OWNER's representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time of the Essence

A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

4.02 Contract Times: Dates

A. The Work will be substantially completed in accordance with the following:

1. The work will be completed within 420 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the

General Conditions within 450 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.

812008 00 52 00 - 2 AGREEMENT

4.03 Liquidated Damages

A. CONTRACTOR and OWNER recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that OWNER will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and Milestones not achieved within the times specified in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the Contract. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty):

1. Substantial Completion: CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $1300 for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified in Paragraph 4.02.A above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete.

2. Completion of remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final

payment, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $1000 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.

3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and final completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently.

ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract:

A. For all Work, at the prices stated in CONTRACTOR’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit.

TOTAL OF ALL LUMP SUM AND UNIT PRICE BID ITEMS

$ (use words) (figures)

The extended prices for Unit Price Work set forth as of the Effective Date of the Contract are based on estimated quantities. As provided in Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions, estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and classifications are to be made by ENGINEER.

ARTICLE 6 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the

General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions.

6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage

A. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraphs 6.02.A.1 below. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract.

812008 00 52 00 - 3 AGREEMENT

1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER may determine or OWNER may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract.

a. 90% of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has been

50% completed as determined by ENGINEER, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, then as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, there will be no additional retainage; and

b. 10% of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the

balance being retainage).

B. Upon Substantial Completion, OWNER shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95% of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by OWNER pursuant to Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less 150% of ENGINEER’S estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.

6.03 Final Payment

A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said Paragraph 15.06.

ARTICLE 7 - INTEREST

7.01 All moneys not paid when due shall bear interest at the rate of 2 points above the Prime Rate

percent per annum.

ARTICLE 8 - CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS

8.01 In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Contract, CONTRACTOR makes the following

representations:

A. CONTRACTOR has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and any data and reference items identified in the Contract Documents.

B. CONTRACTOR has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the

Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. CONTRACTOR is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may

affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. CONTRACTOR has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of

subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that may be identified in the Supplementary Conditions especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that may be identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

812008 00 52 00 - 4 AGREEMENT

E. CONTRACTOR has considered the information known to CONTRACTOR itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR; and (3) CONTRACTOR’s safety precautions and programs.

F. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph,

CONTRACTOR agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract.

G. CONTRACTOR is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and

others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. H. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities,

or discrepancies that CONTRACTOR has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.

I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of

all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. J. CONTRACTOR’S entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by

CONTRACTOR that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

9.01 Contents

A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:

1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 7, inclusive). 2. Performance bond (pages 1 to 3, inclusive). 3. Payment bond (pages 1 to 3, inclusive).

4. General Conditions (2 title pages, table of contents pages i to v, and pages 1 to 65,

inclusive). 5. Supplementary Conditions (pages 1 to 7, inclusive). 6. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual.

7. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) with each sheet bearing the

following general title: Kinross Charter Township, Chippewa County, Michigan, Combined Heat and Power Improvements.

9. Addenda (numbers 1 to ____ , inclusive).

10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):

812008 00 52 00 - 5 AGREEMENT

a. CONTRACTOR's Bid (pages ______ to _____, inclusive). b. Documentation submitted by CONTRACTOR prior to Notice of Award (pages

______ to ______, inclusive).

11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and are not attached hereto:

a. Notice to Proceed. b. Work Change Directives. c. Change Orders.

B. The documents listed in paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as

expressly noted otherwise above). C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9. D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided

in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 10 - MISCELLANEOUS

10.01 Terms

A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions.

10.02 Assignment of Contract

A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.

10.03 Successors or Assigns

A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.

10.04 Severability

A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.

10.05 Contractor’s Certifications

812008 00 52 00 - 6 AGREEMENT

A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 10.05:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract execution;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract.

812008 00 52 00 - 7 AGREEMENT

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement. This Agreement will be effective on __________________________, 20_______ (which is the Effective Date of the Contract).

OWNER: CONTRACTOR:

_______________________________________ ______________________________________

By: ____________________________________ By: Printed Name: ___________________________ Printed Name: __________________________ Title:___________________________________ Title: ___________________________________ Date: ___________________________________ Date: _________________________________

(If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest ___________________________________ Attest Title: ___________________________________ Title: __________________________________ Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices: ________________________________________ ______________________________________ ________________________________________ ______________________________________ ________________________________________ ______________________________________

END OF SECTION

812008 00 55 00 - 1 NOTICE TO PROCEED

SECTION 00 55 00

NOTICE TO PROCEED (on ENGINEER’s letterhead)

Dated

TO:

(CONTRACTOR]

ADDRESS:

Contract: Kinross Charter Township, Chippewa County, Michigan Kinross Charter Township Food Waste Handling Building, SRF Project No. 5611-03

Project: Kinross Charter Township Food Waste Handling Building, SRF Project No. 5611-03

ENGINEER’s Project No. 812008

On behalf of the Kinross Charter Township, you are hereby notified that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on . On that date, you shall start performing your obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date unless otherwise approved by OWNER. In accordance with the Agreement, the number of days to achieve Substantial Completion is , and the number of days to achieve readiness for final payment is . Before starting any Work at the Site, you must comply with the following:

[Note any access limitations, security procedures, or other restrictions]

Sincerely,

FLEIS & VANDENBRINK ENGINEERING, INC. By: Signature Title

cc: KINROSS CHARTER TOWNSHIP

END OF SECTION

EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond

Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 1 of 3

SECTION 00 61 13

PERFORMANCE BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address):

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Effective Date of the Agreement: Amount: Description (name and location):

BOND Bond Number: Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):

Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 16

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal) Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: By: Signature Signature (attach power of attorney) Print Name Print Name Title Title Attest: Attest: Signature Signature Title Title

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to

Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.



1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 3.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

3.1 The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;

3.2 The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and

3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.

4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.

5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:

5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;

5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence,

to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or

5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or

5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:

7.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and

7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.



10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears.

13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

14. Definitions

14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims

for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.

14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.

14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

14.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond


SECTION 00 61 14

PAYMENT BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address): SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address):

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Effective Date of the Agreement: Amount: Description (name and location):

BOND

Bond Number: Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):

Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 18

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause

this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal)

Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference

to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.



1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.

2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.

5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following:

5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor,

5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non-

payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and

5.1.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the

address described in Paragraph 13).

5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).

6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.

7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:

7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and

7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.

8. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.

10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.



12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

16. Definitions

16.1 Claim: A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:

1. The name of the Claimant; 2. The name of the person for whom the labor

was done, or materials or equipment furnished;

3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished;

5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim;

7. The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and

8. The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.

16.2 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.

16.3 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

16.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

16.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

812008 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS

SECTION 00 72 00

GENERAL CONDITIONS

EJCDC NO. C-700 (2013 EDITION) 2 TITLE PAGES, TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGES I TO V, AND PAGES 1 THROUGH 65

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.

Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with

respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of

the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Agreement Between Owner and

Contractor for Construction Contract (EJCDC® C-520, Stipulated Sum, or C-525, Cost-Plus, 2013 Editions).

Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other.

To prepare supplementary conditions that are coordinated with the General Conditions, use EJCDC’s

Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC® C-800, 2013 Edition). The full EJCDC

Construction series of documents is discussed in the Commentary on the 2013 EJCDC Construction

Documents (EJCDC® C-001, 2013 Edition).

Copyright © 2013:

National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794

(703) 684-2882

www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005

(202) 347-7474

www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400

(800) 548-2723

www.asce.org

The copyright for this document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above.

The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents;

please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE.

NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring

organizations above.



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ......................................................................................... 1

1.01 Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.02 Terminology ........................................................................................................................... 5

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ....................................................................................................... 6

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ........................................................................ 6

2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................. 6

2.03 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................. 6

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 7

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................. 7

2.06 Electronic Transmittals ........................................................................................................... 7

Article 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 8

3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................... 8

3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................. 8

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................. 8

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ............................................................................ 9

3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................ 10

Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ................................................................ 10

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ...................................................... 10

4.02 Starting the Work ................................................................................................................. 10

4.03 Reference Points .................................................................................................................. 10

4.04 Progress Schedule ................................................................................................................ 10

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ........................................................................................... 11

Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental

Conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 12

5.01 Availability of Lands ............................................................................................................. 12

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. 12

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ..................................................................................... 13

5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................ 14

5.05 Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 15



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii

5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ...................................................................... 17

Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................... 19

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................... 19

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................ 19

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ......................................................................................................... 20

6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................. 23

6.05 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... 23

6.06 Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... 25

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ................................................... 25

Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 26

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence ....................................................................................... 26

7.02 Labor; Working Hours .......................................................................................................... 26

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ..................................................................................... 26

7.04 “Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................... 27

7.05 Substitutes ........................................................................................................................... 28

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................. 29

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................................................................... 31

7.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................. 31

7.09 Taxes .................................................................................................................................... 32

7.10 Laws and Regulations ........................................................................................................... 32

7.11 Record Documents ............................................................................................................... 32

7.12 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... 32

7.13 Safety Representative .......................................................................................................... 33

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ....................................................................................... 33

7.15 Emergencies ......................................................................................................................... 34

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals .................................................................. 34

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee................................................................... 36

7.18 Indemnification .................................................................................................................... 37

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................... 37

Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................ 38

8.01 Other Work .......................................................................................................................... 38

8.02 Coordination ........................................................................................................................ 39

8.03 Legal Relationships ............................................................................................................... 39



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii

Article 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 40

9.01 Communications to Contractor ............................................................................................ 40

9.02 Replacement of Engineer ..................................................................................................... 40

9.03 Furnish Data ......................................................................................................................... 40

9.04 Pay When Due ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .......................................................... 40

9.06 Insurance .............................................................................................................................. 40

9.07 Change Orders ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 41

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................. 41

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ............................................................... 41

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .................................................................................... 41

9.12 Safety Programs ................................................................................................................... 41

Article 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ...................................................................... 41

10.01 Owner’s Representative ....................................................................................................... 41

10.02 Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... 41

10.03 Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 42

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 42

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .................................................................... 42

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work .................................................................................... 42

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 42

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities .................................................... 42

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program ......................................................................................... 43

Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ...................................... 43

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .......................................................... 43

11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................. 44

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ..................................................................................... 44

11.04 Change of Contract Price ..................................................................................................... 44

11.05 Change of Contract Times .................................................................................................... 45

11.06 Change Proposals ................................................................................................................. 45

11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................. 46

11.08 Notification to Surety ........................................................................................................... 47

Article 12 – Claims ......................................................................................................................... 47



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv

12.01 Claims ................................................................................................................................... 47

Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ........................................................ 48

13.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................. 48

13.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................... 50

13.03 Unit Price Work .................................................................................................................... 51

Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....... 52

14.01 Access to Work ..................................................................................................................... 52

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 52

14.03 Defective Work..................................................................................................................... 53

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................. 53

14.05 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................. 53

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work .................................................................................................. 54

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work .................................................................................... 54

Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period .......................... 55

15.01 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................... 55

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ............................................................................................. 58

15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................ 58

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ..................................................................................................... 59

15.05 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 59

15.06 Final Payment ....................................................................................................................... 59

15.07 Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................. 61

15.08 Correction Period ................................................................................................................. 61

Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ....................................................................... 62

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work .................................................................................................. 62

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ......................................................................................... 62

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................. 63

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................ 63

Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ...................................................................................... 64

17.01 Methods and Procedures ..................................................................................................... 64

Article 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................ 64

18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................ 64

18.02 Computation of Times .......................................................................................................... 64

18.03 Cumulative Remedies .......................................................................................................... 64



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page v

18.04 Limitation of Damages ......................................................................................................... 65

18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................ 65

18.06 Survival of Obligations ......................................................................................................... 65

18.07 Controlling Law .................................................................................................................... 65

18.08 Headings ............................................................................................................................... 65



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 65

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with

initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning

indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with

initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and

paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which

clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract

Documents.

2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets

forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer,

and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by

Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and

which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the

Contract Documents.

4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices

for the Work to be performed.

5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.

6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents,

and all Addenda.

7. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,

Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.

8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes

an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or

the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective

Date of the Contract.

9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with

the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price

or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the

requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the

Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other

relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.

10. Claim—(a) A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in

compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment

of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer

concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work

under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change

Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to

address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract; or (b) a

demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance

with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision

regarding a Change Proposal; or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer




has declined to address. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a

Claim.

11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated

biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other

material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed

pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and

Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials

Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5501 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and

Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act,

15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the

Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute,

law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating

to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or

dangerous waste, substance, or material.

12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and

Contractor concerning the Work.

13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which

together comprise the Contract.

14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion

of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. .

15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a)

achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the

Work.

16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for

performance of the Work.

17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.

18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and

character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.

19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the

Contract becomes effective.

20. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.

21. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the

Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of

Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or

property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for

the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are

controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and

the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental

Condition.

23. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes,

rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies,

agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.




24. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real

property, or personal property.

25. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract

requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior

to Substantial Completion of all the Work.

26. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of

the Bid.

27. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which

the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to

perform the Work.

28. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the

Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work,

pursuant to the terms of the Contract.

29. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing

the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to

accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.

30. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers,

contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing,

commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the

Contract Documents is a part.

31. Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for,

procuring and constructing the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding

Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing

conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions,

Supplementary Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual

may be bound in one or more volumes.

32. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned

to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative

or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative.

33. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are

representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which

such portion of the Work will be judged.

34. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of

required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals

and the performance of related construction activities.

35. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating

portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for

reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

36. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or

information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and

submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,

whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.




37. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner

upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and

such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.

38. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for

materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work,

and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the

Work.

39. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with

any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.

40. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has

progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified

part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so

that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it

is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as

applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.

41. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner

makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions.

42. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements

these General Conditions.

43. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor

having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials

or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.

44. Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the

Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site,

or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site

(except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site.

If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to

conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements

of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective

information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or

environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are

hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under

Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06.

45. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,

manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any

encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey

electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other

communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm

water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

46. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.

47. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof

required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the

result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to

produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and

equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing,

start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.




48. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the

Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer,

ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used

in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,”

“as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional

judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,”

“acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to

describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that

such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to

evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract

Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as

shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement

indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and

shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct

the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility

contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract

Documents.

C. Day:

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next

midnight.

D. Defective:

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is

unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or

b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard,

test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless

responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at

Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04).

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,

shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or

some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable

condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,

shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or

equipment complete and ready for intended use.




3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials,

or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment

complete and ready for intended use.

4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to

specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four

words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and

install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-

known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract

Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. Bonds: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner,

Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of

the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each

named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or

elsewhere in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be

provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6.

C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the executed counterparts of the

Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly

deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as

identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise), the certificates and other

evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully

executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document

format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of

reproduction.

B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the

Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other

design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract

available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this

provision to Engineer.

2.03 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as

otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to

Engineer for timely review:

1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for

starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones

specified in the Contract;

2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and




3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and

prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides

the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress

payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate

amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor,

Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding

among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph

2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing

Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required

records.

B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific

individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and

responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit

and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on

behalf of each respective party.

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference,

attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review for

acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with

Paragraph 2.03.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and

adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be

made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly

progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance

will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing,

scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from

Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a

workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and

substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component

parts of the Work.

2.06 Electronic Transmittals

A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor

may transmit, and shall accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents,

drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other

submittals, in electronic media or digital format, either directly, or through access to a

secure Project website.

B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for electronic or digital transmittals, then

Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.

C. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes

no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items

resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or




computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or

from those established in applicable transmittal protocols.

ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if

required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or

part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the

electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies

derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed

record version shall govern.

D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether

written or oral.

E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided

herein.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations

1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference

standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or

Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the

standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in

effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there

were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract

Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code,

or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or

responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors,

consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract

Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be

effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to

supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake

responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents

prepared by or for Engineer.

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies:

1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each

part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check

and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to

applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer

any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual

knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict,




error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by

Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued

pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of

the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within

the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable

Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual,

reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor

shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the

Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until

the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or

interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract

Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict,

error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had

actual knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies:

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the

provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall

take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between

such provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code,

or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by

reference as a Contract Document); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the

Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents

would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents

A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall

submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract

Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or

relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible

after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the

Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder.

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or

decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract

Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and

binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner,

unless it appeals by filing a Claim.

C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract

Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the

Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or

otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give

written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or

interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter

in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.




3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications,

or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of

Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such

Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the

Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and

specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or

2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse

any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written

consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the

Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract

Documents for record purposes.

ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of

the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to

Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective

Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the

sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the

Contract, whichever date is earlier.

4.02 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times

commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date.

4.03 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction

which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the

Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve

the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or

relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to

Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or

requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be

responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property

monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph

2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in

Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in

changing the Contract Times.




2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times

shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.

B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes

or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution

of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by

Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress

A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or

interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled

to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor’s

entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment

being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for

delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay,

disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or

Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor.

C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by

unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and

those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable

adjustment in Contract Times. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract

Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete

the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and

exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph.

Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract

Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following:

1. severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and

earthquakes;

2. abnormal weather conditions;

3. acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or

adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8);

and

4. acts of war or terrorism.

D. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting

from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility

that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated

with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions,

are governed by Article 5.

E. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or

progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent

to the Site.

F. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for

any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or

interference caused by or within the control of Contractor.




G. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or

Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying,

disrupting, or interfering event.

ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

5.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or

restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which

Contractor must comply in performing the Work.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement

of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements

are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a

mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and

Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for

temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the

storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site,

adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or

otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not

unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction

equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility

for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for

Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for

injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas;

provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or

from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is

responsible.

2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area

because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of

the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take

immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise;

(b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with

such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute

resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and

Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers,

directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of

each and any of them from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses,

and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,

attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute

resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,

brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party

indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part




by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions

or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the

Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste

materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials,

rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and

the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work

Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction

equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all

property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.

D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be

loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any

part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger

them.

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

adjacent to the Site;

2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities); and

3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the

accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with

respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract

Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely

upon the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any

geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to

Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or

make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including,

but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and

procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and

programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or

shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any

such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.




5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is

uncovered or revealed at the Site either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is

entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered

and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the

Contract Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further

disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection

therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and

Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such

condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an

emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph,

Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine

the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the

condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site

condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule

information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the

Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in

question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner

in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.

C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s

written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement

to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in

question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating

whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or

rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in

part.

D. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract

Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical

condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or

decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work;

subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in

Paragraph 5.04.A;

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in

Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,




c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned

on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work

within the Contract Times.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract

Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a

commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the

submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or

otherwise; or

b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or

revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study

of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements

or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s

making such commitment; or

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount

or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any

such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount

or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later

than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor

regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question.

5.05 Underground Facilities

A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract

Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is

based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such

Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly

provided in the Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any

such information or data provided by others; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor

shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground

Facilities at the Site;

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents

as being at the Site;

c. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such

Underground Facilities, during construction; and

d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and

repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered

or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not

shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after




becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or

performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by

Paragraph 7.15), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to

that owner and to Owner and Engineer.

C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude

whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,

or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent cost or

schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the

Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question;

determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications

to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground

Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and

recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and

protection of such Underground Facility.

D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of

Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written

statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in

question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility,

indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting

or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in

part.

E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or

Contract Times, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the

Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or

indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference,

causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for,

performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be

aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the

Underground Facility in question;

b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in

Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;

c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned

on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work

within the Contract Times; and

d. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount

or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any

such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount

or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later

than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor

regarding the Underground Facility in question.




5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental

Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and

2. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the

accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with

respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract

Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on

the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or

environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for

such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against

Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees,

agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including,

but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and

procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and

programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or

shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any

such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous

Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such

removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the

scope of the Work.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all

Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or

anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the

costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the

presence of any such Constituents of Concern.

E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose

removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being

within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is

responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall

immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection

with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required

by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm

such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the

necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take

corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such

actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide

Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for

whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in

question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition,

and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs.




F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental

Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits

related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such

condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work,

or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.

G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if

any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such

Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by

Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of

Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off.

H. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work

based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under

such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area

affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change

procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by

Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8.

I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold

harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them

from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees

and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or

arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous

Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was

not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents,

identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or

identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2)

was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in

this Paragraph 5.06.H shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and

against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and

hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and

against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and

charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or

arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to

control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or

by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition

created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this

Paragraph 5.06.J shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and

against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of

Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed

at the Site.




ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at

least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all

of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds shall remain in effect until one

year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction

period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by

Laws or Regulations, the Supplementary Conditions, or other specific provisions of the

Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the

Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by

Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in “Companies

Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as

Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended and

supplemented) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S.

Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be

accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The

evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact

signed the accompanying bond.

C. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or

authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required

amounts.

D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent,

or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the

Project is located, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor

shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving

rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with

the bond and surety requirements above.

E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from

the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

F. Upon request, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor,

Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the

performance of the Work.

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions

A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in

the Supplementary Conditions.

B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or

Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or

authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue insurance

policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the

Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under

this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better.

C. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional

insured (as identified in this Article, in the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the

Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is




maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Upon

request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such

required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and

documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Contractor may block

out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or

endorsement furnished under this provision.

D. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional

insured (as identified in this Article, the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the

Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining

the policies, coverages, and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any).

Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence

of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies and

endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles.

Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in

any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.

E. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other

party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or

Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, shall not be

construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.

F. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by

the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase

prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the

required coverage.

G. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Owner may exclude the

Contractor from the Site, impose an appropriate set-off against payment, and exercise

Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

H. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required

insurance, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other

party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage,

and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.

I. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract

necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests.

J. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on

Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and

entities in the Contract.

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance

A. Workers’ Compensation: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation

and employer’s liability insurance for:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee

benefit acts.

2. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act

coverage (if applicable).

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death

of Contractor’s employees (by stop-gap endorsement in monopolist worker’s

compensation states).




4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable).

B. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain

commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of

Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against:

1. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any

person other than Contractor’s employees.

2. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage.

3. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction

of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom.

C. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy

shall be written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form)

and include the following coverages and endorsements:

1. Products and completed operations coverage:

a. Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment.

b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in

the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of

continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.

2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, to the extent permitted by law, including but not

limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph

7.18.

3. Broad form property damage coverage.

4. Severability of interest.

5. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.

6. Personal injury coverage.

7. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products

and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG

20 37 10 01 (together); or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together); or their

equivalent.

8. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04,

“Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named

Insured” or its equivalent.

D. Automobile liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance

against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property

damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The

automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis.

E. Umbrella or excess liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess

liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general

liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Subject to

industry-standard exclusions, the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every

one of the underlying policies.

F. Contractor’s pollution liability insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy

covering third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs, as a result




of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This

insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion.

G. Additional insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability,

umbrella or excess, and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional

insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified in the

Supplementary Conditions; include coverage for the respective officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of

all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall

provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those

arising from both ongoing and completed operations) on a non-contributory basis.

Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements.

H. Contractor’s professional liability insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish

professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design

services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining

applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance shall provide protection against

claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services, and caused by

a negligent error, omission, or act for which the insured party is legally liable. It shall be

maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after

Substantial Completion. If such professional design services are performed by a

Subcontractor, and not by Contractor itself, then the requirements of this paragraph may

be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such

Subcontractor.

I. General provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall:

1. include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article.

2. be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the

Supplementary Conditions, or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater.

3. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled,

materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has

been given to Contractor. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice,

Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner, Engineer, and each other

insured under the policy.

4. remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this

Article) and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or

replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or

returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

5. be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that

may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s

other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by

Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly

employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts

any of them may be liable.

J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies,

and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies.




6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03,

Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own

liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations

under the Contract Documents.

B. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies

required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability

policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.

6.05 Property Insurance

A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall

purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis,

in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible

amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and

Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds, and all Subcontractors, and any

individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under

such builder’s risk policy, as insureds or named insureds. For purposes of the

remainder of this Paragraph 6.05, Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07, and any corresponding

Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured shall collectively be

referred to as “insureds.”

2. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance

for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials

and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes

of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact;

aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown,

boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic

activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal;

demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other

than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be

specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. If insurance against mechanical

breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake;

volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available

under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance may be

provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor.

3. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials,

supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar

nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication,

construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or

assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract;

and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent

constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to

the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for

the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring,

falsework, and temporary structures.

4. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property

(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects).




5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the

Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the

premises of a manufacturer or Supplier).

6. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit.

7. allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner, such that those portions of

the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the

builder’s risk insurance.

8. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth below.

9. provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of

loss covered.

10. not include a co-insurance clause.

11. include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to

any defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions.

12. include performance/hot testing and start-up.

13. be maintained in effect, subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial

Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner, until the Work is

complete.

B. Notice of Cancellation or Change: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other

evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this

Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not

be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written

notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any

such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each

other insured.

C. Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk or property insurance shall pay for

costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible.

D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the

Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then

Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will

provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer. The builder’s risk

insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or

occupancy; rather, those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may

come off the builder’s risk policy, while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or

used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.

E. Additional Insurance: If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in

or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this

Paragraph 6.05, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.

F. Insurance of Other Property: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not

require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, such as tools, construction

equipment, or other personal property owned by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or an

employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor, then the entity or individual owning such

property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it, and if so in what

amount.




6.06 Waiver of Rights

A. All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05, expressly including the builder’s

risk policy, shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or

damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or

against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. Owner and Contractor waive all rights

against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees,

agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and

damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss

covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in

addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all Subcontractors, all

individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, and the

officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors

of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of

the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to

the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise

payable under any policy so issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers,

directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each

and any of them, for:

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending

beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by,

arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner;

and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or

resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property

insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during

partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion

pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss

referred to in Paragraph 6.06.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of

payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of

recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of

them.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a

Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the

Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities

identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants,

and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and

subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out

of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk

insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by

Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the




policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to

such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other

insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days

after notice of such claim.

B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to

multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as

fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause.

A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of

insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with

such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the

dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced,

the money so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof

covered by Change Order, if needed.

ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently,

devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary

to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely

responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of

construction.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident

superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer

except under extraordinary circumstances.

7.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the

Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at

all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or

property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract

Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday

through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal

holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays,

Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be

unreasonably withheld.

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and

assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation,

construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat,

telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and

incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work,

whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents.

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new,

except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and




guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If

required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of

required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected,

protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable

Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.

7.04 “Or Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract

Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier,

the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The

specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function,

appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is

followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted,

Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or

equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described

below.

1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment

proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so

that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer shall deem it an “or equal”

item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment

will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability,

appearance, strength, and design characteristics;

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the

results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a

functioning whole;

3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service;

and

4) it is not objectionable to Owner.

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times;

and

2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named

in the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or

equal” item at Contractor’s expense.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to

evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional

data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability.

No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is

complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal”, which will be

evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will

advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.




D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request

shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request

shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision

of the Contract Documents.

E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or

equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may

request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph

7.05.

7.05 Substitutes

A. Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be

furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no

substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other

items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent

possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the

Site.

1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to

determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to

that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests

for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other

than Contractor.

2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as

supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under

the circumstances.

3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed

substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The

application:

a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:

1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the

general design,

2) be similar in substance to that specified, and

3) be suited to the same use as that specified.

b. will state:

1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will

necessitate a change in Contract Times,

2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a

change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other

direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the

design to the proposed substitute item, and

3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection

with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.

c. will identify:

1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and




2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.

d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or

indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in

Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors

affected by any resulting change.

B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to

evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner.

Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute

item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered,

furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines

that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be

evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution

itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times.

Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.

C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a

special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a

substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a

substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for

the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute.

Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making

changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with

Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed

substitute at Contractor’s expense.

F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request,

Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution.

The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be

reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Contractor

may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D, by

timely submittal of a Change Proposal.

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the

Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner.

B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for

the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.

C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the

Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other

individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has

reasonable objection.

D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to

Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already

deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or

otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner

unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days.




E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work. Owner also may require

Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require

a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted

the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for

acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make

written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any

such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis

of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an

acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity.

F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be

entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, with respect to the

replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30

days of Owner’s requirement of replacement.

G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity,

whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the

completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

H. On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors

and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and

Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.

I. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of

the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.

J. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any

of the Work.

K. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities

performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner,

except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed

herein.

L. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall

not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or

delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.

M. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an

appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to

the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner

and Engineer.

N. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information

about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the

particular Subcontractor or Supplier.




O. Nothing in the Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such

Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; nor

2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the

payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in

the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,

process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by

others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the

Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual

knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for

the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be

disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold

harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,

consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and

other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising

out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in

the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any

invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not

identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by

patent rights or copyrights.

C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and


employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and



arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement

of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or

resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or

device not specified in the Contract Documents.

7.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for

all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in

obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and

inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time

of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a

negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for

providing permanent service to the Work




7.09 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by

Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which

are applicable during the performance of the Work.

7.10 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations

applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by

applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for

monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to

know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and

losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers,

directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each

and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not

limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals

and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to

such Work or other action. It shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that

the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations,

but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the

submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a

negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of

performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations

having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and

other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on

the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times

resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such notice Contractor may submit a

Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.

7.11 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings,

Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written

interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such

record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during

construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be

available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver

these record documents to Engineer.

7.12 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety

precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not

relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the

performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations.

Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the

necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;




2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in

storage on or off the Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,

pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground

Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of

construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of

persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or

loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.

Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities,

and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent

to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them

in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in

progress.

C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if

any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are

applicable to the Work.

D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s

safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must

comply while at the Site.

E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3

caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor,

Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to

perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be

remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of

Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone

employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not

attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of

Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly

employed by any of them).

F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such

time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and

Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as

otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).

G. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever

Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or

correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

7.13 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site

whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining

and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data

sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or




exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or

Regulations.

7.15 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the

Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage,

injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes

that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have

been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a

change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in

response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals

A. Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements:

1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:

a. reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings

and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract

Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified

performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog

numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered

with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage,

assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities

for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and

safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has

satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to

Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any

variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the

Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication

separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of

Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to

Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.

B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop

Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the

accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities,

dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data

to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to




provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited

purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

2. Samples:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.

b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent

data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as

Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited

purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the

Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and

approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of

Contractor.

C. Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with

the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the

Specifications.

D. Engineer’s Review:

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with

the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will

be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or

incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract

Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a

functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques,

sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs

incident thereto.

3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of

the assembly in which the item functions.

4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve

Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract

Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph

7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific

written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or

Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements

of the Contract Documents in a Field Order.

5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve

Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph

7.16.A and B.

6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from

the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances,

change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a

Change Order.

7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample,

or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document.




8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and

commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the

provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4.

E. Resubmittal Procedures:

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required

number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples

for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to

revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.

2. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy

to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer

will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop

Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be

responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-

off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.

3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor

shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner

may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for

such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the

Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to

rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than

Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom

Contractor is responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work

that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s

obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment

related thereto by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;

6. the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;

7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

8. any correction of defective Work by Owner.




D. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into

by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in

the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to

Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract.

7.18 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other

obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and


employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and



arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance

of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily

injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other

than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent

caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or

any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of

the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the

survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor,

any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to

perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the

indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any

limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for

Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’

compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not extend to

the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees,

agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings,

opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of

the injury or damage.

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services

are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless

such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means,

methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to

provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,

materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,

Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must

satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly

licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,

specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop




Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such

professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when

submitted to Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and

completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design

professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance

and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and

design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with

performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract

Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except

design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph

7.16.D.1.

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria

specified by Owner or Engineer.

ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

8.01 Other Work

A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may

perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by

Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner

may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and

facilities at or adjacent to the Site.

B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or

through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice

thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding

the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information

to Contractor.

C. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility

owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s

employees, proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for

the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other

work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required

to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly

integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by

cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor

may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose

work will be affected.

D. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work

performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and

promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other

work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of

Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such

other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent

defects and deficiencies in such other work.




8.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent

to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to

arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be

set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of

any such other work:

1. the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for

coordination of the activities among the various contractors;

2. an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and

responsibility; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole

authority and responsibility for such coordination.

8.03 Legal Relationships

A. If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s

employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner causes damage to

the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts,

interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through

actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the

Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal

seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this

paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The

entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment shall take into account

information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the

Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms

of the Contract. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be

conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other

contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference

that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the

Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to

complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying,

disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner

performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures

and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other

contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to

Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual

rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this

paragraph.

C. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees,

Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable

direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of

Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s

other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may

impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor.




D. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor,

or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s

failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim

arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at

or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against

Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the

claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or

otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law,

and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of

them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and

other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out

of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference.

ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

9.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all

communications to Contractor through Engineer.

9.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor

makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s

status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.

9.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

9.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the

Agreement.

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings

A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph

5.01.

B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points

are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.

C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports

of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions

relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.

9.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and

property insurance are set forth in Article 6.

9.07 Change Orders

A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.




9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth

in Paragraph 14.02.B.

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible

for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction,

or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to

comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will

not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is

set forth in Paragraph 5.06.

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that

financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract

Documents (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).

9.12 Safety Programs

A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific

applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been

informed.

B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.

ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

10.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and

responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative

during construction are set forth in the Contract.

10.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of

construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and

qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the

various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such

visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the

Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be

required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or

quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a

greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the

Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep

Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against

defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority

and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during




or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not

supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means,

methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions

and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and

Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.

10.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project

Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the

progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such

Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and

limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. If Owner

designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not

Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee, the responsibilities and authority and

limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the

Supplementary Conditions.

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set

forth in Paragraph 7.16.

B. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings

submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in

Paragraph 7.19.

C. Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11.

D. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work

performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and

judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for

initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such

decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will

not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings,

interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other

provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to

exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or

performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, shall create, impose, or give rise

to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any

Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee

or agent of any of them.




B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for

Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the

safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to

comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will

not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any

Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the

Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation

and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates

of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by

Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the

requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the

results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also

apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any.

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific

applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which

Engineer has been informed.

ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work

Change Directive, or a Field Order.

1. Change Orders:

a. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in

the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must

be set forth in a Change Order. A Change Order also may be used to establish

amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the

Contract Price or Contract Times.

b. Owner and Contractor may amend those terms and conditions of the Contract

Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work,

(2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3)

other engineering or technical matters, without the recommendation of the

Engineer. Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

2. Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price

or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification

ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a

subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the

Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if

negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract

Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding

change of Contract Price. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an




adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days

after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must

submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times,

or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive.

3. Field Orders: Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not

involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible

with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated

by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and

will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work

involved promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in

the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then before proceeding with the Work

at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein.

11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any

time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such

changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change

involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other

engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if

Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract

Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such

document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a

deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted

Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the

Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work

that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with

Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the

Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract

Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency

as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph

14.05.

11.04 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an

adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any

Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract

Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items

involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); or

2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract

Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for

overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract

Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on




the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a

Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph

11.04.C).

C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be

determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the

various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee

shall be 15 percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five

percent;

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus

a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.01.C.2.a and

11.01.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent

of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the

Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with

respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of

the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the

amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier

Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the

maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of

the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4,

13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which

results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in

cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of

such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment

in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in

accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive.

11.05 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an

adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any

Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article

12.

B. An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in

Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress.

11.06 Change Proposals

A. Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the

Contract Times or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the

requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under

the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under




the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or

Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed

change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.

1. Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but

in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after

such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the

proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and

Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data

shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate

and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire

adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event.

Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any

comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal.

2. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after

receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole,

approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Such actions shall be in

writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take

action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at

any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of

Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the

time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.

3. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Owner and

Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under

Article 12.

B. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design

(as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or

other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the

Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of

such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose

to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.

11.07 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:

1. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties,

including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in

accordance with a Work Change Directive;

2. changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly

contested such set-off;

3. changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b)

required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or

Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the

parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work

involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other

engineering or technical matters; and

4. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the

substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12.




B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed

under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect, as

if fully executed.

11.08 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting

the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but

not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be

Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect

the effect of any such change.

ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS

12.01 Claims

A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted

to the Claims process set forth in this Article:

1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;

2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other

relief under the Contract Documents; and

3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the

design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of

the Work, or other engineering or technical matters.

B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party

to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event

giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the

decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the

Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with

the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the

Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in

good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of

Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately

reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled.

C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full

consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the

exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for

resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in

writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.

D. Mediation:

1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to

mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim

submittal and response process.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement,

either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the

Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination. If

the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim




submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the

mediation, as determined by the mediator.

3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs.

E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in

part, such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other

party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.

F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim

may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does

not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any

time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction,

the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A

denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other

party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.

G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim,

whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a

Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become

final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be

incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work,

the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.

ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

13.01 Cost of the Work

A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum

of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined

below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:

1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract

Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or

2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other

adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined

on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or

incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event

giving rise to the adjustment.

B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in

the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of

the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall

include only the following items:

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of

the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor.

Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other

personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed

full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the

Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the

cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions,

unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and

retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable




thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on

Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent

authorized by Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including

costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in

connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner

deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash

discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns

from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor

shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by

Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from

subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to

Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will

be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the

basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall

be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as

provided in this Paragraph 13.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing

laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically

related to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of

Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies,

equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and

hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of

the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed

which remain the property of Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof,

whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements

approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation,

loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs

shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any

such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no

longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which

Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor,

or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of

them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not

compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection

with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the

deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with

Paragraph 6.05), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes




other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or

indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable.

Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval

of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of

the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier

services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by

the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals

(of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers,

engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and

contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by

Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general

administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule

of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by

Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to

be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at

the Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital

employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or

indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,

including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or

equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not

specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.

D. Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus,

Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any

Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in

Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be

determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C.

E. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined

pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in

accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable

to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.

13.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named

in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such

sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.




B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:

1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade

discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at

the Site, and all applicable taxes; and

2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,

profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included

in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional

payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the

sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by

Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by

allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

13.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price

Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an

amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price

Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for

the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to

Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be

adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work

performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary

determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by

recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision

thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual

conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of

the following paragraph.

E. Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor

may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the

Contract Price if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially

and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of

having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a

decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any

such increase or decrease.




ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE

WORK

14.01 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,

independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the

Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing.

Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them

of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as

applicable.

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts

thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and

testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.

B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory,

or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required

by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs

incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the

provisions of Paragraph 14.05.

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part

thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other

representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging

and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith,

and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and

tests required:

1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate

responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;

2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be

incorporated in the Work;

3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;

4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to

be incorporated into the Work; and

5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to

Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.

Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing

laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner,

Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full

responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.

F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered

by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by

Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s

expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to




cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to

such notice.

14.03 Defective Work

A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not

defective.

B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective,

and to reject defective Work.

C. Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has

actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.

D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of

defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated,

installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the

Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.

E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no

action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any,

on said Work.

F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations

with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages

arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the

inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective

Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is

defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective

Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the

measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then

Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner

prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final

payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the

design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety).

Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s

evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved

by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent

not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the

necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be

incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the

Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may

impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of

defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to

Owner.

14.05 Uncovering Work

A. Engineer has the authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether or

not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.




B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if

requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace

the covering, all at Contractor’s expense.

C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer

or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover,

expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may

require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and

equipment.

1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for

all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering,

exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or

reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work

of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner

shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.

2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an

increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly

attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,

replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount

or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of

the determination that the Work is not defective.

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable

materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed

Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop

the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated;

however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of

Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,

any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct

defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if

Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if

Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner

may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed

expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude

Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and

suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials

and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are

stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and

employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to

the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.

C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the

rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-

offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will




include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed

or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in

the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and

remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.

ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD

15.01 Progress Payments

A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will

serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application

for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will

be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under

the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on

Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period.

B. Applications for Payments:

1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress

payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer

for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the

Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such

supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is

requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but

delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the

Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other

documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free

and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by

appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect

Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an

affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account

of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate

obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the

Agreement.

C. Review of Applications:

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including

each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present

the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing

Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor

may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment

will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s

observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design

professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the

accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge,

information and belief:




a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents

(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon

Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the

Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for

Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the

recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear

to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the

Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have

represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been

performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in

progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities

specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle

Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold

payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending

payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment,

will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction,

or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to

Contractor’s performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has

used the money paid on account of the Contract Price, or

e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to

Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in

Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated

in Paragraph 15.01.C.2.

6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s

opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph

14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental

Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or




e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would

constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause

under the Contract Documents.

D. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s

recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will

become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

E. Reductions in Payment by Owner:

1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner

is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the

performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or

damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of

the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from

workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and

Regulations, and patent infringement;

b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid

damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the

Site;

c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental

Condition for which Contractor is responsible;

e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal

reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return

visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;

f. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph

14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

h. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

i. an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a

termination for cause has occurred;

j. liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve

Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;

k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has

delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and

discharge of such Liens;

l. there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount

recommended.

2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge

or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor

immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action

and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount




remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay

Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner

and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction

imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal

contesting the reduction.

3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified,

the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by

Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment

furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title

defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven

days after the time of payment by Owner.

15.03 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall

notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and

request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the

same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be

completed or corrected before final payment.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an

inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not

consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving

the reasons therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a

preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial

Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or

corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the

preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any

provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the

provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not

substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary

certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially

complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the

certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the

Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver

to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch

list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary

certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.

D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and

Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following

Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of

the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a

permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree

otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of

the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or

occupancy of the Work.




E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of

items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor

may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the

progress payment procedures set forth above.

F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial

Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and

complete or correct items on the punch list.

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially

completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract

Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately

functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended

purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder

of the Work, subject to the following conditions:

1. At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or

occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If

and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete,

Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A

through E for that part of the Work.

2. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor

considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to

issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer

shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of

completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially

complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons

therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the

provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial

Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect

thereof and access thereto.

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to

compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder’s risk or other

property insurance.

15.05 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is

complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and

will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the

Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately

take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.

15.06 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment:

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all

corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with

the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,

guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of




inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other

documents, Contractor may make application for final payment.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously

delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all

Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens

or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.

d. a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all

Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as

approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit

of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material,

and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and

equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner

might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other

burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any

Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor

may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner

against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor

and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final

inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and

accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is

satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under

the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final

Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final

payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such

recommendation shall account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in

Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with

respect to progress payments. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice

to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of

Paragraph 15.07. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to

Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment,

in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the

Application for Payment.

C. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is

ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final

payment.

D. Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application

for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer

(less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation,




including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the

provisions above with respect to progress payments) will become due and shall be paid by

Owner to Contractor.

15.07 Waiver of Claims

A. The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights

against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens,

from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05, from

Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special

guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s

continuing obligations under the Contract Documents.

B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all

claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly

submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.

15.08 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as

may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the

Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is

found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that

Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other

adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be

defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with

Owner’s written instructions:

1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas;

2. correct such defective Work;

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and

replace it with Work that is not defective, and

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to

the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or

in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have

the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and

replaced. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not

limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals

and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to

such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all

costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous

service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item

may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected

or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with

respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such

correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.




E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and

warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a

waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a

period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer.

Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the

Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract

Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such

suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later

than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work.

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by

Contractor and justify termination for cause:

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or

suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);

2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the

Contract Documents;

3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or

4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.

B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving

Contractor (and any surety) ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration

that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract, Owner may proceed to:

1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) notice that

the Contract is terminated; and

2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.

C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has

terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take

possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the

Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete

the Work as Owner may deem expedient.

D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if

Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its

failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.

E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to

receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the

Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs,

losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,

architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid

to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses,




and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner.

Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as

to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change

Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be

required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.

F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not

affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may

thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety

under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due

Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.

G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions

of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent

provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and

without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such

case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents

prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for

overhead and profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services

and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents

in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead

and profit on such expenses; and

3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs

incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead, profits, or revenue,

or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90

consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2)

Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or

(3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then

Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided

Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate

the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph

16.03.

B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if

Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is

submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to

be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the

Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon.

The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a

Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for




expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted

by this paragraph.

ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES

17.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final

resolution under the provisions of this Article:

1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in

full; and

2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under

the Contract Documents, and arising after final payment has been made.

B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article, Owner

or Contractor may:

1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the

Supplementary Conditions; or

2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution

process; or

3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or

mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the

dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS

18.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it

will be deemed to have been validly given if:

1. delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or

to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last

business address known to the sender of the notice.

18.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to

exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period

falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable

jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.

18.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and

remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be

construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of

them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty

or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will

be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with

each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.




18.04 Limitation of Damages

A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution,

and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to

Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in

connection with any other project or anticipated project.

18.05 No Waiver

A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision,

nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.

18.06 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or

given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the

Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or

termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

18.07 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.

18.08 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute

parts of these General Conditions.

812008 00 73 00 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

SECTION 00 73 00

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

Caption and Introductory Statements These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the

Construction Contract, EJCDC C-700 (2013 Edition). All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.

The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.

The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added thereto.

SC-1.01 Defined Terms

SC-1.01 Add the following Defined Terms:

Bulletin - A document outlining possible changes to the Contract Documents which is issued by ENGINEER on behalf of OWNER requesting add or deduct costs from CONTRACTOR.

SC-2.02 Copies of Documents

SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A. in its entirety and insert the following new paragraph in its place:

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor two copies of the Contract Documents including a fully executed counterpart of the Agreement. Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.

SC-4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

SC-4.01 Delete Paragraph 4.01.A in its entirety and insert the following:

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed.

B. The Notice to Proceed will be issued no later than 60 days after the SRF loan closing.

SC-4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.B:

C. The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site are known to Owner.

1. Soil boring logs 1 and 2 report dated April 15th, 2019, prepared by Soils and Structures, entitled: “Report of Geotechnical


Investigation for Kinross Wastewater Treatment Plant Food Waste Handling Building”, consisting of 28 pages. The Technical Data contained in such report upon whose accuracy Contractor may rely are as indicated in the definition of Technical Data in the General Conditions.

SC-5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions

SC-5.06 Delete Paragraphs 5.06.A and 5.06.B in their entirety and insert the following:

A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site are known to Owner.

B. Not Used.

SC-6.03 Contractor’s Liability Insurance

SC-6.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.03.J:

K. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 6.03 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations:

1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs 6.03.A.1 and A.2 of the General Conditions:

a. State: Statutory b. Applicable Federal

(e.g., Longshoreman’s): Statutory

c. Employer’s Liability:

Bodily Injury, each accident $500,000

2. Contractor’s Commercial General Liability under Paragraphs 6.03.B and 6.03.C of the General Conditions which shall include completed operations and product liability coverages and eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody and control of Contractor:

a. General Aggregate $1,000,000

b. Products - Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000

c. Personal and Advertising Injury $500,000

d. Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $500,000


e. Property Damage liability insurance will provide Explosion, Collapse, and Under-ground coverages where applicable.

f. Excess or Umbrella Liability

1) General Aggregate $1,000,000

2) Each Occurrence $1,000,000

3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 6.03.D. of the General Conditions:

a. Combined Single Limit of $500,000

4. Contractor’s Pollution Liability

1) General Aggregate $1,000,000

2) Each Occurrence $1,000,000

5. Additional Insureds: In addition to Owner and Engineer, include as additional insureds the following:

a. Century A&E Corporation

SC-6.04 Owner’s Liabilty Insurance

Delete Paragraph 6.04.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by CONTRACTOR under Paragraph 6.03 of the General Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall purchase OWNER's Protective Liability Insurance written in the name of the OWNER in the amount of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000), Combined Single Limit (CSL) per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. The ENGINEER and Century A&E Corporation. shall be named as additional insureds.

SC-7.02 Labor; Working Hours

SC-7.02.B. Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.02.B:

1. Regular working hours will be 7 am to 5 pm.

2. The Contractor shall not work on the following days/dates:

a. Sundays, unless approved by the OWNER and ENGINEER. b. Holidays: Memorial Day, 4th of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and

Day after Thanksgiving, Christmas Eve and Christmas, New Year’s Eve and New Year’s Day.

c. As designated by permitting agencies.

SC-10.03 Project Representative


SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after

Paragraph 10.03.A:

B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will confer with Engineer regarding RPR's actions.

1. General: RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in

general shall be with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge and approval of Contractor. RPR shall generally communicate with Owner only with the knowledge of and under the direction of Engineer.

2. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and consult with Engineer concerning acceptability.

3. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project-related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof.

4. Liaison:

a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents.

b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations.

c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for proper execution of the Work.

5. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer.

6. Shop Drawings and Samples:

a. Record date of receipt of Samples and Contractor-approved Shop Drawings.


b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and notify Engineer of availability of Samples for examination.

c. Advise Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal for which RPR believes that the submittal has not been approved by Engineer.

7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report such suggestions, together with RPR’s recommendations,if any, to Engineer. Transmit to Contractor in writing decisions as issued by Engineer.

8. Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work:

a. Conduct on-Site observations of Contractor’s work in progress to assist Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents.

b. Report to Engineer whenever RPR believes that any part of Contractor’s work in progress is defective, will not produce a completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents, or will imperil the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise Engineer of that part of work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval.

9. Inspections, Tests, and System Start-ups:

a. Verify that tests, equipment, and systems start-ups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate Owner’s personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records thereof.

b. Observe, record, and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the test procedures and systems start-ups.

10. Records:

a. Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, recording Contractor’s hours on the Site, Subcontractors present at the Site, weather conditions, data relative to questions of Change Orders, Field Orders, Work Change Directives, or changed conditions, Site visitors, deliveriesof equipment or materials, daily activities,


decisions, observations in general, and specific observations in more detail as in the case of observing test procedures; and send copies to Engineer.

b. Record names, addresses, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, web site locations, and telephone numbers of all Contractors, Subcontractors, and major Suppliers of materials and equipment.

c. Maintain records for use in preparing Project documentation.


11. Reports:

a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and of Contractor’s compliance with the Progress Schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals.

b. Draft and recommend to Engineer proposed Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain backup material from Contractor.

c. Immediately notify Engineer of the occurrence of any Site accidents, emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, force majeure or delay events, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the discovery of any Constituent of Concern or Hazardous Environmental Condition.

12. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work completed, and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work.

13. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that materials and equipment certificates, operation and maintenance manuals and other data required by the Contract Documents to be assembled and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have these documents delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to payment for that part of the Work.

14. Completion:

a. Participate in Engineer’s visits to the Site to determine Substantial Completion, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected.

b. Participate in Engineer’s final visit to the Site to determine completion of the Work, in the company of Owner and Contractor, and prepare a final punch list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be remedied.

c. Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning acceptance and issuance of the notice of acceptability of the Work.

C. The RPR shall not:


1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment (including “or-equal” items).

2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents.

3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers.

4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of Contractor’s work.

5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of Owner or Contractor.

6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.

7. Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than Contractor.

8. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.

SC-15.01 Progress Payments

D.1. This paragraph shall be modified so that 30 days is substituted for ten days.

SC-15.03 Substantial Completion

SC-15.03.B Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B:

3. If some or all of the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial Completion and will require re-inspection, or re-testing by Engineer, the cost of such re-inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses, shall be paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.

END OF SECTION

812008 00 91 13 - 1 ADDENDUM

SECTION 00 91 13

ADDENDUM

Addendum No.

Owner:

Contract:

Project: Date:

Owner’s Contract No.: Engineer’s Project No.:

ENGINEER:

NOTICE TO ALL PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS

BIDS DUE: -- ISSUED TO ALL PLANHOLDERS OF RECORD

=====================================================================================

This Addendum is a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the previously issued Bidding Documents. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in rejection of the Bid. SPECIFICATION CHANGES ITEM NO. 1:

Section [Title]

[Paragraph]

[Paragraph]

ITEM NO. 2:

Section [Title]

[Paragraph]

DRAWING CHANGES

ITEM NO. 3:

Sheet(s) :

ITEM NO. 4:

Sheet(s) :

ATTACHMENTS:

END OF SECTION

812008 01 11 00 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK:

A. The Work consists of improvements to the Kinross Charter Township Wastewater Treatment

Plant. This work is performed in accordance with the State Revolving Fund Project Plan adopted by the Township.

B. Major work items include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Construction of a new food waste building to house food waste processing equipment,

storage tanks, mixing systems, and feed pumps. 2. Construction of a Fats, Oils, and Grease (FOG) tank and related facilities. 3. Site grading and storm sewer modifications required for construction of the food waste

building. 4. Installation of food waste piping and handling systems and all associated valves, flow

meters, and equipment as shown on the drawings. 5. Installation of all required electrical, controls, HVAC, lighting, and associated items in the

food waste building. 6. Food waste and FOG force mains to the anaerobic digesters.

1.02 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION AND LIMITATIONS:

A. The principal objective of the OWNER is to process wastewater at the WWTP and maintain compliance with their NPDES permit. CONTRACTOR shall take note that the existing treatment system shall remain in service through the duration of the project. CONTRACTOR shall also take note that OWNER’s staff will be working in and around existing facilities during construction.

B. CONTRACTOR is responsible for means, methods and sequence of construction for the work. The CONTRACTOR shall include a detailed sequence of construction prior to initiating work as a part of the construction schedule submittal required in SECTION 01 33 00 – SUBMITTALS.

1. Food Waste Building: a. The food waste building can be constructed at any time.

2. Electrical Constraints and Construction Sequence: a. Shutdowns and outages shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner

minimum 7 days in advance of shutdown. Shutdowns and outages shall be during normal business hours 7:00 am to 3:30 pm and shall not be scheduled on Fridays. Owner reserves the right to cancel scheduled shutdowns due to high flows at the plant and problems with plant operations.

1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY:

A. The OWNER will occupy premises during the entire construction period. CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with the ENGINEER in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate OWNER usage of the treatment facility.

812008 01 11 00 - 2 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 2 – PRODUCTS - Not used.

PART 3 – EXECUTION - Not used.

END OF SECTION

812008 01 22 00 - 1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

SECTION 01 22 00

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, descriptions of the method of measurement and basis of payment criteria applicable to the Work. It also includes the form of Application for Payment to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting payment for Work performed under the Contract.

1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Application for Payment: Submit three (3) copies to ENGINEER on the attached form or related format with supporting documentation as required by the Contract Documents.

1.03 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES:

A. Measurement by volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and

height or thickness.

B. Measurement by area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius.

C. Linear measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline.

1.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SCHEDULE:

A. The following schedule outlines the method of measurement and basis of payment to be used on the project. Requirements for materials and methods described under each item are included in the related specification SECTION.

1. Inspection and testing fees: Payment by OWNER, unless specifically noted

otherwise.

2. General Conditions, Bonds, Insurance and Mobilization: Shall be paid for on a lump sum basis for the CONTRACTOR’s costs to provide required bonds and insurances, mobilization and miscellaneous requirements stipulated in Section 00 72 00 – GENERAL CONDITIONS. This quantity shall not exceed 5% of the total contract amount. Fifty percent (50%) will be paid on the first Application for Payment and twenty five percent (25%) will be paid on the second and third Applications for Payment. This item shall be included in each respective line item to cover the Contractor’s general conditions for each separately identified item.

3. Shoring: All shoring required for construction, safety and convenience will be

considered temporary and included in construction items.

4. Temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control: Include in related items.

5. Granular material trench backfill: Include in related items. 6. Bedding area trench backfill: Include in related items.


7. Site improvements, removal, and restoration: Include in related items. 8. Surface restoration: Include in related items. Grading, topsoil surface (4”), seeding,

fertilizing and mulch are included as part of this item.

9. Bituminous restoration: Include in related items.

10. Concrete sidewalk and ramp: Include in related items.

11. Removal of existing concrete sidewalk: Include in related items.

12. Sawcutting existing bituminous or concrete pavement: Include in related items.

13. Pipe insulation: Include in related items.

14. Temporary field office for ENGINEER: Include in cost of Food Waste Building construction; complete, furnished, maintained and removed, including cleanup.

15. Food Waste Building: Paid for as a lump sum item. Includes the Food Waste Building

and all related work in its entirety.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORMS: A. Attached are the following forms:

1. Application for Payment. 2. Schedule of Values.

END OF SECTION


APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO.

To: (OWNER)

From: (CONTRACTOR)

Contract:

Project:


For Work accomplished through the date of: .

1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE: $

2. Net change by Change Orders: $

3. Current Contract Price (1 plus 2): $

4. TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE: $

5. RETAINAGE:

% of completed Work: $

% of Contract Price: $

% of stored material: $

Total Retainage: $

6. Total completed and stored to date less retainage (4 minus 5): $

7. LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS: $

8. AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION (6 MINUS 7): $

Accompanying Documentation: CONTRACTOR’S Certification: The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies, to the best of its knowledge, the following: (1) All previous progress payments received from OWNER on account of Work done under the Contract have been applied on account to discharge CONTRACTOR’s legitimate obligations incurred in connection with the Work covered by prior Applications for Payment; (2) Title to all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work, or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment, will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all Liens, security interests, and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a bond acceptable to OWNER indemnifying OWNER against any such Lien, security interest, or encumbrances); and (3) All Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not defective. Dated:

CONTRACTOR

By: Authorized Signature

Printed or Typed Name ENGINEER’s Recommendation: Payment of the above AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION is recommended. Dated

ENGINEER

By: Authorized Signature

Printed or Typed Name

Application No. Date:

ITEM UNIT PRICE

ESTIMATED QUANTITY

SCHEDULE OF VALUES AMOUNT

QUANTITY COMPLETED

AMOUNT % MATERIAL STORED

AMOUNT COMPLETED AND STORED

1. $ $ $ $ $

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

TOTAL $ $ $ $ $

Note: Total Schedule of Values Amount should equal the current Contract Price.

812008 01 26 00 - 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 26 00

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the forms and procedures for modifying the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SCHEDULES:

A. Attached are the following forms: 1. Bulletin. 2. Work Change Directive. 3. Change Order.

END OF SECTION


BULLETIN Page 1 of 2

CONTRACT FOR: BULLETIN NO. OWNER: DATE: DUE DATE: CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: DRAWING REVISION NO.: DRAWING SHEETS ISSUED HEREWITH: DISTRIBUTION: ============================================================================

The items below are being considered as possible changes to the Contract Documents for this Project. CONTRACTOR is requested to submit changes in cost, if any, for each item and indicate whether it is an addition to or deduction from the Contract Price. Include all labor, materials, overhead and profit. After reviewing the effects of those changes in the Work, OWNER may issue a Change Order specifying which changes are to be incorporated in the Work, if any. This Bulletin is not a Change Order and is not to be deemed authorization to proceed with the changes listed. Additional work or materials, where proposed, shall meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, except where noted. CONTRACTOR will be responsible for notifying ENGINEER, in writing, concerning any revision or clarification which causes a change in the Contract Documents, but are not specifically mentioned as a cost item in this Bulletin. CONTRACTOR shall return three (3) completed and signed copies of the Bulletin to ENGINEER on or before the due date noted above. Each proposed change has been described briefly with additional information provided concerning detailed changes required for the major trades concerned. Only one total cost figure has been requested for each item on the Bulletin; however, a complete breakdown is required for each item as supporting documentation. This will allow OWNER to more easily evaluate the proposed cost changes. Each Bulletin item is an all-inclusive item and may concern work from several trades or Subcontractors. It is CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to ensure that all work for each item has been included in the total cost figure provided to OWNER.


BULLETIN Page 2 of 2

BULLETIN NO.

DATE:

SPECIFICATION CHANGES Item No. 1: Section -

[Paragraph] Add/Deduct $

Item No. 2: Section -

[Paragraph]

Add/Deduct $

DRAWING CHANGES Item No. 3: Sheet(s) :

Add/Deduct $

Item No. 4: Sheet(s) :

Add/Deduct $

CONTRACTOR:

Signature

Name and Title of Signatory

Date


WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE Page 1 of 2

No.

OWNER

CONTRACTOR

Contract:

Project:


ENGINEER

You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s) in the Contract Documents:

Description: Purpose of Work Change Directive: Attachments: (List documents supporting change)

If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believe that the above change has affected Contract Price any Claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods as defined in the Contract Documents. Method of determining change in Contract Price:

Unit Prices

Lump Sum

Cost of the Work

Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price: Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Times: $ . Substantial Completion: days; If the change involves an increase, the estimated amount is not to be exceeded without further authorization.

Ready for final payment: days. If the change involves an increase, the estimated times are not to be exceeded without further authorization.

RECOMMENDED: AUTHORIZED:

ENGINEER OWNER

By: By: Date: Date:


WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE Page 2 of 2

INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION

This document was developed for use in situations involving changes in the Work which, if not processed expeditiously, might delay the Project. These changes are often initiated in the field and may affect the Contract Price or the Contract Time. This is not a Change Order, but only a directive to proceed with Work that may be included in a subsequent Change Order. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, a Field Order may be used.

B. COMPLETING THE WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE FORM

ENGINEER initiates the form, including a description of the items involved and attachments. Based on conversations between ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER completes the following:

METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT PRICE: Mark the method to use in determining the final cost of Work involved and the net effect on the Contract Price. If the change involves an increase in the Contract Price and the estimated amount is approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the price or CONTRACTOR may stop the changed Work when the estimated price is reached. If the Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Price, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked “N/A” (Not Applicable). METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT TIME: Mark the method to be used in determining the change in Contract Time and the estimated increase or decrease in Contract Time. If the change involves an increase in the Contract Time and the estimated time is approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the time or CONTRACTOR may stop the changed Work when the estimated time is reached. If the Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Time, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked “N/A” (Not Applicable).

Once ENGINEER has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to OWNER for authorization because ENGINEER alone does not have authority to authorize changes in Price or Time. Once authorized by OWNER, a copy should be sent by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR. Once the Work covered by this directive is completed or final cost and time determined, CONTRACTOR should submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order. This is a directive to proceed with a change that may affect the Contract Price or Contract Time. A Change Order, if any, should be considered promptly.

END OF WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE


CHANGE ORDER No.

OWNER

CONTRACTOR

Contract:

Project:


ENGINEER

The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order: Description: Attachments: [List documents supporting change]

CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES

Original Contract Price

$

Original Contract Times: Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment:

(days or dates)

Increase (Decrease) from previously approved Change Orders No. to :

$

Increase (Decrease) from previously approved Change Orders No. to : Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment:

(days)

Contract Price prior to this Change Order:

$

Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment:

(days or dates)

Increase (Decrease) of this Change Order:

$

Increase (Decrease) of this Change Order: Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment:

(days)

Contract Price incorporating this Change Order:

$

Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial Completion: Ready for Final Payment:

(days or dates) RECOMMENDED: APPROVED: ACCEPTED:

By:

By: By:

ENGINEER (Authorized Signature) OWNER (Authorized Signature) CONTRACTOR (Authorized Signature)

Title:

Date:

Title:

Date:

Title:

Date:

Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable): By: Date: Title: _______________________________________________

812008 01 29 73 - 1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

SECTION 01 29 73

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes: 1. This Section includes preparation and submittal of a schedule of values as

specified herein and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

1.02 GENERAL:

A. Timing of submittal: Submit to ENGINEER a schedule of values allocated to the various

portions of the Work within ten (10) days after the Effective Date of the agreement.

B. Supporting data: Upon request of ENGINEER, support the values with data that will Substantiate their correctness.

C. Use of schedule: The schedule of values, unless objected to by ENGINEER, shall be

used only as the basis for the CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment. 1.03 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES:

A. Form and Identification:

1. Type schedule on 8 1/2-inch by 11-inch white paper. 2. CONTRACTOR's standard forms and automated printout may be used. 3. Identify schedule with:

a. Title of Project and location. b. ENGINEER. c. Project number. d. Name and address of CONTRACTOR. e. Contract designation. f. Date of submission

B. Detail:

1. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.

C. Subvalues: For each major line item list subvalues of major products or operations under

the item.

D. Allowances: Not used. E. Change Orders: For each Application for Payment, revise schedule to list Change

Orders.

812008 01 29 73 - 2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

F. For the various portions of the Work: 1 Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of CONTRACTOR's

overhead and profit. 2 For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials,

breakdown the value into: a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. b. The total installed value.

G. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract

Price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used.

END OF SECTION

812008 01 31 19 - 1 PROJECT MEETINGS

SECTION 01 31 19

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED:

A. The ENGINEER will schedule and administer the preconstruction conference and periodic progress meetings. 1. Prepare the agenda for the meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meeting. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes. 6. Distribute copies of the minutes to meeting attendees and affected parties.

B. Representatives of CONTRACTOR, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings

shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:

A. Schedule: Meeting will be prior to the start of work at a time and place designated by the

ENGINEER. B. Attendance:

1. OWNER. 2. ENGINEER. 3. CONTRACTOR. 4. Major Subcontractors. 5. Utility companies. 6. DEQ Project Manager 7. DEQ District Staff 8. CONTRACTOR's Safety representative.

C. Agenda:

1. Utility conflicts. 2. Responsibilities 3. General contract terms. 4. Supervision. 5. Schedules and seasonal limitations. 6. Approvals and testing. 7. Clearances and notices. 8. Construction procedures. 9. Payments and estimates.

10. Labor requirements. 11. Safety. 12. DEQ/SRF involvement.

812008 01 31 19 - 2 PROJECT MEETINGS

1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS:

A. Schedule: Meetings will be scheduled a minimum of once each month at a time and place designated by the ENGINEER.

B. Attendance:

1. ENGINEER. 2. CONTRACTOR. 3. Subcontractors as pertinent to agenda. 4. Government agencies as pertinent to agenda. 5. Safety representatives.

C. Agenda:

1. Review and approve minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede construction schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to construction schedule. 8. Proposed work during the succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules.

10. Review of submittal schedules. 11. Review of proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and on completion

date. 12. Safety report. 13. Review new business. 14. Establish date for next meeting.

END OF SECTION

812008 01 33 00 - 1 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES:

A. General: 1. Coordinate with work by others as explained in SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL

CONDITIONS. 2. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER 72 hours prior to start of the work or prior to a

major increase in the work force if these vary from schedule as submitted.

B. Form of Schedules: 1. Prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 2. Provide a separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 3. Provide a horizontal time scale identifying the first work day of each week. 4. The order shall be the chronological beginning of each work item. 5. The row identification shall be each major specification section or subdivision of work

with distinct graphic delineation.

C. Content of Schedules: 1. The construction project schedule shall include as a minimum:

a. Project start date. b. Start dates and durations for each major trade group, work tasks or other

subdivisions of the work. c. Shop drawings, product data, and sample submittal dates and dates when

reviewed copies will be required. d. Equipment and/or material delivery dates, if approved. e. Total project duration and end dates.

D. Updating:

1. Show all occurring changes of previous submission. 2. Show progress completion dates of each activity. 3. Submit a narrative report, if required by ENGINEER defining:

a. Problem areas: Impact of current and anticipated delay factors. b. Schedule changes: Effect on other contractors. c. Revision description: Effect of change of scope and duration of activities.

E. Submittal of Schedules:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the initial detailed construction schedule within seven (7) days after notice of award. ENGINEER will return copy within ten (10) days.

2. An updated schedule shall be submitted on the first work day of each month.

F. Distribution: 1. The reviewed schedule shall be distributed by ENGINEER to:

a. The job site file. b. OWNER.

812008 01 33 00 - 2 SUBMITTALS

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES:

A. General: 1. Where required by specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall submit descriptive

information which will enable the ENGINEER to advise the OWNER whether the CONTRACTOR’s proposed materials, equipment, or methods of work are in general conformance to the design concept and in compliance with the drawings and specifications. The information to be submitted shall consist of drawings, specifications, descriptive data, certificates, samples, test results and such other information, all as specifically required in the specifications.

B. CONTRACTOR Responsibility:

1. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall assure that the material, equipment or method of work shall be as described in the submittal. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that the material and equipment described in each submittal conform to the requirements of the specifications and drawings. If the information shows deviations from the specifications or drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall insure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify the ENGINEER in each case where his submittal may affect the work of another CONTRACTOR or the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall insure coordination of submittals among the related crafts and subcontractors.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to check and verify all field measurements, all dimensions on shop and setting drawings and all schedules required for the work of all the various trades.

3. Where content of submitted literature includes data not pertinent to the submittal, CONTRACTOR shall clearly indicate which portion of the contents is being submitted for ENGINEER’s review.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall stamp each submittal with stamp, initialed and signed, certifying to review of the submittal by the CONTRACTOR, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents.

C. Transmittal Procedure:

1. General: a. Submittals shall be submitted promptly in accordance with dates in proposals,

approved schedules and in such sequence that there is no delay in the Work or the work of any other CONTRACTOR.

b. A unique number, sequentially arranged, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying each item’s submittal. Original submittal numbers shall have the following format “XXX-Y”:’ where “XXX” is the originally assigned submittal number, and “Y” is a sequential letter assigned for resubmittals, i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, 2nd and 3rd resubmittals, respectively. Submittal 25-B, for example, is the second resubmittal of submittal 25.

2. Deviation from Contract: If the CONTRACTOR proposed to provide material or equipment which does not conform to the specifications and drawings, he shall indicate so under “deviations” on the transmittal form accompanying the submittal copies. He shall prepare his reason for a change, including cost differential, and request a change order to cover the deviations.

3. Submittal Completeness: a. Submittals which do not have all the information required to be submitted,

including deviations, are not acceptable and will be returned without review.

812008 01 33 00 - 3 SUBMITTALS

D. Review Procedure: 1. Submit the shop drawings electronically to the ENGINEER. For samples, submit the

number stated in each specifications section. 2. Unless otherwise specified, within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of the

submittal, the ENGINEER shall review and return the submittal to the CONTRACTOR. The returned submittal shall indicate one of the following actions: a. If the review indicates that the material, equipment or work method is in general

conformance with the design concept, drawings and specifications, submittal copies will be marked “REVIEWED, NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN”. In this event the CONTRACTOR may begin to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal.

b. If the review indicates limited corrections are required, submitted copies will be marked “REVIEWED, W/CORRECTIONS NOTED”. The CONTRACTOR may begin implementing the work method by the submittal in accordance with the noted corrections. Where submittal information will be incorporated in O&M data, a corrected copy shall be provided.

c. If the review reveals that the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data, submitted copies will be marked “REJECTED, RESUBMIT”. Except at his own risk, the CONTRACTOR shall not undertake work covered by this submittal until it has been revised, resubmitted and returned marked either “REVIEWED, NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “REVIEWED, W/CORRECTIONS NOTED”.

d. If the review indicates that the material, equipment or work method is not in general conformance with the drawings and specifications, copies of the submittal will be marked “REJECTED, RESUBMIT”. Submittals with deviations which have not been identified clearly may be rejected. Except at his own risk, the CONTRACTOR shall not undertake the work covered by such submittals until is has been revised, resubmitted and returned marked either “REVIEWED, NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “REVIEWED, W/CORRECTIONS NOTED”.

e. If the review indicates that the material or equipment is not from an acceptable manufacturer, as indicated in the specifications, copies of the submittal will be marked “SUBMIT SPECIFIC ITEM”. Except at his own risk, the CONTRACTOR shall not undertake the work covered by such submittals until it has been revised, resubmitted and returned mark either “REVIEWED, NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN or “REVIEWED, W/CORRECTIONS NOTED”.

E. Effect of Review of CONTRACTOR’s Submittal:

1. Review of drawings, methods of work or information regarding materials or equipment the CONTRACTOR proposes to provide shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liabilities by the ENGINEER or the OWNER, or by an officer or employee thereof, and the CONTRACTOR shall have no claim under the Contract on account of the failure, or partial failure, of the method of work, material or equipment so reviewed. A mark of “REVIEWED, NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “REVIEWED, W/CORRECTIONS NOTED” shall mean that the OWNER has no objection to the CONTRACTOR, upon his own responsibility, using the plan or method of work proposed, or providing the materials or equipment proposed.

F. Re-review Costs: 1. Should ENGINEER be required to review a submittal more than twice because of

failure of the submittal to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, ENGINEER will record ENGINEER’s time and expenses for performing all additional reviews. The OWNER will compensate ENGINEER for these additional services and deduct the amount from payments to the CONTRACTOR.

812008 01 33 00 - 4 SUBMITTALS

1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:

A. Requirements: 1. Compile product data on related information appropriate for OWNER’s operation and

maintenance of products furnished. 2. See Section 01 78 23 – Operations and Maintenance Data for additional

requirements. 3. Submittal of operation and maintenance manuals shall be prior to final payment

request.

B. Required Submittals: 1. Refer to technical specification sections for required submittals.

1.04 RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Requirements: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain on the construction site a minimum of one (1)

complete set of Contract Documents amended by “RED LINE” or highlight inclusion to reflect the most immediate status methods, materials and locations and routings of construction. Supplementary sketches shall be included, if necessary, to clearly indicate all work as constructed.

2. At conclusion of work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER one (1) complete amended record set of these site documents.

3. Submittal shall be prior to final payment. 4. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to maintain an up-to-date set of modified drawings on

the project site shall be reason to withhold payments.

END OF SECTION

812008 01 42 13 - 1 ABBREVIATIONS

SECTION 01 42 13

ABBREVIATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 ABBREVIATIONS: A. Standards:

A.A.S.H.T.O.: American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials A.C.I.: American Concrete Institute A.N.S.I.: American National Standard Institute A.S.A.: American Standard Association A.S.T.M.: American Society for Testing and Materials A.W.S.: American Welding Society A.W.W.A.: American Water Works Association C.R.S.I.: Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute C.S.I.: Construction Specifications Institute M.D.P.H.: Michigan Department of Public Health M.D.N.R.: Michigan Department of Natural Resources M.D.E.Q.: Michigan Department of Environmental Quality M.D.O.T: Michigan Department of Transportation N.E.C.: National Electrical Code N.C.P.I.: National Clay Pipe Institute U.L. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. A.I.S.C. American Institute of Steel Construction N.E.M.A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association N.F.P.A. National Fire Protection Association

B. Units: LFt.: Linear Foot Ea.: Each VFt.: Vertical Foot LSum: Lump Sum SYd.: Square Yard Sta.: Station (100 foot) CYd.: Cubic Yard SFt.: Square Foot LB. Pound GAL. Gallon

END OF SECTION

812008 01 45 00 - 1 QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 01 45 00

QUALITY CONTROL


A. This Section includes the work required for all quality control.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. MDOT - Michigan Department of Transportation, “2012 Standard Specifications for Construction”.

B. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials, latest edition.

C. AASHTO – American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials, latest edition.

D. AWS – Amerian Welding Society, latest edition.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. General: 1. Selection of test specimens will be made by the ENGINEER. 2. Testing procedure will be in accordance with the current standard specified. 3. Refer to the SECTION requirements for field quality control.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Test Specimens: Deliver to the place of inspection and testing. B. Certification of Quality by Producer: Deliver to the ENGINEER. C. Certification of Welders: Deliver to the ENGINEER.

1.05 DELIVERY:

A. Collect and deliver materials and concrete cylinders to the designated testing laboratory.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Inspection and Testing Agencies: 1. In accordance with the requirements of ASTM E329. 2. Reporting shall be to the ENGINEER.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE:

A. Acceptance Tests and Inspection: 1. Aggregates: Certification of quality by producer. 2. Soil density:

a. Moisture-density relationships: 1) Cohesive (Clays) or Granular (Sands) Soils: ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor). 2) Granular (Sands) Soils: Michigan Cone Test.

b. Field density determination according to ASTM standards. c. CONTRACTOR shall provide access to test location and depth.

3. Asphalt cement: Certification of quality producer. 4. Bituminous mix composition:

a. Sample: ASTM D979.B. b. Extraction test: AASHTO T30, AASHTO T168 AND ASTM D2172. c. Frequency: One test within each 500-ton placed.

5. Bituminous pavement density: a. Sample: ASTM D979 b. Comparative density tests of in-place material against laboratory specimens of

the same material: ASTM D1559 and ASTM D2726. c. Frequency: One test within each 2,500 square yards placed.

6. Brick and Block: a. Buildings:

(1) Under 30M: Visual inspection on site. (2) Over 30M: ASTM C216 and ASTM C90

b. Manholes and catch basins: Visual inspection on-site 7. Cement: Certification of quality by producer. 8. Concrete:

a. Sample: ASTM C172 b. Frequency: Once for each 50 cubic yards of each class of concrete placed. c. Perform following from sample:

(1) Mold three 6-inch cylinder compressive strength specimens: ASTM: C31 (2) Slump test: ASTM C143 (3) Air test: ASTM C231 (4) Yield test: ASTM C138 (5) Strength test: ASTM C139

9. Precast Manholes: Certification of quality by producer. 10. Painting:

a. Workmanship: Visual inspection on site. b. Film thickness test: Gauge or yield. c. Frequency: One test within each 100 square feet applied.

11. Pipe: a. Gravity: Laboratory test one-half percent (½%) of total item with minimum one

piece each size, material and class. Certification of quality by producer acceptable for corrugated metal pipe.

b. Pressure: Certification of quality by producer. 12. Steel (reinforcing, structural and miscellaneous): Certification of quality by producer.


13. Welding: a. Certification of welders as follows:

(1) Buildings: AWS D1.0 Appendix A. (2) Water Tanks: AWS D1.0 Appendix A. (3) Bridges: MDOT 707.03.C.8.

b. Visual on-site inspection and nondestructive testing as follows: (1) Buildings: AWS D1.0 Appendix B. (2) Water Tanks: AWWA D100. (3) Bridges: MDOT 707.03.C.9.

14. Well soil samples: Sieve analysis ASTM C136

END OF SECTION

812008 01 45 57-1 TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS

SECTION 01 45 57

TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Hydrostatic pressure testing, low pressure air testing, and high-pressure air testing of piping systems.

B. Systems to be tested, type of test to be performed, and test pressure shall be as specified in other sections of Specifications.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Test report for each piping system tested. Include following: 1. Date of test. 2. Description and identification of piping system tested. 3. Type of test performed. 4. Test fluid. 5. Test pressure. 6. Type and location of leaks detected. 7. Corrective action taken to repair leaks. 8. Results of retesting.

B. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

(NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Testing in presence of Engineer.

B. Owner will provide on-site source of water for testing specified herein. 1. Install acceptable meter and pay for any potable water used. 2. The on-site source of non-potable water for testing will be identified by the Engineer.

C. Provide pumps and piping required to bring water to point of use.

D. Provide air supply.

E. Provide test pressure equipment, meters, pressure gauges, and other equipment, materials,

and facilities necessary to perform specified tests.

F. Provide bulkheads, flanges, valves, bracing, blocking, or other temporary sectionalizing devices that may be required.

G. Remove temporary devices after tests complete.


H. Perform tests on exposed piping after completely installed, including supports, hangers, and

anchors.

I. Perform tests on piping before insulation installed.

J. Perform tests on piping that is clean and free of dirt, sand or other foreign material.

K. Plug pipe outlets with test plugs. Brace each plug securely to prevent blowouts.

L. Add test fluid slowly.

M. Include regulator set to avoid overpressurizing and damaging piping.

N. Perform pressure testing in accordance with local, state, and federal requirements.

O. Correct leaks or defects and retest at no additional cost to Owner. 3.02 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TESTING

A. Perform hydrostatic pressure testing for piping systems as identified in other sections. Test pressure shall be as specified in other sections.

B. For buried piping systems, hydrostatic pressure testing may be performed with the backfill in place.

C. Open vents at high points to purge air pockets while piping system is filling. Venting may also

be provided by loosening flanges or with equipment vents.

D. Testing: 1. After section of piping to be tested has been filled with water, apply test pressure by

means of force pump of such design and capacity that required pressure can be applied and maintained without interruption for duration of test.

2. Measure test pressure by means of tested and properly calibrated pressure gauge acceptable to Engineer.

3. Maintain test pressure for sufficient length of time to permit Engineer to observe piping under test but not less than 2 hours.

E. With exception of buried piping with mechanical joints or push-on joints, piping systems shall

show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking. If leakage is evident, make appropriate repairs and retest.

F. Maximum allowable leakage for buried piping with mechanical joints or push-on joints is as

follows. If leakage is excessive, make appropriate repairs and retest.

Where: L = Leakage, gallons per hr N = Number of joints under test D = Nominal diameter of piping, in. P = Average pressure during test, lbs per sq in.

400,7

2/1NDPL =


3.03 HIGH PRESSURE AIR TESTING

A. Perform high pressure air testing for piping systems as specified in other sections. Test pressure shall be as specified in other sections.

B. Perform preliminary test at not greater than 25 psi. Examine for leakage at joints with soap solution and visual detection of soap bubbles. Correct visible leaks.

C. Perform final test at test pressure specified. Pressure in system shall be gradually increased

in small increments until test pressure reached. Test pressure shall be maintained for minimum of 10 minutes and additional time necessary to conduct soap bubble test examination of each joint for leakage.

D. Piping system shall show no evidence of leakage. If leakage is evident, make appropriate

repairs and retest.”

3.04 LOW PRESSURE AIR TESTING

A. General: 1. Perform low pressure air testing for gravity sewer and drainage piping systems identified

in other sections. 2. Test pipes between adjacent manholes. Test time for air pressure to drop 1.0 psi.

a. For pipes 4 in. through 36 in. dia comply with Table 01 45 57. b. Pipe over 36 in. dia shall not be tested by the low-pressure air method. c. Ignore length of laterals.

B. Preparation:

1. Isolate pipe section to be tested by plugging each end with air tight plugs. Plug ends of branches, laterals and wyes which are to be included in test section.

2. Brace plugs to prevent slippage and blowout due to internal pressure. 3. One plug shall have inlet tap or other provision for connecting air supply. 4. Air control equipment shall consist of valves and pressure gauges to control rate at which

air flows into test section and gauges to monitor air pressure inside pipe.

C. Testing: 1. If pipe to be tested is submerged in water, determine height of water above spring line of

pipe at each end of test section and compute average. For each foot of water above pipe’s spring line, increase test pressure by 0.43 psi.

2. Add air slowly to test section until pressure inside pipe is raised to 4.0 psi greater than average back pressure of water that may be over pipe

3. After pressure of 4.0 psi obtained, control supply of air so internal pressure maintained between 3.5 and 4.0 psi (above average water back pressure) for minimum of 2 minutes to allow temperature of air to come into equilibrium with temperature of pipe.

4. Determine rate of air lost by time pressure drop method. a. After temperature stabilized for 2 minute period, disconnect air supply. Allow

pressure to decrease to 3.6 psi. At this pressure, start stopwatch to determine time required for pressure to drop 1.0 psi. Time required for loss of 1.0 psi is then compared to Table 01 45 57.

b. If time is equal to or greater than time indicated in table, test shall be acceptable. c. If time is less than time indicated in table, make appropriate repairs and retest.


TABLE 01 45 57

LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST

Test time required for loss of air pressure of 1.0 psi for size and length of pipe indicated.

A B C D E

F

Pipe

Dia

(in.)

Time/Ft

Up To

Length

In Column

C

(sec)

Length

Time In

Column B

Applies

(ft)

Test Time

For Length

Between

Columns

C & E

(min:sec)

Length

Time In

Column F

Applies

(ft)

Time/Ft

Over

Length

In Column

E

(sec)

4 0.18 636 1:54 1,432 0.08

6 0.40 424 2:50 955 0.18

8 0.71 318 3:47 716 0.32

10 1.11 255 4:43 573 0.49

12 1.60 212 5:40 477 0.71

15 2.50 170 7:05 382 1.11

18 3.62 141 8:30 318 1.61

21 4.92 121 9:55 273 2.19

24 6.42 106 11:20 239 2.85

27 8.14 94 12:45 212 3.62

30 10.00 85 14:10 191 4.44

33 12.14 77 15:35 174 5.40

36 14.37 71 17:00 159 6.39

END OF SECTION

812008 01 50 00 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01. SUMMARY:

A. Section includes: 1. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing, fabrication and

installation of the major items listed below as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

B. Temporary Utilities:

1. Electricity. 2. Lighting for construction purposes. 3. Heating. 4. Ventilation. 5. Internet service. 6. Water service. 7. Sanitary facilities.

C. Temporary Construction Facilities: 1. Field offices and sheds. 2. Vehicular access. 3. Parking. 4. Project cleaning and waste removal. 5. Traffic regulation. 6. Fire prevention facilities.

D. Temporary Controls: 1. Barriers. 2. Enclosures and fencing. 3. Security. 4. Water control. 5. Dust control. 6. Noise control.

E. Removal of Temporary Utilities, Facilities and Controls. 1.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY:

A. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Utilize Owner’s existing power service.

B. Provide temporary electric feeder from existing buildings at locations as directed by the

Engineer/Owner. Do not disrupt Owner’s use of service. C. Provide GFCI power outlets, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required

for construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as required for portable construction tools and equipment.


D. Permanent convenience receptacles may not be utilized during construction. 1.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES:

A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations.

B. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

C. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.04 TEMPORARY HEATING:

A. CONTRACTOR is responsible for all temporary heating. 1.05 TEMPORARY VENTILATION:

A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors or gases.

B. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean

air for construction operations. 1.06 TEMPORARY INTERNET SERVICE:

A. Provide, maintain and pay for high-speed internet to ENGINEER’s field office at time of project mobilization.

1.07 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE:

A. Provide and pay for suitable quality water service as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

1.08 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES:

A. Provide service, clean and maintain required facilities and enclosures in compliance with laws and regulations. Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide facilities at time of project mobilization.

1.09 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS:

A. Designated existing spaces may be used for field offices and for storage:

B. Office: Weather tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating and cooling equipment, and

equipped with sturdy furniture and drawing display table.

C. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.

D. Provide separate office similarly equipped and furnished for use of Engineer.

E. Locate offices and sheds minimum distance of 30 feet from existing structures.

F. Do not use permanent facilities for field offices or for storage. G. Office for CONTRACTOR:

1. Size as required for general use and to provide space for project meetings.


2. Lighting: 50 foot candles at desk top height. 3. Exterior lighting at entrance door. 4. Automatic heating and mechanical cooling equipment to maintain comfort conditions. 5. Internet access with wireless modem for jobsite access. 6. Furnishings in meeting area shall include: a. Conference table and chairs for at least eight (8) persons. b. Racks and files for Project Record Documents in or adjacent to the meeting area. 7. Other furnishings: CONTRACTOR’s option.

H. Office for ENGINEER:

1. A separate space for sole use of designated occupants with secure entrance doors and one key per occupant.

2. The floor area shall be 150 square feet minimum, with minimum dimensions of 8 feet. 3. Provide a minimum of three (3) windows with a minimum total area of ten percent

(10%) of floor area. Windows shall have operable sash and insect screen. 4. Furnishings shall consist of: a. Standard size desk with three (3) drawers. b. Drafting table, with one (1) equipment drawer. c. Plan rack to hold a minimum of six (6) racks of drawers. d. Standard four (4) drawer, legal size metal filing cabinet with locks and keys. e. Minimum of 6 lineal feet of bookshelves. f. One (1) swivel arm chair and three (3) straight chairs, g. One (1) drafting stool, h. One (1) tackboard 36 inches by 30 inches, minimum, i. One (1) wastebasket. 5. Services shall consist of: a. Lighting: 50 foot candles at desk top height. b. Exterior lighting at entrance door.

c. Automatic heating and mechanical cooling equipment to maintain comfort conditions.

d. Minimum of four (4) 110 volt, duplex electric convenience outlets, at least one on each wall.

e. Electric distribution panel with two (2) circuits minimum, 110 volt, 60 hertz service. f. Convenient access to drinking water and toilet facilities. g. Access to Contractor’s wireless internet connection.

I. Installation: 1. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to

Proceed. J. Maintenance and Cleaning:

1. Weekly janitorial services for offices; periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas.

2. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water and snow. K. Removal: At completion of Work, remove buildings, foundations, utility services and

debris. Restore areas.


1.10 FIRE PREVENTION FACILITIES: A. Prohibit smoking within buildings under construction and demolition. Designate an area

outside the existing fence line where smoking is permitted. Provide approved ashtrays in designated smoking areas.

B. Establish fire watch for cutting and welding and other hazardous operations capable of

starting fires. Maintain fire watch before, during and after hazardous operations until threat of fire does not exist.

C. Portable Fire Extinguishers: NFPA 10; 10 pound capacity, 4A-60B: C UL rating.

1. Provide one fire extinguisher at each stair on each floor of buildings under construction and demolition.

2. Provide minimum one fire extinguisher in every construction trailer and storage shed. 3. Provide minimum one fire extinguisher on roof during roofing operations using

producing equipment.

1.11 PARKING:

A. Use of designated areas of existing parking facilities by construction personnel is permitted.

B. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas.

C. Maintenance:

1. Maintain existing paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original or specified condition.

D. Removal, Repair:

1. Repair existing facilities damaged by use to original condition. 1.12 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL:

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain site in clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces and other

closed or remote spaces prior to enclosing spaces.

C. Sweep and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site periodically

and dispose of offsite.

E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.


1.13 SECURITY: A. Security Program:

1. Protect Work, existing premises and Owner’s operations from theft, vandalism and unauthorized entry.

B. Entry Control:

1. Owner will control entrance of persons and vehicles related to Owner’s operations.

1.14 WATER CONTROL:

A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain

pumping equipment. 1.15 DUST CONTROL:

A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.

B. Provide Positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

1.16 NOISE CONTROL:

A. Provide methods, means and facilities to minimize noise from construction operations.

1.17 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS:

A. Remove any temporary utilities, equipment, facilities and materials prior to Final Application for Payment inspection.

B. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 2 feet.

C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore

permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used

PART 3 – EXECUTION – Not Used

END OF SECTION

812008 01 57 13 - 1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

SECTION 01 57 13

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL


A. This Section includes the work required to provide and maintain temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control.

1.02 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Requirements: Comply with Drawings and permit requirements. B. Permit: Obtain permit from local enforcing agency, if not already obtained.

C. Time Limitations: MDOT 208.03B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: MDOT 208.02 and as approved by the regulating agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE:

A. General: Abide with all applicable rules and regulations as established by the State of Michigan and the local regulating agency in conjunction with Act 451 of 1994, Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act, Part 91 as amended, Michigan Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control (formerly PA 347 of 1972, as amended).

B. Sediment Removal:

1. Take such steps as are necessary to assure the retention and removal of any sediment which enters a drainage system along the construction route before said system discharges into a stream, pond or lake.

2. If eroded material is allowed to enter a storm sewer system, all catch basins, manholes, pipe and culverts shall be cleaned following construction prior to receipt of final payment. Unless CONTRACTOR can document positively to what extent an existing storm sewer system along the construction area was silted in prior to construction, no credit will be given for cleaning the system.

3. Maintain roadways in a passable condition until paving is completed, including any maintenance and dust control.

C. Construction of Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures: MDOT 208.03C. 1. Provide and maintain the following temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control

measures unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or in the permit: a. Excavated or borrow material stock-pile:

(1) Place silt fence around stockpile in a manner to prevent soil erosion from entering the drainage system or leaving the site.

812008 01 57 13 - 2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

b. Trench backfill in place. (1) Place silt fence across trenches, ditches and around inlets to prevent soil

erosion from leaving the site or entering the drainage system until: (a) Seed and mulch have been placed in non-paved areas. (b) Aggregate has been placed in bituminous and gravel areas.

c. Dewatering discharge. (1) Place bales of hay, straw and/or siltation fencing staked in place at point of

discharge, adequately anchored. d. Grading limits.

(1) Place silt fence along down gradient side of all areas disturbed by grading operations.

e. Catch basins. (1) Provide inlet protection around catch basin and below grates. Remove after turf is established

f. Culvert inlets. (1) Place stone check dam and silt fence upstream of all culvert inlets.

g. Drain cleanout. (1) Excavate sediment basin and place stone check dam at downstream end prior to cleanout operation.

D. Maintenance of Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures: MDOT 208.03C. E. Removal of Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures: MDOT 208.03D.

3.02 SCHEDULES (See details on Drawings):

A. MDOT Standard Plan R-96-E (6 sheets)

END OF SECTION

812008 01 61 00-1 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 61 00

COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIAL

A. Except as specifically indicated or specified, do not use removed materials and equipment in new Work. All material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be new, and as specified, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.

B. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in new Work:

1. Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation to ensure proper function in completed Work.

2. Provide for transportation, storage, and handling of products which require off-site storage, restoration, or renovation.

1.02 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Installation of equipment and materials shall comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. Maintain one set of complete instructions at Site. Distribute printed copies of instructions to parties involved in installation, including 2 copies to Engineer.

B. Handle, store, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust materials and equipment in

accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in conformance with Specifications.

C. If Project conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer’s written

instructions, consult Engineer for further direction. Do not proceed with Work without written instruction of Engineer.

1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of material and equipment in accordance with Construction Progress Schedule.

B. Deliver materials and equipment in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original

containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

C. Protect bright-machined surfaces, such as shafts and valve faces, with heavy coat of grease prior to shipment.

D. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to ensure compliance with Contract

Documents and approved submittals and that products have been protected and are undamaged.

E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle materials and equipment by methods

recommended by manufacturer to prevent soiling or damage to materials or equipment, or packaging.


1.04 STORAGE, PROTECTION, AND MAINTENANCE

A. Store, protect, and maintain material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Temporary storage areas and buildings shall conform to Section 01 50 00.

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for damage or loss due to storage of materials and

equipment.

D. Interior Storage: 1. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store materials and equipment subject to damage by elements in weather tight

enclosures. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer.

E. Exterior Storage:

1. Store fabricated materials and equipment above ground, on blocking or skids, to prevent soiling or staining. Cover materials and equipment subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

2. Store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter.

3. Store materials such as pipe, reinforcing steel, structural steel, and equipment on pallets or racks, off ground.

F. Inspection and Maintenance:

1. Arrange storage to provide easy access for inspection, maintenance, and inventory. 2. Make periodic inspections of stored materials and equipment to ensure materials and

equipment maintained under specified conditions are free from damage or deterioration, and coverings are in place and in condition to provide required protection.

3. Perform maintenance on stored material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in presence of Owner and Engineer. a. Notify Engineer 24 hrs before performing maintenance. b. Submit report of completed maintenance to Engineer with each Application for

Payment. c. Failure to perform maintenance, to notify Engineer, or to submit report may result

in rejection of material or equipment.

G. Assume responsibility for protection of completed construction and repair and restore damage to completed Work.

H. Wheeling of loads over finished floors, with or without plank protection, not permitted in

anything except rubber-tired wheelbarrows, buggies, trucks or dollies. This applies to finished floors and exposed concrete floors, as well as those covered with other applied surfacing.

I. Where structural concrete is also finished surface, avoid marking or damaging surface.

1.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICATING EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, special tools and lubricating equipment required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.


B. Instruct Owner’s operating personnel in operation, repair, and maintenance of equipment

and use of special tools. 1.06 LUBRICATION

A. Where lubrication is required for proper operation of equipment, incorporate necessary and proper provisions in equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Where possible, lubrication shall be automated and positive.

B. Where oil is used, reservoir shall be of sufficient capacity to supply unit for 24-hr period.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Conform to applicable Specifications and standards. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified or as approved on submittals.

B. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with engineering and shop practices

standard with industry.

C. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical, by same manufacturer.

D. Material and equipment shall be suitable for service conditions. Design so working parts

are readily accessible for inspection and repair, and easily duplicated and replaced.

E. Equipment capabilities, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to, unless specifically approved in accordance with General Conditions.

F. Equipment shall be adapted to best economy in power consumption and maintenance.

Parts and components shall be portioned for stresses occurring during continuous or intermittent operation, and for additional stresses occurring during fabrication or installation.

G. Do not use material or equipment for purpose other than for which it is designed or

specified. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Include and pay for Supplier’s services, including, but not limited to, those specified.

B. Workday is defined as an 8-hr period during a calendar day. Workday for purposes of this Section does not include travel to and from the Project Site.

3.02 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Perform functional testing to determine if equipment has been installed correctly and operates as intended. Functional testing shall include, but not be limited to, checking for


proper rotation, alignment, speed, excessive vibration, and noisy operation. Equipment adjustment and calibration shall be performed to conform with Specifications, manufacturer’s requirements and instructions, and industry standards. Functional testing shall be performed before Startup and Systems Demonstrations.

3.03 INSTALLATION SERVICES

A. Where installation services are called for in Specifications, provide competent and experienced technical representatives of manufacturers’ equipment and systems to resolve assembly or installation procedures attributable to, or associated with, equipment furnished.

B. After equipment installation, manufacturer’s representative shall inspect equipment for

proper installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, equipment has been serviced with the proper lubricants, applicable safety equipment has been properly installed, and that proper electrical and mechanical connections have been made.

C. Manufacturer’s representative shall assist Contractor in performing functional testing.

D. Provide “Certificate of Installation Services” stating that equipment has been properly

installed, that functional testing has been performed, that proper adjustment and calibration has been made, and that equipment is ready for Startup and Systems Demonstration.

3.04 POST STARTUP SERVICES

A. After equipment or system has been in operation for at least 2 months, but not longer than 3 months, each equipment manufacturer or authorized equipment representative shall make a final inspection where so required by Specifications. Final inspection will provide assistance to Owner’s personnel in making adjustments or calibrations required to ensure equipment or system is operating in conformance with design, manufacturer, and specifications.

B. Provide “Certificate of Post Startup Services” cosigned by Owner and equipment

representatives, verifying this service has been performed.

END OF SECTION

812008 01 74 00 - 1 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

SECTION 01 74 00

CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, maintaining all structures and the Site in a standard of cleanliness as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

B. Related Sections: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to:

a. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Sections in DIVISION 01 of these Specifications.

b. In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with all requirements for cleaning up as described in various other Sections of these Specifications.


A. Inspection: 1. Daily and more often if necessary. 2. Conduct inspections to verify that requirements of cleanliness are being met.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Hazards control: 1. Volatile wastes:

a. Store in covered metal containers. b. Remove from premises daily.

2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. 3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Cleaning and disposal: 1. Conduct operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws. 2. Not allowed:

a. Burning or burying of rubbish or waste materials onsite. b. Disposal of volatile wastes in storm or sanitary sewers: Volatile wastes include,

but are not limited to, mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner. c. Disposal of wastes into streams or waterways.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. Compatibility: 1. Compatible with the surface being cleaned. 2. Recommended by the Manufacturer of the material being cleaned. 3. As reviewed by ENGINEER.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING:

A. General: 1. Provide all required personnel, equipment and materials needed to maintain the

specified standard of cleanliness. 2. Store materials:

a. In an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access. b. To allow unimpeded drainage and traffic. c. Provide for the required protection of materials.

3. Scrap, debris, waste materials and other items not required for construction of the Work. a. Do not allow accumulation. b. Remove from Site at least each week and more often if necessary. c. Provide adequate storage for all materials awaiting removal.

4. Observe all requirements for fire protection and protection of the environment.

B. Site: 1. Daily, and more often if necessary:

a. Inspect the Site. b. Pick up all scrap, debris and waste material: remove all such items to the place

designated for their storage. 2. Weekly, and more often if necessary:

a. Inspect all arrangements of materials stored onsite. b. Re-stack or otherwise service all arrangements to meet the requirements of

paragraph 3.01-A-1 above. 3. At all times maintain the Site in a neat and orderly condition which meets the approval

of ENGINEER. 4. Paved surfaces: Keep clean. 5. Dust control:

a. Control dust on or near the Work by the application of water, or other approved means.

b. If CONTRACTOR fails to correct unsatisfactory conditions with 24 hours after due notification: (1) OWNER may arrange for such work to be performed by other means. (2) Pay costs.

C. Structures:

1. Weekly, and more often if necessary: a. Inspect the structures. b. Pick up all scrap, debris and waste material: remove all such items to the place

designated for their storage. c. Sweep all interior spaces clean:

(1) Clean: Free from dust and other material capable of being removed by reasonable diligence using a hand-held broom.

2. Preparation for installation of succeeding material: a. Clean the structures or pertinent portions thereof:

(1) To the degree of cleanliness recommended by the Manufacturer of the succeeding material.

(2) Using all equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness.


3. After installation of finish floor material: a. Clean the finish floor daily at all times while work is being performed in the space

in which finish materials have been installed. (1) Clean: Free from all foreign material which, in the opinion of ENGINEER,

may be injurious to the finish floor material. 4. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from

cleaning operations will not fall on wet, recently painted surfaces. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING:

A. Definitions:

1. Clean: The level of cleanliness generally provided by commercial building maintenance subcontractors using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials.

B. Prior to completion of the Work:

1. Remove from the Site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris and waste.

2. Conduct final progress cleaning as described in Article 3.01 above.

C. Site: 1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by ENGINEER:

a. Hose down all paved areas onsite and all public sidewalks directly adjacent to the Site.

b. Rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. 2. Remove all resultant debris.

D. Structures:

1. Exterior: a. Visually inspect all exterior surfaces. b. Remove all traces of soil, waste material, smudges and other foreign matter. c. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. d. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of exterior cleanliness, hose down the

exterior of the structure. e. In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, ENGINEER may require

light sandblasting or other cleaning at no additional cost. 2. Interior:

a. Visually inspect all interior surfaces. b. Remove all traces of soil, waste material, smudges and other foreign matter. c. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. d. Remove all paint droppings, spots, stains and dirt from finished surfaces using

only the specified cleaning materials and equipment. 3. Glass: Clean all glass inside and outside. 4. Polished surfaces: To all surfaces requiring the routine application of buffed polish,

apply the specified polish as recommended by the Manufacturer of the material being polished.

E. Timing: Schedule final cleaning as approved by ENGINEER to enable OWNER to accept

a completely clean Project.

END OF SECTION

812008 01 78 00 - 1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

SECTION 01 78 00

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the procedures, submittals, responsibilities and requirements for Contract closeout.

1.02 CLEANING:

A. General: 1. Manufactured products: Manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Clean-up during construction: Maintain premises and public properties free from

accumulations of waste, debris and rubbish caused by operations. 3. Final clean-up: Remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and

surplus materials, and clean all surfaces; leave the Work clean and ready for occupancy.

B. Delinquency:

1. Remedies: Failure to clean-up promptly is considered to be defective Work: a. OWNER may correct: ARTICLE 14 of SECTION 00 72 00 - GENERAL

CONDITIONS.

1.03 WORK RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Maintenance of Documents: 1. Maintain one (1) copy at job-site in good order of:

a. Contract Drawings. b. Specifications. c. Addenda. d. Reviewed shop drawings. e. Change Orders. f. Other Contract modifications.

2. Filing: Work specification format. 3. Accessibility: To OWNER and ENGINEER.

B. Recording:

1. Keep record documents current. 2. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:

a. Field changes of dimension and detail. b. Changes made by Change Orders and Bulletins. c. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

3. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark up each SECTION to record: a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of products actually

installed. b. Changes made by Change Orders and Bulletins. c. Other matters not originally specified.


C. Submittal: 1. Delivery: To ENGINEER prior to final payment. 2. Transmittal letter: Contain:

a. Date. b. Project title and number. c. CONTRACTOR’s name and address. d. Title and number of each record document. e. Certification that each document, as submitted, is complete and accurate.

1.04 LUBRICATION AND START-UP:

A. General: 1. Manufactured Products: Manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Lubricants: One year supply manufacturer’s recommended.

1.05 TOUCH UP AND REPAIR:

A. General: 1. Manufactured Products: Manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Field fabricated products: Appropriate SECTIONS.

1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Submit as required by Contract Documents prior to final payment. 1.07 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Procedures and Requirements: Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions.

1.08 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES: A. See Section 01 57 13 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 1.09 FINAL PAYMENT:

A. Procedures and Requirements: See Agreement.

B. Submit Affidavit and Consent of Surety prior to final payment.

C. Submit Work record documents, O & M manuals, remove temporary soil erosion control measures or provide Letter of Credit of approved amount to guarantee removal by a later date, and complete all punch list items prior to final payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SCHEDULES:

A. Attached are the following forms: 1. Certificate of Substantial Completion. 2. Affidavit and Consent of Surety. 3. Letter of Credit Form

END OF SECTION


CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (on ENGINEER’s Letterhead)

OWNER

CONTRACTOR

Contract:

Project:

OWNER’S Contract No. ENGINEER’s Project No.

This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:

All Work The following specified portions of the Work:

Date of Substantial Completion The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or portion thereof designated above is hereby established, subject to the provisions of the Contract pertaining to Substantial Completion. The date of Substantial Completion in the final Certificate of Substantial Completion marks the commencement of the contractual correction period and applicable warranties required by the Contract.

A punch list of items to be completed or corrected is attached to this Certificate. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract. The responsibilities between OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties upon OWNER’s use or occupancy of the Work shall be as provided in the Contract, except as amended as follows: [Note: Amendments of contractual responsibilities recorded in this Certificate should be the product of mutual agreement of OWNER and CONTRACTOR; see Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions.] Amendments to OWNER’s responsibilities: Amendments to CONTRACTOR’s responsibilities: None None As follows: As follows:

The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: [punch list; others] This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor is it a release of CONTRACTOR’s obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. EXECUTED BY ENGINEER: RECEIVED: RECEIVED:

By:

By:

By:

(Authorized Signature) OWNER (Authorized Signature) CONTRACTOR (Authorized Signature)

Title:

Date:

Title:

Date:

Title:

Date:


STATE OF MICHIGAN )

COUNTY OF )ss

AFFIDAVIT

Notice to Contractor: This is a sample copy. Three completed copies of this form or similar form must be submitted to the ENGINEER before final payment will be recommended.

, CONTRACTOR

being duly sworn, deposes and says that he entered into an Agreement (Contract) with the

of (OWNER) on the day of 20

for the performance of certain Work generally described as follows:

CONTRACTOR further says that the Work under the terms of the Contract has been completed and all sums due to Contractors, Subcontractors, suppliers and laborers with whom CONTRACTOR has contracted for performance under the Contract have been paid in full. Furthermore, in consideration of final payment under the Contract, CONTRACTOR hereby waives and releases any and all claims or rights which CONTRACTOR may have in connection with the Contract against OWNER or the premises upon which the Contract Work was performed, and agrees to indemnify OWNER against any and all such claims or rights which may be asserted by Contractors, Subcontractors, Suppliers or laborers with whom CONTRACTOR has contracted for performance under the Contract. WITNESSES: CONTRACTOR:

Signature

Name and Title (Typed or printed in ink)

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20

Notary Public, County

My commission expires:

CONSENT OF SURETY

The undersigned, as Surety on the above described Contract, hereby consents to the making of final payment to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract. DATE: SURETY COMPANY:

Signature (Attorney-in-fact)

Name and Title (Typed or printed in ink) (Attach copy of power of attorney certified to date of consent)


LETTER OF CREDIT FORM

Bank:

[Bank’s Name and Address] Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit Bank Reference No. _____________ Issued: ___________

Beneficiary:

[Owner’s Name and Address]

Applicant: [Contractor’s Name and Address]

Project: [Description of Project and remaining Work to be completed] Date: _____________ Expiration Date: ______________ [as approved by Owner and Engineer] Amount: USD _______________ [as approved by Owner and Engineer] Bank Reference No.: _____________ Gentlemen: We hereby establish our Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit No. _______________ in your

favor for the account of Applicant up to an aggregate amount of USD ___________ available

by your draft(s) at sight drawn on Bank. Drafts to be accompanied by the following document(s):

1. Beneficiary’s written statement, stating: “Applicant has failed to satisfactorily install the

Project.” 2. Copy of Letter of Credit and any amendments.

Partial drawings are permitted.

Draft(s) must be marked “Drawn under Bank Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit No. _____________ dated _____________.” We hereby agree with you that drafts drawn under and in strict compliance with the terms of this credit will be duly honored by us upon presentation at this office on or before our close of

business on Expiration Date.


Except as otherwise expressly stated herein, this Letter of Credit is issued subject to the International Standby Practices of the International Chamber of Commerce (‘’ISP98’’). This Letter of Credit shall be deemed to be a contract made under the laws of the State of Michigan and shall, as to matters not governed by ISP98, be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Michigan, other than its conflict of laws rules, which would result in the application of the law of any jurisdiction other than the laws of the State of Michigan. Sincerely,

Bank _____________________________ Authorized Signature _____________________________ Printed Name and title

812008 01 78 23-1 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. To aid the continued instruction of Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel, and to provide a positive source of information regarding products incorporated into the Work, furnish and deliver the Operation and Maintenance (O&M) data described in this Section and as specified in other sections of these Specifications.

B. Engineer’s review and acceptance of O&M data will be only for conformance with

requirements of this Section, for form of submittal and organization of data and completeness of information provided, but not for technical content or coordination between individual suppliers. Engineer will be sole judge of completeness of data.

1.02 PAYMENTS

A. Progress payments for equipment delivered, stored or installed under these Contract Documents will not be made until copies of O&M data delivered to and approved by Engineer.

B. Progress payments for control systems packaged with equipment will not be made until

O&M data incorporated into equipment and control system manual delivered to and approved by Engineer.

1.03 ELECTRONIC COPY SUBMITTALS

A. After approval of paper copy submittals, submit 2 CD's or 2 DVD’s containing copies of complete O&M data. The electronic formatted data shall contain all the information submitted in the bound O&M manuals and shall comply with the following requirements: The CD shall be enclosed in a plastic transparent case with a cover bearing suitable identification. The information provided shall comply with the following requirements: 1. O&M data, including text, drawings, and subcomponent equipment shall be in .PDF

format that is readable with Adobe Acrobat software. 2. Data submitted in .PDF format shall be searchable and bookmarked to match the

tabbed sections in the paper copy submittals. 3. Data submitted in .PDF format shall be legible.

B. Each disc shall be enclosed in a hard-plastic transparent case with a cover bearing

suitable identification. Identification shall include, at a minimum, the following information: 1. “Operation and Maintenance Instructions” 2. Project Title 3. Equipment name and Specification Section number from the Contract Documents.

1.04 PAPER COPY SUBMITTALS

A. Submit 5 copies of complete O&M data, bound in covers bearing suitable identification, for review within 30 days after Contractor receives approved Shop Drawings for equipment.

B. Format:


1. Size: 8-1/2 in. by 11 in., or 11 in. by 17 in. z-folded, with standard 3-hole punching. 2. Paper: 20-lb minimum, white. 3. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data or typewritten. 4. Drawings:

a. Bind in text. b. Fold larger drawings and place in text page size envelope bound into binder.

Place identification on outside of envelope. 5. Provide tabbed section dividers.

a. Provide title of section on divider. b. Provide tab index in Table of Contents.

6. Spine: Label each submittal spine with the following:

• "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS,”

• "FOOD WASTE HANDLING BUILDING” >>PROJECT ELEMENT TITLE<<"

• Owner Number: Work Order 812008

• Clearly identify the equipment for which the O&M submittal pertains to. Include Equipment Name and Specification Section as set forth in the Contract Documents.

• Spine text shall be oriented such that text can be read left-to-right or top-to-bottom.

7. Cover: Label each submittal cover with “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS” and following:

Project Title: FOOD WASTE HANDLING BUILDING >>PROJECT ELEMENT TITLE<<" a. Names and numbers of applicable buildings or structures as shown on Drawings

in which equipment is located. b. Name of equipment as set forth in Contract Documents. c. Specification section number for equipment as set forth in Contract Documents. d. Owner Number: Work Order 812008 e. Covers missing this information or containing superfluous information will be

rejected by Engineer. 8. Binders:

a. Bind each submittal into a D-ring commercial quality binder with durable and cleanable plastic covers.

b. Filled to not more than 75% of capacity. c. When multiple binders used, contents shall be organized into related groupings

and each binder cover shall bear identification of specific content. 9. Page number submittals.

1.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prior to Substantial Completion, submit revised operation and maintenance data for field modifications made by Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Revised operation and maintenance data shall include electronic files and paper copies.


1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. In preparing data required by this section, use only personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of the described items, completely familiar with the requirements of this section, skilled in technical writing to the extent needed for communicating the essential data, and skilled in drafting to prepare required drawings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Review O&M submittal and complete Form 1 to Section 01 78 23, CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL FORM, in its entirety indicating requirements of this section have been met. The form must be typewritten. Engineer will reject submittals without completed Form 1.

3.02 GENERAL CONTENT OF DATA

A. Each submittal shall contain equipment data pertaining to not more than one Specification section number indicated in Contract documents.

B. Title Sheet: First page inside cover listing following:

1. Title: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. 2. Project Title: FOOD WASTE HANDLING BUILDING

>>PROJECT ELEMENT TITLE<<" 3. Names of applicable buildings or structures as shown on Drawings in which

equipment is located. 4. Name of equipment as set forth in Contract Documents. 5. Specification section number for equipment as set forth in Contract Documents. 6. General Contractor’s name, address, and telephone number. 7. Subcontractor’s name, address, and telephone number if equipment provided by

Subcontractor. 8. Purchase order number, manufacturer’s shop order number or other such number

required for parts and service. 9. Manufacturer’s name, address, and telephone number. 10. Name, address, and telephone number for local source of parts and service. If the

manufacturer, supplier, or subcontractor are acting as the local source of parts and service, this must be noted on the Title Sheet.

C. Product List: Immediately after title sheet. List of each product and major components,

indexed to content of submittal, and identified by product name and model number as set forth by manufacturer and Specification section and article number.

D. Table of Contents: Immediately following product list. Arrange in logical, systematic order

and shall be at minimum a tabbed section index. Provide each tabbed section with table of contents for section.

E. Product Data Sheets: Provide specification and catalog sheets showing configuration,

manufacturer’s specifications, models, options, and styles of equipment and major components being provided. Product data sheets shall show project specific information


with inapplicable information deleted by removal. Submit product data sheets in English only. Do not submit information in multiple languages. Insert in tabbed sections.

F. Drawings:

1. Supplement text with drawings to clearly illustrate following:

a. Product and components. b. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. c. Control and flow diagrams.

2. Drawings to be actual drawings of equipment from manufacturer. “Typical” drawings not acceptable, unless they accurately illustrate actual equipment.

G. Special Information:

1. Provide explanation of interrelationships of equipment and components, and effects one component has on another or system.

2. Provide overall instructions and procedures for equipment tying in instructions and procedures for separate components into unified instructional package.

3. Provide glossary of special terms used by manufacturer. 4. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 5. Provide logical sequence on instructions for each procedure.

H. Warranty, Bond, or Service Contract.

1. Provide copy of each issued. 2. Provide information sheets to explain proper procedures in event of failure or

malfunction to prevent voiding warranty or bond, and instances affecting validity of warranty or bond.

3.03 SPECIFIC CONTENT OF DATA

A. Specific content, for each unit of equipment and system, shall include following: 1. Description of Unit and Component Parts:

a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests as applicable. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replacement parts. d. Complete nameplate data. e. P&ID numbers for equipment as set forth in Contract Documents.

2. Operating Procedures: a. Startup, break-in, and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions.

3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine maintenance operations. b. Guide to troubleshooting. c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions. d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking instructions.

4. Servicing and Lubrication Schedule: a. List of lubricants required and quantity to be applied. b. Schedule of lubrication. c. Schedule for other routine maintenance.

5. Manufacturer’s printed instructions regarding safety precautions for both protection of personnel and prevention of damage to equipment.

6. Description of sequence of operation of controls. 7. Manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for

maintenance.


8. Recommended spare parts to be stocked, and quantity. 9. Predicted life of parts. 10. Control diagrams (ladder diagrams, instrumentation loop diagrams, and electrical

schematics as appropriate). 11. Bill of material. 12. Completed EQUIPMENT DATA FORM typewritten on copy of Form 2 to Section

01 78 23. (Example of completed form is Form 3 to Section 01 78 23.) 13. Other data as required under pertinent section of Specifications.

B. Specific content for each electric and electronic system, as applicable to equipment.

1. Description of System and Component Parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, rating tables, and tests as applicable. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d. Complete nameplate data. e. P&ID numbers for equipment as set forth in Contract Documents.

2. Circuit Directories of Panelboards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications.

3. Complete instrumentation loop diagrams with tabulated listing of components in each control circuit or loop.

4. Operating Procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions.

5. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine maintenance operations. b. Guide to troubleshooting. c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions. d. Adjustment and checking instructions.

6. Manufacturer’s printed instructions regarding safety precautions for both protection of personnel and prevention of damage to equipment.

7. Recommended spare parts to be stocked, and quantity. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.

C. Prepare and include additional data when need for such data becomes apparent during

instruction of Owner’s personnel.

(continued on next page)


FORM 1 TO SECTION 01 78 23 Page 1 of 5

CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL FORM

TO: (Engineer) (Address) (Attn:)

DATE

SPECIFICATION SECTION TITLE

SECTION NO.

FROM: (Contractor) (Address)

MANUFACTUER/ VENDOR

GENTLEMEN: We have checked the O&M data submittal dated ________________________ and have found it to be in accordance with Specification Section 01 78 23 and as noted below.

_______________________________________________ Signature of Contractor

Provided

Not Applicable

Page No.

FORMAT

Size: 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17

Paper: 20-lb min, white

Text: Printed data / typewritten

Drawings:

Standard size bound in text

Text-size labeled envelopes

Tabbed Section Dividers

Cover:

Title

Project title

Building / structure name

Equipment name

Specification section no.

Binders: Plastic cover

Pages: Numbered




Provided

Not Applicable

Page No.

GENERAL CONTENT

One Specification Section

Title Sheet:

Title

Project title

Building / structure name

Equipment name

Specification section no.

Contractor ID

Subcontractor ID

Purchase order data

Manufacturer ID

Service / parts supplier ID

Product List

Table of Contents

Product Data Sheets: Tabbed sections

Drawings:

Illustrate product and components

Control and flow diagrams

Special Information:

Interrelationships of equipment and components

Unified instruction package

Glossary

Instructions organized in consistent format

Instructions in logical order

Warranty, Bond, Service Contract




Provided

Not Applicable

Page No.

SPECIFIC CONTENT (EQUIPMENT / SYSTEM)

Description of Unit and Components:

Equipment function

Normal operating characteristics

Limiting conditions

Performance curves

Engineering data

Test data

Replaceable parts list

Nameplate data

P&ID numbers

Operating Procedures:

Startup

Normal operation

Regulation and control

Stopping and shutdown

Emergency

Seasonal operation

Special instructions

Maintenance Procedures

Routine

Troubleshooting

Disassembly / repair / reassembly

Adjustment and checking

Service and Lubrication:

List of lubricants

Lubrication schedule

Maintenance schedule

Safety Precautions / Features

Sequence of Operation of controls

Assembly Drawings

(Continued)




Provided

Not Applicable

Page No.

Parts List and Illustrations:

Spare parts list

Predicted life

Control Diagrams / Schematics

Bill of Material

Completed EQUIPMENT DATA FORM

Other Data as Required




Provided

Not Applicable

Page No.

SPECIFIC CONTENT (ELECTRIC / ELECTRONIC)

Description:

Equipment Function

Normal operating characteristics

Performance curves

Engineering data

Test data

Replaceable parts list

Nameplate data

P&ID numbers

Panelboard Directories

Electrical

Controls

Communications

Instrumentation Loops:

Diagrams

Components each circuit / loop

Operating Procedures

Normal operation

Sequences

Special instructions

Maintenance Procedures:

Routine

Troubleshooting

Disassembly / repair / reassembly

Adjusting and checking

Safety Precautions / Features

Spare Parts List

Additional Data



EQUIPMENT DATA FORM

PROJECT NAME

CONTRACT NO.

CONTRACTOR

EQUIPMENT NO. ASSET NO.*

DESCRIPTION MAINT. NO.*

LOCATION

MANUFACTURER

PURCHASED FROM

VENDOR ORDER NO.

DATE OF PURCHASE PURCHASE PRICE $

LOCAL SUPPLIER

ADDRESS

PHONE NO.

MODEL NO.

NO. OF UNITS

SERIAL NUMBERS

*By Owner



EQUIPMENT DATA FORM



NAMEPLATE DATA

ELECTRIC MOTOR PUMP / HVAC UNIT

MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER

TYPE [ ]AC [ ]DC TYPE

HORSEPOWER SIZE

RPM CAPACITY

VOLTAGE PRESSURE

AMPERAGE ROTATION

PHASE IMPELLER SIZE

FRAME IMPELLER MATL.

DRIVE / REDUCER OTHER (I&C)

MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER

TYPE

[ ]GEAR [ ]V-BELT [ ]CHAIN [ ]VARIDRIVE

TYPE

SIZE

SERVICE FACTOR CAPACITY

RATIO RANGE

*By Owner



EQUIPMENT DATA FORM

MAINTENANCE SUMMARY



MAINTENANCE OPERATION FREQUENCY

List briefly each maintenance operation and refer to specific information in Manufacturer’s Manual, if applicable. Refer by symbol to “Lubrication List” for lubrication operation.

List required frequency of each maintenance operation.

*By Owner



EQUIPMENT DATA FORM

LUBRICATION / RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST



LUBRICANT LIST

REFERENCE SYMBOL

LUBRICANT TYPE (MILITARY STANDARD)

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT AND MANUFACTURER

List of symbols in “Maintenance Operation”

List general lubrication type.

List specific lubrication name, viscosity, and manufacturer.

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST

PART NO.** DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY UNIT COST

ADDITIONAL DATA AND REMARKS

*By Owner **Identify parts provided by this contract with two asterisks. Note: Attach additional sheets if necessary.


“EXAMPLE”


EQUIPMENT DATA FORM

PROJECT NAME Anytown WWTP

WORK ORDER NO. 75685

CONTRACTOR Built-to-Last

EQUIPMENT NO. P-8-6-5, P-8-6-6 ASSET NO.*

DESCRIPTION Feed Pumps MAINT. NO.*

LOCATION Chemical Building

MANUFACTURER Pumptech

PURCHASED FROM Suppliers Inc.

VENDOR ORDER NO. SI-1324-aa

DATE OF PURCHASE May 7, 1997 PURCHASE PRICE $1,200

LOCAL SUPPLIER Helpful Tech.

ADDRESS 464553 N. Balyor, Outthere, Ohio 45362

PHONE NO. 354-576-9876

MODEL NO. CC-2-5674

NO. OF UNITS 2

SERIAL NUMBERS P674A123456-A / P674A123456-B

*By Owner


“EXAMPLE”


EQUIPMENT DATA FORM


DESCRIPTION Feed Pumps MANIT. NO.*

NAMEPLATE DATA

ELECTRIC MOTOR PUMP / HVAC UNIT

MANUFACTURER Westinghouse MANUFACTURER Pumptech

TYPE [ X ]AC [ ]DC TYPE Centrifugal

HORSEPOWER 25 SIZE 2 inch

RPM 2000 CAPACITY 9 gpm

VOLTAGE 460 PRESSURE 14 psig

AMPERAGE 1.4 FL ROTATION CW

PHASE 3 IMPELLER SIZE NA

FRAME 28a IMPELLER MATL. NA

DRIVE / REDUCER OTHER (I&C)

MANUFACTURER Westinghouse MANUFACTURER

TYPE

[X ]GEAR [ ]V-BELT [ ]CHAIN [ ]VARIDRIVE

TYPE

SIZE

SERVICE FACTOR CAPACITY

RATIO 1:1 RANGE

*By Owner


“EXAMPLE”


EQUIPMENT DATA FORM

MAINTENANCE SUMMARY



MAINTENANCE OPERATION FREQUENCY

List briefly each maintenance operation and refer to specific information in Manufacturer’s Manual, if applicable. Refer by symbol to “Lubrication List” for lubrication operation.

List required frequency of each maintenance operation.

1) Lubricate Reassembly

2) Clean pump As needed

3) Adjust and check clearance As needed

*By Owner


“EXAMPLE”


EQUIPMENT DATA FORM

LUBRICATION / RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST



LUBRICANT LIST

REFERENCE SYMBOL

LUBRICANT TYPE (MILITARY STANDARD)

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT AND MANUFACTURER

List of symbols in “Maintenance Operation”

List general lubrication type.

List specific lubrication name, viscosity, and manufacturer.

1 Lithium base grease Texaco TH268

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST

PART NO.** DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY UNIT COST

**2-567-098 Mechanical seal 1 1

3-987-456567 O-Ring 1 2 $6.75

ADDITIONAL DATA AND REMARKS

*By Owner **Identify parts provided by this contract with two asterisks. Note: Attach additional sheets if necessary.

END OF SECTION

812008 02 41 00-1 DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK:

A. Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the demolition of existing pipes, equipment, concrete structures and buildings as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, safety of structure and dust control. 2. Obtain required permits from authorities. 3. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 4. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. 5. Do not disable or disrupt building fire, life safety, or municipal fire systems without 7-day prior

written notice to the Owner. 6. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241, “Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and

Demolition Operations”. 7. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials.

1.02 DEFINITIONS:

A. Terms: 1. Abandon: Remove an item to the extent that it is not visible and does not interfere with new

construction. Portions of the abandoned item may be left in place. No abandoned items shall be left below new footings.

2. Fill and Abandon: Fill existing underground piping with flowable fill, cap pipe ends, and abandon in place.

3. Abandon, or Plug (Piping): Cap pipe ends, and abandon in place 4. Demolish: Remove existing items from their present location in the Project area and haul to

an area outside of the Project area. Remove utilities serving these items. 5. Relocate: Move existing items from their present location to another location in the Project

area. Extend utilities serving the present location to the new location. 6. Remove: Remove existing items from their present location in the Project area and haul to an

area outside of the Project area. Remove utilities serving these items. 7. Replace: Remove existing items from their present location in the Project area, haul them to

an area outside of the Project area, and furnish and install new items in the same or another location. Extend utilities serving the present location to the new location.

8. Reuse: Move existing items from their present location to another location in the Project area. Extend utilities serving the present location to the new location.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to ENGINEER for review two (2) copies of the following no later than 30 days prior to commencement of demolition work: 1. A detailed schedule showing the following:

a. Anticipated demolition start date. b. Coordination of shutoff, capping and abandoning of existing utility services as required. c. Proposed demolition sequence. d. Demolition completion date.

2. Proposed equipment, methods and operations of demolition and modifications specified herein.

3. Proposed receiving location(s) of all materials to be hauled off site.

812008 02 41 00-2 DEMOLITION

4. Proposed route(s) to receiving location(s) of all materials to be hauled off site. 5. Methods and procedures to be utilized to minimize soil erosion for heavy equipment and

trucking operations. 6. All required State and Local permits.

B. Record Drawings accurately showing actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions,

and other items which will be hidden after construction activities.

1.03 PROTECTION: A. Existing Structures:

1. Demolition and disassembly will not be allowed until it is coordinated with OWNER's operations.

2. Maintain free and safe passage to and from buildings. 3. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 4. Provide and place bracing, shoring and underpinning, and be responsible for safety and

support of structures and assume liability for such movement, settlement, damage or injury. 5. Cease operations and notify ENGINEER immediately if safety of structure appears to be

endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume operations until safe conditions are restored.

6. All active utility mains traversing the project site shall be maintained. 7. Do not close or obstruct any streets, sidewalks, alleys or passageways unless specifically

authorized.

B. Barricades: 1. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting and guard rails as required by applicable

regulatory agencies to protect occupants of building and workers.

2. Provide temporary fencing for security if it is necessary to temporarily remove OWNER's existing security fencing for access to the site. Obtain OWNER's approval prior to removing any existing fencing.

C. Coordination with local authorities: 1. Cooperate with local authorities and utility companies whose work affects or will be affected

by the demolition operations. Ascertain the rules, regulations and requirements of these authorities that affect the demolition process: notify them of conditions affecting their work. Disconnect or arrange for disconnection of utility services if required.

2. Comply fully with all provisions of the local codes, laws and ordinances applicable to work of this Section.

1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Scheduling: 1. Before commencing demolition work, complete all modifications necessary to bypass the

affected structure. 2. Actual work shall not begin until ENGINEER has inspected and approved the modifications

and authorized commencement of the demolition work. 3. Follow this procedure for each individual demolition operation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SALVAGED MATERIALS:

A. Ownership:

1. OWNER shall have the option of retaining ownership of any or all existing equipment, materials, and items removed under this Work.

812008 02 41 00-3 DEMOLITION

2. Specific items the OWNER shall retain ownership of include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following equipment: a. Pumps. b. Valves.

3. Should OWNER decide not to retain ownership of certain items removed under the work of this Section, those items shall become property of CONTRACTOR and shall be promptly removed from the Project Site.

B. Delivery: Deliver items which remain property of OWNER to a location, or locations, as selected

by OWNER.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION:

A. Permits: Obtain all necessary permits. B. Safety: Be responsible for all safety requirements in accordance with the General Conditions. C. Convenience: Carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience to surrounding areas as

possible. D. Emptying Tanks:

a. Emptying Existing Structures: It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to remove all sewage, partially treated sewage, sludge and chemicals from all structures prior to any demolition.

b. CONTRACTOR is responsible for keeping tanks free of accumulation of precipitation and groundwater until construction is complete.

3.02 DEMOLITION:

A. General: 1. Install all soil erosion and sediment control measures, if any, as indicated on the Drawings

prior to any demolition work. 2. Remove all mechanical, electrical, piping, and miscellaneous equipment and appurtenances

before commencing structural demolition. 3. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to turn off all applicable utilities prior to demolition. 4. Each concrete structure to be abandoned below grade shall have a minimum 6” diameter

hole cored through the bottom for every 50ft2 of structure surface. Alternatively, the bottom of each tank may be broken up to the subgrade to provide an equivalent area as stated above.

5. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required at no cost to OWNER. 6. Do not use explosives in the work. 7. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to maintain all access drives and roads utilized by

construction/demolition traffic. This includes, but is not limited to, periodic street sweeping and repairing (patching/reconstructing) access drives and roads damaged by construction traffic.

B. Filling and Abandoning Existing Underground Piping:

1. Where identified on the plans, fill the existing pipe completely with flowable fill. Plug both ends of the pipe. Abandon in place.

2. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions, and other items which will be hidden after construction.

C. Burning: Do not burn materials on Site.

812008 02 41 00-4 DEMOLITION

D. Stockpiling: On site stockpiles of demolished materials shall be removed from the site within 48 hours.

E. Disposal of materials:

1. Remove contaminated, dangerous and others materials from Site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations.

2. Arrange and pay for all required hauling, storage, collection and disposal. CONTRACTOR is responsible for any waste characterization that may be required by the waste receiver.

F. Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to

limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,

flooding, and pollution. 2. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition

operations, as directed by OWNER. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work.

G. Structure Demolition: Demolish structures completely and remove from site. Use such methods

as required to complete work within limitations of governing regulations and this specification. 1. Structures may be removed intact when acceptable and approved by authorities having

jurisdiction. 2. Proceed with demolition in systematic manner, from top of structure to ground. Complete

demolition work above each level before disturbing supporting members on lower levels. 3. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. 4. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by hoists, derricks, or other

suitable methods. 5. Break up and remove concrete slabs-on-grade and asphalt paving, unless otherwise shown

to remain. 6. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to not impose

excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.

END OF SECTION

812008 03 15 30 - 1 WATERSTOPS FVE027.02

SECTION 03 15 30

WATERSTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and installation of

waterstops as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.


a. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following: 1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Specifications:

a. CRD-C 572 - Polyvinylchloride Waterstop.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

B. Manufacturer's literature: 1. Submit for waterstops. 2. Required information:

a. Name of Manufacturer. b. Model. c. Dimensions. d. Details of construction and installation.


A. Qualifications: 1. Fabrication and installation personnel:

a. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.

b. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Receiving and storage: 1. All materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping

as applicable. 2. Handle and store materials:

a. In a manner which will prevent: 1) Deterioration or damage. 2) Contamination with foreign matter. 3) Damage by weather or elements.

b. In accordance with Manufacturer's directions.

812008 03 15 30 - 2 WATERSTOPS FVE027.02

B. Rejected material and replacements: 1. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the

Site. 2. Replace rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to OWNER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PVC WATERSTOPS

A. Non-moving joints: 1. Shape: Ribbed, flat. 2. Length: 6 inches. 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 4. Rib height: 1/8 inch. 5. Weight: 1.50 lb/ft average. 6. Head pressure capacity: 125 ft. 7. Use split flange style waterstop only as allowed in Part 3.

B. Moving joints: 1. Shape: Ribbed with center bulb. 2. Length: 6 inches. 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 4. Rib height: 1/8 inch. 5. Center bulb:

a. Inside diameter: 5/16 inch. b. Outside diameter: 7/8 inch.

6. Weight: 1.60 lb/ft average. 7. Head pressure capacity: 125 ft.

C. Base head pressure capacity on parameters published in the Corps of Engineers document, Waterstops and Other Preformed Joint Materials for Civil Works Structures EM 1110-2-2101.

D. Accessories: 1. Provide factory made waterstop fabrications for all changes of direction, intersections, and

transitions leaving only straight butt joint splices for the field. 2. Provide brass grommets spaced at 12 inches on center along length of waterstop. 3. Provide Teflon coated thermostatically controlled waterstop splicing irons for field butt

splices.

E. Material of construction: 1. PVC material shall be dense, homogeneous, and free from porosity or other imperfections,

resistant to Portland cement, alkalis, mildews, fungi, and mild (10%) acid solutions, and shall meet or exceed the following:

F. Performance requirements as follows:

Property Test Method Required Limits

Water absorption ASTM D 570 0.15% maximum

Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 300 lb/in minimum.

Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 638 350% minimum

Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 2000 psi minimum

812008 03 15 30 - 3 WATERSTOPS FVE027.02

Property Test Method Required Limits

Low Temperature Brittleness ASTM D 746 No Failure @ -35 degrees F

Stiffness in Flexure ASTM D 747 700 psi minimum

Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.38 maximum

Hardness, Shore A ASTM D 2240 79 +3

Tensile Strength after accelerated extraction CRD-C 572 1600 psi minimum

Elongation after accelerated extraction CRD-C 572 300% minimum

Effect of Alkalis after 7 days: Weight Change: Hardness Change: CRD-C 572

between -0.10% / +0.25% +/- 5 points

G. Manufacturers: 1. Greenstreak Group Inc.;

a. Centerbulb: Style 732 b. Flat: Style 679 c. Split: Style 724 d. Retrofit: Style 609

2. Burke Company. 3. Vinylex. 4. W.R. Meadows. 5. Or equal.

2.02 Bentonite waterstops:

A. Waterstops shall be 1" x 3/4" minimum, strip type, sodium bentonite base material.

B. The material shall meet or exceed the following:

Item Standard Criteria

Butyl Rubber- Hydrocarbon (% by weight) ASTM D297 25%

Bentonite SS-S-210-A 75.0%

Volatile matter ASTM D6 Below 1%

Specific gravity at 77° F ASTM D71 1.57

Penetration ASTM D217 150 GTL 300 GTL

58 85

Flash point ASTM D93 365

C. Manufacturers: 1. American Colloid Company - Waterstop-RX. 2. Greanstreak – Swellstop. 3. Or equal.

2.03 Hydrophilic waterstop:

A. General: 1. Non-bentonite chloroprene rubber material, strip waterstop approximately 3/8" x 1". 2. Expands 7 to 8 times its volume when exposed to water.

B. Manufacturers: 1. Greanstreak – Hydrotite. 2. Or equal.

812008 03 15 30 - 4 WATERSTOPS FVE027.02

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install waterstop in conformance with: 1. The submittals reviewed by ENGINEER. 2. The Manufacturer's recommendations.

B. PVC waterstop:

C. General: 1. Use PVC waterstops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Waterstops shall be fully continuous for the extent of the joint. Splices shall be

accomplished in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for joint welding. 3. Prefabricate multiple joint splices, joints with an angle cut, alignment change, or the joining

of dissimilar sections prior to placement. 4. Adequately support waterstops during installation and concrete pours. Holes in the

waterstops material are prohibited. Ensure reinforcing steel does not interfere with proper positioning of waterstop.

5. Repair or replace damaged waterstops prior to concrete pours. Seal concrete joints if leaks occur.

6. If not indicated, provide waterstops at all construction joints that constitute an air-liquid interface and extend to 2 feet below grade, where applicable.

D. PVC waterstops: 1. Limit PVC waterstop exposure to direct sunlight to two days. 2. Hold waterstop in position in formwork with blocks or wires and support to maintain shape. 3. Use support wires through brass eyelets on waterstops. Do not puncture waterstop body

with support wires; punctures on the outside ribs are allowed. 4. Field butt splices shall be heat fused welded using a Teflon coated thermostatically

controlled waterstop splicing iron at approximately 380 degrees F. 5. Lapping of waterstop, use of adhesives, or solvents shall not be allowed. 6. Use split flange style waterstop only at locations approved by ENGINEER.

E. Bentonite and hydrophilic waterstops: 1. Confine waterstop within the concrete joint with a minimum 2" concrete cover to the exterior

joint surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exposed waterstop must not be submerged for any period of time before concrete pour. If

swelling occurs prior to confinement, replace with new material. 3. Secure waterstop to existing concrete surface using primer or cut nails as necessary to

securely adhere the material in place. 4. Butt ends of waterstops, do not overlap.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. PVC waterstop splicing defects which are unacceptable include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Tensile strength less than 80 percent of parent section. 2. Misalignment of centerbulb, ribs, and end bulbs greater than 1/16 inch. 3. Bond failure at joint deeper than 1/16 inch or 15 percent of material thickness. 4. Misalignment that reduces waterstop cross section more than 15 percent. 5. Visible porosity in the weld. 6. Bubbles or inadequate bonding. 7. Visible signs of splice separation when cooled splice is bent by hand at a sharp angle. 8. Charred or burnt material.

812008 03 15 30 - 5 WATERSTOPS FVE027.02

3.03 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean all installed materials and products and related areas: 1. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section. 2. In accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management

END OF SECTION

812008 03 30 00 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FVE027.02

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. If differing requirements are identified elsewhere (in these specifications or on drawings or separate instructions), the more stringent requirement shall be met.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Suspended slabs. 5. Concrete toppings. 6. Building frame members. 7. Building walls.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 50 03 "Concrete Adhesive Anchors". 2. Section 03 15 30 "Waterstops".

C. References 1. ACI 211.1, "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,

Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete". 2. ACI 212.3R, "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete". 3. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 4. ACI 302.1R, "Recommended Practice for Floor and Slab Construction". 5. ACI 304R, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing Concrete". 6. ACI 305R, "Hot-Weather Concreting". 7. ACI 306R, "Cold-Weather Concreting". 8. ACI 308, "Standard Practice for Curing Concrete". 9. ACI 309R, "Guide for Consolidation of Concrete". 10. ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement". 11. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 12. ACI 347R, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 13. ACI 350R, "Concrete Sanitary Engineering Structures". 14. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI). 15. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Proportions shall be selected according to ACI 301, Section 3.9. No concrete shall be placed until approval is obtained from the ENGINEER. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Approval from the ENGINEER shall be obtained before fabrication. Details of reinforcement and accessories not covered herein shall be in accordance with ACI 315.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. 1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping

formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer.

F. Submit Certification for the following: 1. Cement. 2. Aggregates. 3. Admixtures. 4. Reinforcement: Mill test report

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Material Test Reports: None

C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.


1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. ACI 302.1R, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."

G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-barrier installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with

DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1.5 inch to the plane of

exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in

concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive

dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length.

D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, assembled with clips.


E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M.

F. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.

G. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

H. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

I. Place reinforcement as indicated on approved shop drawings and to the following tolerances:

Clear Distance to Formed Surfaces + 1/4 inch.

Minimum Spacing Between Bars -1/4 inch.

Uniform Spacing of Bars, but the Required Number of Bars Shall

not be Reduced:

+ 2 inches

Uniform Spacing of Stirrups and Ties, but the Required Number of

Stirrups and Ties shall not be Reduced:

+ 1 inch

Longitudinal Locations of Bends and Ends of Reinforcement:

General

Discontinuous Ends of Members

+ 2 inches

+ 1/2 inch

Length of Bar Laps - 1-1/2 inches

Embedded Length:

For Bar Sizes No. 3 - 11

For Bar Sizes No. 14 - 18

1 inch

- 2 inches

J. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed the above tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to approval by the ENGINEER.

K. All reinforcement at the time concrete is placed shall be free of mud, oil or other materials that may adversely affect or reduce the bond. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of both will be accepted without cleaning or brushing, provided the dimensions and weights, including heights of deformations on a cleaned sample, meet the applicable ASTM specification requirements.

L. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement, shall be as follows:

Concrete Location Minimum Cover

Concrete Deposited Against the Ground 3 inches

Formed Surfaces Exposed to Weather or in Contact with the

Ground:

With Rebars #6 or Larger

- With Rebars Less than #6

2 inches

1-1/2 inches

Formed Tank Walls, Top Surface of Tank Slab 2 inches

Interior Surfaces:

Beams, Girders, and Columns

Slabs, Walls, & Joists with #11 Bars or Smaller

- Slabs, Walls, & Joists with #14 & #18 Bars

1-1/2 inches

3/4 inch

1-1/2 inches


M. All reinforcement shall be supported and fastened together to prevent displacement by construction loads or the placing of concrete beyond the tolerances of Schedule B, located at the end of this Section. On ground, where necessary, solid concrete blocks may be used to support reinforcement. Over formwork, concrete, metal, plastic or other approved bar chairs and spacers shall be used. Where the concrete surface will be exposed to the weather in the finished structure, the portions of all accessories within 1/2 inch of the concrete surface shall be noncorrosive or protected against corrosion.

N. Welded wire fabric shall be overlapped wherever successive mats or rolls are continuous in such a way that the overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than the spacing of the cross wires plus 2 inches. It shall be supported as required for reinforcing bars. The fabric shall extend across supporting beams and walls and to within 4 inches of concrete edges. It may extend through control joints. It shall be adequately supported during placing of concrete to insure its proper position in the slab.

O. All splices not shown in the contract documents shall be subject to approval. Mechanical connectors for reinforcing bars shall not be used unless approved by the ENGINEER on a shop drawing submittal.

P. Reinforcement shall not be bent after being embedded in hardened concrete unless approved by the ENGINEER.

Q. Add steel reinforcing corner bars at all concrete wall and footing corners to match size and spacing of horizontal wall reinforcing steel. Each corner bar leg shall be minimum 3'-0" long otherwise shown. All horizontal wall reinforcing shall be continuous and shall extend through piers or pilasters.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact

forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I Supplement with the following:


a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C (maximum fly ash content shall be 25% by weight).

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, Portland blast-furnace slag,

Type IP, Portland-pozzolan Type I (PM), pozzolan-modified Portland Type I (SM), slag-modified Portland cement.

B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 1N coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As indicated/as required. Coarse aggregate shall

conform to MDOT 6A or 6AA or ASTM C33, Size 57. Use crushed concrete for tanks and exterior slabs.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. Fine aggregate shall conform to MDOT 2NS or ASTM C33, fines.

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. Mixing water shall be clean, fresh, and potable.

2.05 ALKALI-SILICA REACTIVITY

A. Provide documentation to the Engineer that the concrete mixture does not present the potential for excessive expansion caused by alkali-silica reactivity (ASR). Testing may be from other Department projects or from records provided by the aggregate suppliers. Provide the latest test results (valid for 2 years) conforming to the specified criterion for one of the following standard test methods for the material to be used in the project 1. ASTM C 1260. Mortar Bar Test. If the expansion of the mortar bars is less than 0.10

percent at 14 days of immersion, the aggregate is considered nondeleterious to ASR reactivity and may be used in the concrete.

2. ASTM C 1293. Concrete Prism Test. If the expansion of concrete prisms is not greater than 0.040 percent after 1 year, the aggregate is considered nondeleterious to ASR reactivity and may be used in the concrete.

B. If the concrete mixture exceeds the limits in the ASTM used, then the Engineer will not approve the use of that concrete mixture.

C. If no previous test data are available for the concrete mixture that shows it is resistant to ASR, mitigate the potential for ASR using either Method 1 or 2 as follows. 1. Method 1. Replace 25 to 40 percent of the Portland cement in the concrete mixture

with Class F fly ash or Slag Cement (Grade 100 minimum). A blended cement meet-ing the requirements of ASTM C 595 containing Portland cement and slag cement or Class F fly ash may also be used. Demonstrate the ability of the fly ash or slag cement to control the deleterious ex-pansion caused by ASR by molding and testing mortar bars according to the stand-ard test method described in ASTM C 1567 using the mix proportions for both the aggregates and the cementitious materials proposed for the project. Make at least three test specimens for each cementitious materials-aggregate combination. If the average of three mortar bars for a given cementitious materials-aggregate combina-tion produces an expansion is less than 0.10 percent at 14 days of immersion, the JMF (job mix formula) associated with that combination will be considered nondele-terious to ASR reactivity. If the average expansion is 0.10 percent or greater, the JMF associated with that combination will be considered not sufficient to control the deleterious expansion caused by ASR and the JMF will be rejected.


2. Method 2. Use Low-Alkali cement with equivalent alkaline (Na2O + 0.658 X percent K2O) not exceeding 0.60 percent. The total alkali content for the cementitious mate-rials combination must not exceed 3.0 pounds per cubic yard (Na2O equivalent).

2.06 MIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: Neutralized vinsol resin conforming to ASTM C 260 or any other ASTM C 260 air entraining admixture that the manufacturer will certify as compatible with the use of superplasticizers.

B. Pozzolanic Admixtures: ASTM C618, Type C or Type F, except that loss on ignition shall not exceed 4%.

C. Use Type F pozzolith admixture for concrete which is exposed to raw sewage or aggressive solutions.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: "Eucon WR-75" by the Euclid Chemical Co., "Pozzolith

200N" by Master Builders or "Plastocrete 160" by Sika Chemical Corp. or W.R. Grace "WRDA Series". The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: "Eucon 75" by Euclid Chemical Co.,

"Pozzolith R" by Master Builders, or "Plastiment" by Sika Chemical Corp., or W.R. Grace "Daratard Series". The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type D and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: "Eucon 37" by Euclid Chemical Co., "Rheobuild" by Master Builders, or "Sikament" by Sika Chemical Corp. or W.R. Grace "Daracem 100", W.R. Grace "ADVA Series". The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type F or G, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.

5. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 6. Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerator: "Accelguard 80", Euclid Chemical Co.,

"Palarset", W.R. Grace & Co., or "Pozzutec 20", Master Builders, Inc. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type C or E, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.

E. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions are not permitted. 1. All materials used in the work shall be of the same composition as used in

establishing the mix design.

2.07 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Monofilament Micro-Fibers:

1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Fibrasol II P. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand 150. 3) FORTA Corporation; FORTA Econo-Mono. 4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace MicroFiber.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1153&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456816696&mf=&src=wd





5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 6) Nycon, Inc.; ProConM. 7) Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 150. 8) Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber PPM.

B. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Polyolefin macro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 2-1/4 inches long.

2.08 VAPOR BARRIER

A. Sheet Vapor Barrier/Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, except with maximum perm rating of 0.01 or lower. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green. h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.09 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus. b. ChemTec Int'l; ChemTec One. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Intraseal. d. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Titan Hard. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD. k. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver. l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Duro-Nox. m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Buff Hard.





























n. US SPEC, Division of US Mix Products Company; US SPEC Industraseal. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS Clear.

2.10 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for

application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

H. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

I. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.11 Retain one or all options in first paragraph below. Joint-filler strips are used in floor isolation joints.
























A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid

curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened

or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,

conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as

recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed

mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement in concrete as indicated on drawings.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content by percent weight of cement in hardened concrete to: 1. For parking structures and exterior exposed reinforced concrete – 0.15 2. For all other concrete – 0.30


D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Proportions shall be selected using ACI 301, Section 3.9.

B. Proportions and materials shall conform to Schedule A, Specification Requirements for

Concrete, at end of this Section.

C. Plain concrete for curb and gutter and exterior slabs and equipment pads.

1. Proportions and Materials:

a. Permissible Cement Types: I, IP, I-A, IP-A.

b. Minimum Cement Content: 6.0 sacks/cu.yd.

c. Coarse Aggregate: MDOT 6AA (crushed limestone).

d. Sand: MDOT-2NS.

e. Maximum Water-Cementitious material ratio: 0.45

f. Entrained Air content: 5-8%.

g. Maximum Slump: 4".

h. Minimum Compressive Strength, fc' (28 day) 4500 psi.

D. Plain concrete for interior slabs, walls, beams, foundations, retaining walls and equipment

pads.




c. Coarse Aggregate: MDOT 6A.

d. Sand: MDOT-2NS.


f. Entrained Air content: none required.



E. Plain concrete for tanks and containment areas.


a. Permissible Cement Types: IIA


c. Coarse Aggregate: MDOT 6AA (crushed limestone).

d. Sand: MDOT-2NS.






F. Plain concrete for building walls exposed to the exterior and concrete fill below existing

footings and utilities.




c. Coarse Aggregate: MDOT 6A.

d. Sand: MDOT-2NS.





G. Concrete for Interior Precast Plank Topping:




c. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33 No. 8 (3/8" max.).

d. Sand: MDOT 2NS


f. Maximum Slump: 5"

g. Minimum Compressive Strength, fc' (28 day) 4000 psi.

H. Immediately before placing concrete topping, saturate surface of precast plank with a 50/50

mixture of sand/cement slurry. Do not leave standing water and do not allow slurry to dry prior

to placing concrete topping.

I. Use of all admixtures must be approved by the ENGINEER. All admixtures shall be used in

accordance with the manufacturers' instructions except as otherwise directed by the

ENGINEER.

J. Superplasticizer may be included as needed for workability and slump.

2.15 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.16 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time

from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Prepare concrete mixes for each class of concrete given in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes. The mixes shall meet requirements given in ACI 318, ACI 301, and in this section.

C. Prepare concrete mixes for each class of concrete given in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes. The mixes shall meet requirements given in ACI 318, ACI 301, and in this section.

D. Provide the specified chemical and cementitious admixtures in each mix as shown in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes. Fly ash may be substituted for cement up to 20% (by weight) of the total cementitious materials quantity for any mix at the discretion of the concrete


supplier. Approved chemical admixtures may be included in any concrete mix as required for the mix to meet the specified strength and durability requirements. The mix design documentation submitted for approval shall include the desired admixtures at the proposed dosage. See Paragraph 1.04 Submittals for additional requirements.

E. Required sulfate resistance: Provide concrete mixes that meet or exceed sulfate resistance requirements given in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes as defined by ACI 318, Section 4.3 and by ACI 350R.

F. Minimum Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Provide concrete mixes that meet or exceed the minimum freeze-thaw requirements given in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes as defined by ACI 318, Section 4.2.1. Mild exposure indicates concrete incorporating air entrainment for reasons other than durability, such as to improve strength, workability, and cohesion or to reduce the amount of water in the mix.

G. Allowed Chloride Ion Content: Provide concrete mixes that do not exceed the chloride ion content limits given in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes as defined in ACI 318, Section 4.43

H. Permeability and Chloride Resistance: Provide concrete mixes that meet or exceed the permeability and chloride resistance requirements given in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes as defined by ACI 318, Section 4.2.23

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.


H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

B. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

C. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

D. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

E. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves and other work to be embedded in and passing through concrete members.

F. Accurately locate and set in place items which are to be cast directly into concrete.

G. Coordinate work of other sections and cooperate with trade involved in forming and/or setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts.

H. Install all concrete accessories in accordance with Drawings and manufacturer's recommendations; strait, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

I. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with a readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete into the voids.

J. No aluminum items shall be embedded in concrete.

K. Placement Tolerances – Anchor Bolts: 1. Locate accurately, ±1/8 inch horizontal tolerance, ±1/4 inch vertical tolerance.

Positioning templates shall be used to set all anchor bolts. 2. Secure to prevent displacement during concrete pours. Recheck positions as pour

progresses and correct any deviations while concrete is still in plastic state. 3. Replace all bolts not placed to the above tolerance, by chipping out, resetting, and

grouting with non-shrink grout as directed by the ENGINEER.


3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.04 VAPOR BARRIER/RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Barrier/Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1745, Class B and manufacturer's written instructions. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 2. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's instructions. 3. Lap Vapor Barrier/Retarder over footings and turn-up along foundation walls.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 6. 2. Raven Industries Inc.; Griffolyn Type-65 10 mil Green 3. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mill Class A

C. Granular Course: Place and compact a 1/2-inch- thick layer of fine-graded granular material over granular fill.

3.05 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder

before placing concrete.

B. Reinforcing bars shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615 or A616, Grade 60.

C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

F. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing.


Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

G. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

H. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185.

3.06 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls at no more than 16 feet on center. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

8. Place formed construction joints in floor slabs and walls as shown on Drawings or at maximum 25 foot intervals. Spacing of joints in concrete walks and driveways shall not exceed 1.5 times the width of the walk or drive minimum dimension (but not more than 12'). Secure to resist movement of fresh concrete.

9. The surface of the concrete at all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all laitance removed prior to placing adjoining concrete.

10. When joining new concrete to existing concrete, bond shall be obtained by one of the following methods:

a. The use of an approved bonding agent. Use epoxy bonding agent in joints exposed to moisture or below grade. Use latex bonding agent in other applications.

b. Roughening the surface of the concrete in an approved manner, which will expose the aggregate and will not leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth as indicated of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.


D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below

finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

F. Joint Sealant: 1. Horizontal Joints: Two part, self-leveling, polyurethane sealant.

a. Sonolastic SL2, by Sonneborn Corporation. b. Sikaflex 2C SL, by Sika Corporation c. Dualthane, by W.R. Meadows.

2. Vertical Joints: Two part, non-sag, polyurethane sealant a. Sololastic NP2, by Sonneborn Corporation. b. Sikaflex 2C NS, by Sika Corporation. c. Dualthane, by W.R. Meadows.

3.07 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.08 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design

pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.


2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing

water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.09 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 2. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,

arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

3. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete

surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a


uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part Portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part Portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Provide a composite flatness (FF) and a composite levelness (FL) as listed below: 1. Unless otherwise listed FF25/FL20.

C. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings, or

to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

D. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to be covered with

fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

2. Areas scheduled to receive float finish shall have surface tolerance of FF=18 and FL = 15. This is approximately equivalent to floor tolerance determined by placing 10-foot (3048 mm) straight edge anywhere on slab. Gap between straight edge and concrete slab must not exceed ½-inch (12.7 mm).

E. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient

flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Areas scheduled to receive trowel finish shall have surface tolerance of FF=20 and FL=17. This is approximately equivalent to floor tolerance determined by placing 10-


foot (3048 mm) straight edge anywhere on slab. Gap between straight edge and concrete slab must not exceed 5/16-inch (7.9 mm).

3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.

F. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated or where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

G. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base

not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Roughen surface of slab on grade or supported slab, and provide latex bonding agent prior to placement of equipment base.

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete substrate.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.


3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with

the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-

retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.13 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.


1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;

and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until

construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

D. Shall conform to ASTM D1751 (non-extruding, bituminous type) for exterior applications.

E. Shall conform to ASTM D1752 (non-extruding, non-bituminous type) for interior applications.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more

than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.


D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams

and slabs. 8. Flooring supplier shall inspect vapor barrier installation prior to concrete to verify

installation is compatible with flooring requirements.


C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each

concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one laboratory-cured specimen at 7 days, one specimen at 28 days, and retain one spare specimen. One additional cylinder will be taken during cold weather concrete pouring and will be cured on the project site under the same conditions as the concrete it represents, with break time to be determined by Engineer.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.


3.17 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

3.18 TESTING WASTEWATER CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES

A. CONTRACTOR shall conduct hydrostatic testing of all new concrete tanks in accordance with ACI 350.1R – Testing Reinforced Concrete Structures for Watertightness. CONTRACTOR may use water from the OWNER's water distribution system. In no case can partially treated sewage be used for testing. Acceptance is defined as no visible leak or wet area on the external wall surface, water loss of no more than 1/10th of 1% of the depth over a 24-hour period, or ENGINEER's approval. 1. Fill each tank to its normal operating elevation. Tank filling shall occur over several

days so that the OWNER's water distribution system is not excessively stressed. 2. Once full, measure and mark the water surface elevation. 3. Visually inspect walls and joints for leakage. 4. Let water stand for 24-hours, then measure water surface and determine

acceptance. 5. Repair any leaking areas, then repeat steps 1, 2 & 3 as needed until a successful

test is accomplished.

B. Once testing has successfully demonstrated the water-tightness of each tank, the water may be utilized for testing and startup of other tanks or process equipment.

END OF SECTION


SCHEDULE A

SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE

USE CATEGORY

PERMISSIBLE

CEMENT TYPE

MINIMUM

CEMENT

CONTENT/CY

COARSE

AGGREGATE

MAXIMUM

WATER/CEMENT

RATIO*

ENTRAINED

AIR CONTENT

MAXIMUM

SLUMP

MINIMUM

COMPRESSIVE

STRENGTH Fc'

Interior Floors:

a. Interior Floors I, IP, IA, IP-A 6 sacks MDOT-6A 0.45 2-3% 4" 4000 psi

Interior:

a. Liquid Containing

Structures

IIA 6 sacks MDOT-6AA 0.45 5-7% 4" 4000 psi

Exterior: **

a. Liquid Containing

Structures

IIA 6 sacks MDOT-6AA 0.45 5-7% 4" 4000 psi

b. Sidewalks, Conc.

Paving, etc.

I, IP, IA, IP-A

6 sacks

MDOT-6AA

0.40

5-7%

3"

4500 psi

Footings:

a. Footings

Non-Structural: a. Low Strength

Concrete Fill b. Precast Concrete

Topping Slab

I, IP I I

6 sacks

N/A

5 sacks

MDOT-6A

MDOT-6A

3/8" Mas

0.45

N/A

0.50

5-7%***

2-3%

2-3%

3"

8"

4"

4000 psi

300 psi

3000 psi

* Water/ Cementitious Material Ratio: 5.0 gal/sack = 0.44 lbs/lbs., 5.5 gal/sack = 0.48 lbs/lbs., 6.0 gal/sack = 0.53 lbs/lbs.

** Exterior Means: Exterior exposure on any side.

*** Provide air entrainment for building footing/walls exposed to the exterior.

812008 03 60 00 - 1 GROUTING FVE027.02

SECTION 03 60 00

GROUTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and installation of

cementitious and non-shrink grout as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.



1.02 REFERENCES

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following: 1. ASTM Standard Specification:

a. C881 - Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. b. C1107 – Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).

2. ASTM Standard Test Method: a. C579 - Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic

Surfacings and Polymer Concretes.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's literature: 1. Submit for grout. 2. Required information:

a. Product data including general composition, typical uses. b. Installation instructions. c. Laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications.


A. Receiving and storage: 1. All materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping

as applicable. 2. Handle and store materials:

a. In a manner which will prevent: 1) Deterioration or damage. 2) Contamination with foreign matter. 3) Damage by weather or elements.

b. In accordance with Manufacturer's directions.

B. Rejected material and replacements: 1. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the

Site.

812008 03 60 00 - 2 GROUTING FVE027.02

2. Replace rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to OWNER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cementitious grout: 1. Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing graded mineral

aggregates, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents.

2. Minimum compressive strength of 6,000 psi at 28 days. 3. Comply with ASTM C1107. 4. Manufacturers and products:

a. BASF Corporation, MasterFlow 100. b. Dayton Superior Corp., 1107 Advantage Grout. c. Euclid Chemical Co.; NS Grout. d. Five Star Products, Inc.; Five Star Grout. e. Kaufman Products, Inc., SureGrout. f. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; DURAGROUT. g. Sika Corporation, SikaGrout 212. h. US MIX Co., GP Grout.

B. Epoxy Grout: 1. High strength, general purpose epoxy grout. 2. Compressive strength: Minimum 10,000 psi in accordance with ASTM C579. 3. Manufacturers and products:

a. BASF Corporation, MasterFlow 648. b. Dayton Superior Corp., Epoxy Grout J55. c. Euclid Chemical Co.; E3-G. d. Five Star Products, Inc.; Five Star DP Epoxy Grout. e. Kaufman Products, Inc., K Pro HP Grout. f. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; EPOGROUT 758. g. Sika Corporation, Sikadur 42, Grout-Pak.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install grout in conformance with: 1. The submittals reviewed by ENGINEER. 2. The Manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Request the services of the local representative for a pre-job conference to plan the installation.

C. Use cementitious grout for: 1. structural steel column base plates, 2. bearing plates, 3. drilled-in anchor bolts, 4. drilled-in reinforcing dowels, 5. railing posts, and 6. structural concrete repairs, and 7. where grout is indicated on the drawings or specifications.

812008 03 60 00 - 3 GROUTING FVE027.02

D. Use epoxy grout for: 1. Where epoxy grout is indicated on the drawings or specifications.

3.02 PLACEMENT

A. Setting bases and bearing plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to

improve bond to surfaces. Clean thoroughly with liberal quantities of water, leaving concrete saturated but free of standing water.

2. Clean Bottom surface of base and bearing plates. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural steel members on steel wedges or other steel adjusting devices.

3. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.

5. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Voids within area to be grouted must be filled.

C. Strike-off grout cleanly and neatly. Rectify defects.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean all installed materials and products and related areas: 1. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section. 2. In accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management

END OF SECTION

812008 05 12 00-1 METAL FABRICATIONS FVE027.02

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.

B. Section 05 51 00 - Metal Stairs.

C. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Coating: Paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

B. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2012).

C. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.

D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015.

E. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a.

F. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2013.

G. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2014.

H. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.

I. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

J. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014.

K. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes; 2012.

L. ASTM B210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes (Metric); 2012.

M. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2012.

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A36/A36M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A48/A48M





https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A307


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20B209

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20B209M





N. ASTM B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold-Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric); 2012.

O. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.

P. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.

Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata).

R. AWS D1.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum; 2008.

S. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2015.

T. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004).

U. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004).

V. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.

1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172.


A. Design connections of lintel components and framing connections under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by IAS AC172.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing.



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20A2.4

https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20D1.1/D1.1M

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20D1.2/D1.2M

http://www.iasonline.org/index.html

http://www.sspc.org/ST-PAINT15


http://www.sspc.org/sspc-sp-2-hand-tool-cleaning.html





C. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M.

D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.

E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, Grade A, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper.

C. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210 (ASTM B210M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.

D. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM B211 (ASTM B211M), 6061 alloy, T6 temper.

E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS

A. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; galvanized finish.

B. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; galvanized finish.

C. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish.

2.05 CAST IRON TRENCH CASTINGS

A. Cast Iron Trench Castings:

1. Material: Cast iron; ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35 B (heavy duty).











http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=AWS%20D1.2/D1.2M



2. Basis of Design: East Jordan Iron Works; Model V7382-20: americas.ejco.com.

3. Manufacturers:

a. East Jordan Iron Works: americas.ejco.com.

b. Neenah Foundry, a division of Neenah Enterprises, Inc: www.nfco.com.

c. Or approved equal.

2.06 FINISHES - STEEL

A. Prime paint steel items.

1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete, items to be embedded in masonry, and items specified for galvanized finish.

B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.

C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

D. Prime Painting: One coat.

E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft (530 g/sq m) galvanized coating.

F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.

2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry.

3.03 INSTALLATION




A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Field weld components as indicated on shop drawings.

D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION


812008 05 50 03 - 1 CONCRETE ADHESIVE ANCHORS

FVE027.02

SECTION 05 50 03

CONCRETE ADHESIVE ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. The work includes the use of adhesive anchoring systems for the installation of reinforcement dowels and threaded rods or anchors in new or existing concrete where indicated in the plans.

B. Adhesive systems shall be epoxy type unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit manufacturer's product data including installation instructions.


A. Acceptable products include:

Trade Name Manufacturer

SET-XP Anchoring Adhesive Simpson HIT-HY 200 MAX SD Hilti EPCON G5 Red Head

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Embedment depths shall be as indicated in the Drawings. Minimum embedment depths for applications not indicated specifically in the drawings shall be the lesser of manufacturer's published minimum or 2 inches less than the nominal thickness of the anchoring concrete.

END OF SECTION

812008 05 51 00 - 1 METAL STAIRS FVE027.02

SECTION 05 51 00

METAL STAIRS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Stairs with grating treads.

B. Structural steel stair framing and supports.

C. Handrails and guards.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal anchors in concrete.

B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

C. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Coatings: Paint finish.


A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

B. ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2016.

C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.

E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015.

F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a.

G. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2013.

H. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.

I. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.

J. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

K. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2015.

http://www.ada.gov/











812008 05 51 00 - 2 METAL STAIRS FVE027.02

L. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016.

M. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2015.

N. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

O. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.

P. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata).

Q. NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual; 1992, Fifth Edition.

R. NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual; 2009.

S. NAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual; 2009.

T. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths.

C. Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer.

B. Fabricator Qualifications:

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL

A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure.

1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.

2. Handrails: Comply with applicable accessibility requirements of ADA Standards.



https://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20F3125/F3125M



http://www.naamm.org/





http://www.ada.gov/

812008 05 51 00 - 3 METAL STAIRS FVE027.02

3. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the applicable local code.

4. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 5. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for

transport and access to site. 6. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch. 7. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape.

B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1. Service: Exposed joints tight with face surfaces aligned; underside of stair not covered by

soffit is not considered exposed to view. a. Welded Joints: Welded on back side wherever possible. b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth; not required to be flush. c. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts or screw

threads.

C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design and specified quality level.

D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required.

2.02 METAL STAIRS WITH GRATING TREADS

A. Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Industrial, as defined above.

B. Risers: Open.

C. Treads: Steel bar grating. 1. Grating Type: Welded. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: 1-1/4" inch (32 mm), minimum. 3. Top Surface: Standard. 4. Nosing: Checkered plate. 5. Nosing Width: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm), minimum. 6. Anchorage to Stringers: End plates welded to grating, bolted to stringers.

D. Stringers: Rolled steel channels. 1. Stringer Depth: 10 inches (250 mm). 2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends.

E. Landings: Same construction as treads, supported and reinforced as required to achieve design load capacity.

F. Railings: Steel pipe railings.

G. Finish: Galvanized after fabrication.

2.03 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS

A. Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm), minimum, to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), maximum.

B. Guards: 1. Top Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated.

a. Size: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Infill at Pipe Railings: Pipe or tube rails sloped parallel to stair.

812008 05 51 00 - 4 METAL STAIRS FVE027.02

a. Size: As indicated on the Drawings. b. Material: Steel pipe or tube, round. c. Vertical Spacing: Maximum 4 inches (100 mm) on center. d. Jointing: Welded and ground smooth and flush.

3. End and Intermediate Posts: Same material and size as top rails. a. Horizontal Spacing: As indicated on drawings. b. Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M or ASTM A501/A501M structural tubing, round and shapes as indicated.

C. Steel Plates: ASTM A6/A6M or ASTM A283/A283M.

D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, galvanized after assembly.

E. Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: Hot- or cold-rolled, except use cold-rolled where finished work will be exposed to view. 1. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation CS (commercial steel). 2. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (commercial steel).

F. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230 with G40/Z120 coating.

G. Checkered Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled steel floor plate; manufacturer's standard pattern.

H. Gratings: Bar gratings complying with NAAMM MBG 531 or NAAMM MBG 532, whichever applies based on bar sizes.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, and galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.

B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.06 SHOP FINISHING

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize to minimum requirements of ASTM A123/A123M. 1. Touch up abraded areas after fabrication using specified touch-up primer for galvanized

surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION














812008 05 51 00 - 5 METAL STAIRS FVE027.02

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal.

B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete and embedded in masonry with setting templates.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure.

C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

D. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

E. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations specified for jointing quality levels.

F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled.

G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

END OF SECTION


812008 06 10 00-1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

FVE027.02

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Section includes: 1. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the major items listed below as

indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

2. Major items: a. Blocking. b. Roof nailers. c. Plywood wall sheathing. d. Temporary wall enclosures. e. Temporary doors and window closures. f. Rough framing for cabinetry. g. Nails and spikes. h. Bolts, nuts and washers. i. Lag bolts. j. Screws. k. Expansion fasteners into masonry and concrete. l. Sills. m. Roof curbs.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the pertinent provisions of the following: 1. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction. 2. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee. 3. AWPA - American Wood Preservers Association:

a. C2: Pressure Treatment - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties. 4. AWPB - American Wood Preservers Bureau:

a. LP-2: Standard for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Water Borne Preservatives for Above Ground Use.

b. LP-22: Standard for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Water Borne Preservatives for Ground Contact Use.

5. NFPA - National Forest Products Association. 6. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 7. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Abbreviations: 1. CCA: Chromated Copper Arsenate.


A. Grading requirements: 1. Lumber shall be graded in accordance with the standards of the WWPA and SPIB or an

agency approved by the ALSC. 2. Every piece of lumber and plywood shall be properly grade stamped.


FVE027.02

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. General:

1. Stack all material in a manner which ensures proper ventilation and drainage to achieve the moisture content specified.

2. Cover all materials with waterproof coverings to protect them from the elements.


A. General: 1. Lumber:

a. Sound, thoroughly seasoned, solid four sides, well manufactured, and free from warp that cannot be corrected in process of bridging or nailing.

b. Maximum moisture content at time of installation: 19%.

B. Untreated lumber: 1. Unless otherwise specified herein, all lumber shall be untreated. 2. Blocking: Spruce-Pine-Fir construction grade or better. 3. 1 x 2 and larger: Idaho White Pine No. 2 or better. 4. 2 x 4: Spruce-Pine-Fir construction grade or better. 5. 2 x 6 and larger: Hem-Fir No. 2 or better.

C. Preservative treated lumber:

1. Lumber items as listed below shall be preservative treated with CCA: a. All wood in contact with exterior masonry, concrete or metals. b. Sills. c. Nailers. d. Roof curbs.

2. Density of treatment: 0.25 pounds per cubic foot. 3. Southern Pine or Douglas Fir No. 1.

D. Rough hardware:

1. Select rough hardware and fasteners subject to review of ENGINEER, except as indicated otherwise.

2. Provide galvanized nails. 3. Provide galvanized screws, bolts, nuts and washers when exposed to the exterior.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Framing: 1. Perform all rough carpentry and framing required in connection with carpentry and

millwork. 2. Rough carpentry shall be well spiked, nailed, screwed or bolted together. 3. Secure construction which is to rest on masonry walls with ½ inch diameter anchor bolts

spaced 4 feet on center, or as indicate in drawings.


FVE027.02

B. Temporary closures: 1. Provide temporary wood doors for closures, hung on temporary wood bucks at exterior

door entrances. 2. Provide heavy brass padlock and two extra keys for each temporary door. 3. Give one key to the OWNER and one to the ENGINEER. 4. Provide cloth or transparent plastic covered window frames for exterior window openings. 5. Windows may be glazed instead of fitted with temporary closures if glass is carefully

protected.

C. Touch up of preservative treated lumber: 1. Apply liberal brush coat of preservative to cut faces of preservative treated lumber. 2. Use same preservative as used to originally treat the lumber.

3.02 CLEANING:

A. Clean the work installed under this Section and all affected areas in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management.

END OF SECTION

812008 FVE027.02

06 82 13 - 1 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FABRICATIONS

SECTION 06 82 13

GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Glass fiber reinforced, resin fabrications (ladders).


A. ASTM D-638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics.

B. ASTM D-790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics.

C. ASTM D-2344 - Apparent Interlaminar Shear Strength of Parallel Fiber Composites by Short Beam Method.

D. ASTM D-495 - High Voltage, Low-Current, Dry Arc Resistance of Solid Electrical Insulation.

E. ASTM D-696 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

F. THE OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 29, Section 1910.27.

G. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.

H. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.

I. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design 100 Live and Dead Loads: 120 lbs/sq ft (5.75 kPa) with deflection limited to 1/240 of span.

B. Completed ladder and cage system installations shall meet the following load requirements set forth in OSHA 1910.27. The ladder shall also be capable of supporting a concentrated vertical load of 1,200 pounds applied at the mid-span of the rung. Manufacturer shall be required to provide supporting test data for rung capacity.

C. Design items with sufficient strength for handling stresses.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on specified component products.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate design load parameters, dimensions, adjacent construction, materials, thicknesses, fabrication details, required clearances, field jointing, tolerances, colors, finishes, methods of support, integration of plumbing components, and anchorages.

http://www.fmglobal.com/

http://www.intertek-etlsemko.com/

http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html

812008 FVE027.02



A. Protect components from damage by retaining shipping protection in place until installation.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install site fabricated components when site conditions may be detrimental to successful installation.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions favorable to proper curing of resin during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN: FIBERGRATE COMPOSITE SRTUCTURES INC.; DYNARAIL: WWW.FIBERGRATE.COM.

2.02 OTHER ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Bedford Reinforced Plastics: www.bedfordplastics.com.

B. McNichols CO.: www.mcnichols.com.

2.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to OSHA 1910.27 for safety, loading, and fall protection.

B. Conform to applicable code for a flame/smoke index rating of 0-25/0-450 in accordance with UL (DIR) listed product requirements.

2.04 LADDERS

A. All ladder side rails, rungs, ladder mounting brackets and cage straps are to be FRP structural shapes manufactured by the pultrusion process. Cage hoops and brackets shall be produced by the open molded hand lay-up method. All structural shapes shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents.

B. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering.

C. All pultruded ladder components shall be further protected from ultraviolet (UV) attack with 1) integral UV inhibitors in the resin and 2) a synthetic surfacing veil to help produce a resin rich surface.

D. All FRP products shall have a tested flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E 84 Tunnel Test.

E. The ladder side rail shall be 1-3/4" square tube with a wall thickness of 1/4" or greater. The rungs shall be 1-1/4" diameter pultruded structural shapes, continuously fluted to provide a non-slip surface. Rungs that are gritted as a secondary operation shall not be permitted. Ladder wall and floor mount shall be fabricated from pultruded angles, 3/8" minimum thickness.

812008 FVE027.02


F. The ladder cage vertical bars shall be 1.5" wide by 5/8" pultruded I-beam shapes to offer protection to workers from exposed hardware. Cage hoops and cage brackets shall be manufactured by the open mold hand lay-up process. All cage hoops shall be 3" wide by 1/4" thick minimum.

G. Type 316 stainless steel bolts shall be provided for attaching ladder cage vertical bars to hoops, ladder hoops to brackets, ladder cage brackets to the ladder, and wall brackets to the ladder.

H. All rungs shall be both mechanically attached to the ladder with stainless steel rivets and chemically bonded with epoxy.

I. Pultruded structural shapes used in the ladder system are to have the minimum longitudinal mechanical properties listed below:

Property ASTM Value Units Method 1. Tensile Strength D-638 30,000 (206) psi (MPa)

2. Tensile Modulus D-638 2.5 x 106 (17.2) psi (GPa)

3. Flexural Strength D-790 30,000 (206) psi (MPa)

4. Flexural Modulus D-790 1.8 x 106 (12.4) psi (GPa)

5. Flexural Modulus (Full Section) N/A 2.8 x 106 (19.3) psi (GPa)

6. Short Beam Shear (Transverse) D-2344 4,500 (31) psi (MPa)

7. Shear Modulus (Transverse) N/A 4.5 x 105 (3.1) psi (GPa)

8. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion D-696 8.0x10-6 (1.4x10-6) in/in/°F (cm/cm/°C)

9. Flame Spread E-84 25 or less N/A

J. All fasteners used in the ladder system are to be 316 SS. Rivets will be 18-8 stainless steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fabrications in accordance with shop drawings and fabricator's instructions.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum variation from true position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

B. Maximum offset from true alignment: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

812008 FVE027.02


3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean components of foreign material without damaging finished surface.

B. Clean fabrications in accordance with fabricator's instructions.

END OF SECTION

812008 07 11 00 - 1 DAMPPROOFING FVE027.02

SECTION 07 11 00

DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and installation of all dampproofing as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following: 1. ASTM Standard Specifications:

a. D 1227 - Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Built-up Roofing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Qualifications: 1. For installation of the work of this Section, use only personnel completely trained and

experienced in the installation of dampproofing materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Dampproofing:

1. Complying with ASTM D1227, Type 1.

2. Asbestos free.

3. Provide one of the following two dampproofing grades: a. Trowel-on grade: a. Karnak 920 by Karnak Corporation. b. Sealmastic Asphalt Emulsion Type 3 by W. R. Meadows. b. Brush-on or spray grade: c. Karnak 220 by Karnak Corporation. d. Sealmastic Asphalt Emulsion Type 2 by W. R. Meadows.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION:

A. Apply all dampproofing materials in conformance with: 1. This Section. 2. Manufacturer's recommendation.

B. Application rate:

1. Trowel-on grade: a. 1/16-inch wet film, approximately 4 to 6 gallons per 100 square foot. b. One coat.

2. Brush-on or spray grade: a. 30-35 square feet per gallon per coat. b. Two coats.

812008 07 11 00 - 2 DAMPPROOFING FVE027.02

C. Locations: 1. Apply dampproofing to foundation walls below grade. Adhere rigid insulation to

dampproofing in accordance with Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation. 3.02 CLEANING:

A. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, clean all affected areas in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management.

END OF SECTION

812008 FVE027.02

07 21 00 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION

SECTION 07 21 00

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, and over roof deck.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

A. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

A. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014.

B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS:

A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board.

B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board.

2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board; ASTM C578; with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces, and the following characteristics:

1. Type: ASTM C578.

2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

4. R-value; 1 inch (25 mm) of material at 72 degrees F (22 C): 5, minimum.

5. Board Edges: Square.

6. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.

b. Owens Corning Corporation; .: www.ocbuildingspec.com.

c. Pactiv Building Products; GreenGuard XPS TYPE VI 40 PSI: greenguard.pactiv.com.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 07 25 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation .

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

812008 FVE027.02

07 21 00 - 2 THERMAL INSULATION

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER

A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.

B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS

A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.

B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION

812008 FVE027.02

07 25 00 - 1 WEATHER BARRIERS

SECTION 07 25 00

WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Vapor Retarders: Materials to make joints between exterior walls and roof water vapor-resistant and air tight.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Vapor retarder under concrete slabs on grade.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.

1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm.


A. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications; 2010.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER-RESISTIVE)

A. Vapor Retarder Sheet : ASTM D4397 polyethylene film reinforced with glass fiber square mesh, clear.

1. Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm).

2. Water Vapor Permeance: As required by referenced standard for thickness specified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.

812008 FVE027.02

07 25 00 - 2 WEATHER BARRIERS

C. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer if temperature is out of this range.


A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.

B. Take digital photographs of each portion of the installation prior to covering up.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

812008 FVE027.02

07 62 00 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

SECTION 07 62 00

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and downspouts.

B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.

C. Reglets and accessories.


A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers for sheet metal work.

B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Field fabricated roof curbs.

C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing non-lap joints between sheet metal fabrications and adjacent construction.


A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.

B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.

C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.

D. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.

E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.

F. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e1.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA 1793 and CDA A4050 requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.


A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

812008 FVE027.02


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick; plain finish shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.

1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603; baked enamel finish system.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) thick; smooth No. 4 finish.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.

D. Sealant to be Concealed in Completed Work: Non-curing butyl sealant.

E. Sealant to be Exposed in Completed Work: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, 100 percent silicone with minimum movement capability of plus/minus 25 percent and recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; clear.

F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.

G. Reglets: Recessed type, rigid extruded PVC; face and ends covered with plastic tape.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners.

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing nailer. Return and brake edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm).

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

812008 FVE027.02


B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.

C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

E. Seal metal joints watertight.

END OF SECTION

812008 07 92 00-1 JOINT SEALANTS FVE027.02

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work included in this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for complete installation of joint fillers, backing, and sealants including preparation of substrate surfaces.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System performance to achieve moisture and airtight joint seals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification requirements for materials and installation.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and materials

installation instructions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color availability, and where each type will be installed.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Furnish written warranty that sealant will remain in serviceable, watertight, elastic, adhesive condition for two (2) years from date of final acceptance and will not stain or otherwise injure adjacent materials within this period at no expense to the Owner. Repair any defects appearing due to material or workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Colors: Manufacturer's standard high-performance color, as selected by Architect/Engineer. B. Compatibility: Provide materials, including primers where required, selected for compatibility with

each other and with substrates in each joint system; confirm requirements with manufacturer.

C. General Characteristics: Provide type, grade, class, hardness and similar characteristics of material as indicated or, where not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations relative to exposure, traffic, weather conditions, and other factors of the joint system for best possible overall performance. Except as otherwise indicated, joint sealers are required to


permanently maintain airtight and waterproof seals, without failures in joint movement accommodation, cohesion, adhesion (where applicable), migration, staining, and other performance as specified.

D. Provide fire-rated caulking at control joints located in fire-rated walls.

2.02 SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Single component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging, color as selected.

Elongation Capability: 2 to 5 percent

Service Temperature Range: 2 to 160 degrees F. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 40

B. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging, capable of continuous water immersion, color as selected.

Elongation Capability: 7.5 to 12 percent

Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to 50

C. Polysulphide Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type; color as selected.

Elongation Capability: 20 percent Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35

D. Polysulphide Sealant: Two component homogeneous mix, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type; color as selected.

Elongation Capability 25 percent Service Temperature Range -40 to 180 degrees F. Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35

E. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type; color as selected.


F. Polyurethane Sealant: Multi-component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, self-leveling type; color as selected.


G. Silicone Rubber Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-

bleeding; color as selected. Elongation Capability 25 percent Service Temperature Range -65 to 180 degrees F. Shore A Hardness Range 15 to 35


H. Silicone Sealant: Single component, fungus resistant chemical curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected.


I. Epoxy Resin Sealant: ASTM C-881, Type III, Grade 3, Class B & C, single component, non-sagging. Color as selected, "Sikadur 23, Lo-Mod-Gel", as manufactured by SIKA Corporation or equal.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent

larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work, and that joint measurements and surface conditions are as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which may impair adhesion of sealant.

C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and C790 for latex base

sealants.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Clean and prime seal joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release or C790 for latex base

sealants and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.

D. Install joint backing to achieve a neck thickness dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.

E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

G. Tool joints concave or as detailed. Control joints shall be tooled to match the masonry joints

adjacent; special attention at raked joints required.


3.03 SCHEDULE LOCATION TYPE

A. Perimeter caulking Two-part polyurethane or Interior & exterior frames One-part urethane

B. Perimeter caulking Two-part polyurethane or Exterior panels One-part silicone

C. Coping joints & coping Two-part polyurethane or to facade joints One-part urethane/silicone

D. Exterior control & expansion joints Two-part polyurethane

E. Interior control and expansion joints Two-part polyurethane or One-part urethane/silicone

F. Perimeter caulking of sanitary fixtures One-part urethane or acrylic latex

G. Exposed interior control joints One-part polysulfide/polyurethane or One-part urethane/silicone

H. Interior & exterior electrical Two-part polyurethane or

and mechanical fixtures One-part urethane/silicone

I. Flashing Two-part polyurethane or One-part urethane or

One-part silicone rubber

J. Glazing & bedding One-part silicone rubber K. Lap joints One-part urethane/silicone L. Heating, ventilating & air conditioning ducts One-part silicone rubber

END OF SECTION

812008 08 17 43 - 1 FRP DOORS AND FRAMES

FVE027.02

SECTION 08 17 43

FRP DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) commercial flush doors with FRP frames. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D 256 – Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.

B. ASTM D 638 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.

C. ASTM D 570 – Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.

D. ASTM D 790 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

E. ASTM D 1761-06 – Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood.

F. ASTM D 2583 – Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of

a Barcol Impressor.

G. ASTM D 3029 – Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Flat Rigid Plastic Specimens by Means of a Falling Weight.

H. ASTM E 84-11 – Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

I. ASTM E 283-04 – Test Method for Determining Rate of Airflow Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

J. ASTM E 330-02 – Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,

Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

K. ASTM E 331-00 – Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with

specified Performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems.

B. Air Infiltration: For a single door 3'-0" x 7'-0", test specimen shall be tested in accordance with

ASTM E 283 at pressure differential of 6.24 psf. Door shall not exceed 0.45 cfm/ft2.


FVE027.02

C. Water Penetration: For a single door 3'-0" x 7'-0", test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. Door shall not have water leakage.

D. Uniform Load Structural: For a single door 3'-0" x 7'-0", test specimen shall be tested in

accordance with ASTM E 330: Plus or minus 80 psf. E. Screw Pullout, ASTM D 1761-06, Minimum 924 pounds.

F. Surface Burning Characteristics, FRP Doors and Panels, ASTM E 84:

1. Flame Spread: Maximum of 200, Class C. 2. Smoke Developed: Maximum of 450, Class C.

G. Surface Burning Characteristics, Class A Option on Interior Faces of FRP Exterior Panels and

Both Faces of FRP Interior Panels, ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Maximum of 25. 2. Smoke Developed: Maximum of 450.

H. FRP Face Sheet Properties:

Izod Impact Strength, ASTM D 256, Minimum 7 ft-lb/in notched. 1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638, Minimum 18 x 103 psi. 2. Tensile Modulus, ASTM D 638, Minimum 18 x 106 psi.

3. Water Absorption, ASTM D 570, Maximum 0.16% / 24 hours @ 77°F. 4. Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790, Minimum 27 x 103 psi. 5. Flexural Modulus, ASTM D 790, Minimum .7 x 106 psi. 6. Barcol Hardness, ASTM D 2583, Minimum 40. 7. Gardner Impact Strength, ASTM D 3029, Minimum 30 in-lb.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials,

components, fabrication, finishes, and installation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and

details, indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, fabrication, doors, panels, framing, and finish.

D. Samples:

1. Door: Submit manufacturer's sample of door showing face sheets, core, framing, and finish.

2. Color: Submit manufacturer's samples of all available colors of doors and frames.

E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating doors comply with specified performance requirements.

F. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including

project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured. G. Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions for doors,

including maintenance and operating instructions for hardware. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and


FVE027.02

packaging, with labels clearly identifying opening door mark and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Warrant doors, frames, and factory hardware against failure in materials and workmanship, including excessive deflection, faulty operation, defects in hardware installation, and deterioration of finish or construction in excess of normal weathering.

B. Warranty Period: Ten years starting on date of shipment. In addition, a limited lifetime (while

the door is in its specified application in its original installation) warranty covering: failure due to corrosion

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Special-Lite, Inc.; www.Special-lite.com.

B. Chem-Pruf Door Company, Ltd.; www.chem-pruf.com.

C. Corrim Company; www.corrim.com. 2.02 FRP FLUSH DOORS

A. Basis of Design: Special-Lite, Inc.; AF-200 Series Flush Doors.

B. Door Opening Size: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Construction:

1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Construction: Doors shall be fabricated using insulated pultruded stiles and rails with

.120" FRP face sheets. Stiles and rails to be secured at corners with pultruded corner clip.

3. Reinforcement: Solid high-density urethane shapes to be chemically welded at factory. 5. Top Rail: Pultruded FRP insulated stile material. 6. Bottom Rail: Pultruded FRP insulated stile material.

D. Face Sheet:

1. Material: Exterior grade UV resistant FRP, 0.120-inch thickness. 2. Texture: Pebbled

3. Color: To be selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's entire range of available colors.

E. Core:

1. Material: Urethane foam. 2. Density: Minimum of 2.0 pcf.

F. Cutouts:

1. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers, and panels. 2. Factory install vision lites, louvers, and panels.

G. Hardware:


FVE027.02

1. Pre-machine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Components: Door and frame components from same manufacturer.

B. Fasteners: 1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal. 2. Compatibility: Compatible with items to be fastened.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, and profile requirements shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded

measurements on shop drawings.

C. Assembly: 1. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and chemically welding of FRP before

assembly.

D. Fit: 1. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. 2. Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting

members. 2.05 FRP FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing: 1. Size and Type: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Materials: 3/16" thick solid pultruded FRP profiles having no corrosive components or

reinforcement. 3. Width: 2" face. 4. Depth: 5 ¾" 5. Assembly: One piece chemically welded at factory. 6. Door Stop: 5/8" x 2 ¼". 7. Corner Construction: Mitered with 4" x 4" x 3/8" pultruded FRP angle reinforcement with

interlocking pultruded FRP brackets. 8. Reinforcing: ¼" pultruded FRP chemically welded at all hinge, strike and closer

locations. 9. Anchors: Furnished with type as specified on drawings. 10. Fasteners for reinforcing: 18-8 Stainless Steel.

2.07 HARDWARE

A. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule. Reinforce for specific hardware locations.

B. Hardware Schedule: As specified in Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

2.08 FINISH

A. Finish for Doors and Frames:

1. Painted Finish: Two-part aliphatic polyurethane, low VOC, Industrial Coating. 2. Thickness: 5 mils


FVE027.02

3. Sheen: Gloss 4. Impact Resistance per ASTM D 2794: 140 in lbs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. 2. Anchor frames securely in place. 3. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and backseal.

B. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position. C. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as

approved by Architect. D. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as

determined by Architect. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding. 3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

812008 FVE027.02

08 31 00 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

SECTION 08 31 00

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Floor access door and frame units, interior.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Openings in concrete.


A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014.

C. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2012.

D. ASTM B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold-Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric); 2012.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of each access door and/or panel unit.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FLOOR ACCESS UNITS

A. Manufacturers: 1. ACUDOR Products Inc; Type FA-H20: www.acudor.com/#sle. 2. Babcock-Davis; Type BFDNP: www.babcockdavis.com/sle. 3. Bilco Company; Type K/KD, aluminum angle frame: www.bilco.com. 4. Halliday Products; Type S1R, aluminum angle frame: hallidayproducts.com.

B. Floor Access Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with type of installation assembly being used for each unit. 1. Size: As indicated on the drawings.





812008 FVE027.02

08 31 00 - 2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

2. Hardware: Stainless steel, Type 316. a. Hinges: Removable pin.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.

B. Begin installation only after substrates have been properly prepared, and if the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to proceeding with this work.

B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for applicable substrates in accordance with project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place.

C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary.

END OF SECTION

812008 FVE027.02

08 36 13 - 1 SECTIONAL DOORS

SECTION 08 36 13

SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated.

B. Operating hardware and supports.

C. Electrical controls.


A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Lock cylinders.

B. Section 13 34 19 - Metal Building Systems: Opening and track frame.

C. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control station.

D. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit: Empty conduit from control units to door operator.


A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

B. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.

C. DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; 2011.

D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2016.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

F. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details.

C. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware.

D. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting.


http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E330/E330M

http://www.dasma.com/

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NEMA%20MG%201

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2070

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20325

812008 FVE027.02


E. Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare part sources.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years documented experience.

C. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for electric motor and transmission.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sectional Doors - Basis of Design: Overhead Door Corporation; Model 591; www.overheaddoor.com.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. C.H.I. Overhead Doors: www.chiohd.com/sle.

2. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com.

3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 STEEL DOOR COMPONENTS

A. Steel Doors: Flush steel, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application.

1. Performance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads equal to 1.5 times design wind loads specified by local code without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using 10 second duration of maximum load.

2. Door Nominal Thickness: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) thick.

3. Exterior Finish: Factory finished with acrylic baked enamel; color as selected by Architect.

4. Interior Finish: Factory finished with acrylic baked enamel; color as selected from manufacturers standard line.

5. Operation: Electric.

B. Door Panels: Steel construction; outer steel sheet of 28 gage, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) minimum thickness, flush profile; inner steel sheet of 27 gage, 0.0164 inch (0.42 mm) minimum thickness,

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E330/E330M

812008 FVE027.02


flat profile; core reinforcement sheet steel roll formed to channel shape, rabbeted weather joints at meeting rails; polyurethane insulation.

2.03 DOOR COMPONENTS

A. Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) minimum thickness; 2 inch (50 mm) wide, continuous one piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.

B. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side.

C. Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided galvanized steel lifting cables.

D. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient hollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact.

E. Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels.

F. Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length.

G. Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length.

H. Lock: Inside center mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to retain in locked or retracted position; interior handle.

I. Lock Cylinders: See Section 08 71 00.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G60/Z180 coating, plain surface.

B. Insulation: Foamed-in-place polyurethane, bonded to facing.

2.05 ELECTRICAL OPERATION

A. Operator, Controls, Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Electrical Characteristics:

1. 1/2 hp; manually operable in case of power failure, transit speed of 12 inches (300 mm) per second.

2. 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.

3. Refer to Division 26 for electrical connections.

C. Motor: NEMA MG 1, Type 1.

D. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

E. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.

F. Electric Operator: Side mounted on cross head shaft, adjustable safety friction clutch; brake system actuated by independent voltage solenoid controlled by motor starter; enclosed gear



http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2070

812008 FVE027.02


driven limit switch; enclosed magnetic cross line reversing starter; mounting brackets and hardware.

G. Safety Edge: At bottom of door panel, full width; electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop door upon striking object; hollow neoprene covered to provide weatherstrip seal.

H. Control Station: Standard three button (open-close-stop) momentary type control for each electric operator.

1. 24 volt circuit.

2. Surface mounted.

3. Locate at inside door jamb.

I. Radio Control Antenna Detector:

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits.

B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal.

B. Apply primer to wood frame.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only.

D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware.

E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit components.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from 10 ft (3 m) straight edge.

D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

3.05 ADJUSTING

812008 FVE027.02


A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean doors and frames.

B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

812008 08 71 00 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE FVE027.02

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Refer to "General and Special Conditions", and "Instructions to Bidders", Division 01 of Specifications. Requirements of these Sections and the project drawings shall govern work in this section.

1.02 Work Included:

A. Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items specifically excluded from this section of the specification.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 17 43 – FRP Doors and Frames.

1.03 Quality Assurance

A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and

regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications.

2. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act.

B. Hardware Supplier: 1. Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders' hardware. He must have adequate

inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 100 miles of the project. Only domestic manufacturers are acceptable and the distributor must be a factory-authorized dealer for all materials required.

C. Manufacturer: 1. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single

manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

2. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1.04 Submittals:

A. Hardware Schedule 1. Submit proper number of Hardware Schedules to allow the Architect to retain two copies

for his use, plus the number of copies required by the Contractor for his distribution and use. In any event, do not submit more than six copies.

2. Include the following: a. Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being

furnished as follows:

CATEGORY SPECIFIED SCHEDULED

Hinges Manufacturer A Manufacturer B

Lock sets Manufacturer X Manufacturer X

Kick Plates Manufacturer Z Manufacturer Z

3. Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations.


4. Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of swing, size, door material, frame material, and UL listing.

5. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish. 6. Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers. 7. Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets. 8. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special

conditions and specialty hardware. 9. Riser drawings, wiring drawings and system operation description. 10. "Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved." 11. Typed Copy. 12. Double-Spacing. 13. 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets 14. U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols. 15. Generally, follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI)

Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule. Modified as above.

B. Product Data: 1. Submit, in booklet form using supplier's schedule covers as binders. Product data of items

of hardware listed in supplier's schedule. 2. Submit product data concurrently with hardware schedule.

C. Inspection Report: 1. Submit inspection report specified in 3.1.C.2. for locksets, exit devices, door closers and

all electrical hardware.

D. Key Schedule: 1. Submit detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final keying instructions have

been followed. 2. Submit as an integral part of finish hardware schedule or as a separate keying schedule.

E. Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, two copies each of parts and service manuals and two each of any special installation or adjustment tools. Include for locksets, exit devices, door closers and any electrical products.

1.05 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number, and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor.

1.06 Warranties

A. Mortise locksets (grade 1) shall carry manufacturer's 10-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

B. Closers shall carry manufacturer's 25-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

C. Balance of items shall carry a manufacturer's 1-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

D. During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to the work. Inspect the work within 24 hours after receipt of notice from the Owner. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the Contract Documents.


PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.01 Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not.

2.02 Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is listed, "no substitution" is implied.

A. Continuous Hinges: 1. Unless specified otherwise in sets, furnish hinges of class and size as follows: 2. Select SL11 CL HD 3. Numbers used are Select LTD. Equal products of Ives, Stanley and McKinney are

acceptable.

B. Locksets and Latchsets – Mortise locks 1. Lockset: DORMA M9000 Series, Heavy Duty. 2. Standards: 3. ANSI Conformance - ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1. 4. U.L. and C.U.L. listed for use on 3-hour fire-rated doors and for all positive pressure

applications. 5. U.L. and C.U.L. listed for UL 10B/10C. 6. Lever trim meets ANSI A117.1 and ADA requirements. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Schlage 9000 Series, Sargent 8200. 8. Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch

bolt. Provide strike lips that do not project more than 1/8" beyond door frame trim at single doors and have 7/8" lip to center at pairs of 1-3/4" doors. Provide wrought box strikes on all locks and latches.

C. Closers: 1. Closers used in conjunction with overhead stops and holders shall be templated and

coordinated to function properly. Properly detail closers to meet application requirements by providing drop plates, brackets, etc. to meet application and installation requirements as indicated.

2. Dorma 8900 Series: ANSI A156.4, Grade 1, heavy duty surface door closer. 3. Model 8916 for interior and exterior applications features adjustable spring sizes from 1 to

6 and meets ANSI A117.1 and ADA for barrier-free accessibility. 4. Compliant with UL10C for positive pressure. 5. Certified to 10 million cycles by a recognized, independent test lab. 6. Featuring full range spring power adjustment and backcheck, with a narrow projection full

cover and flat-form style arm. 7. Door control also features a backcheck positioning adjustment for parallel arm applications,

to maintain an ANSI backcheck range similar to regular and top jamb applications. 8. Independent sweep and latch non-critical closing speed adjustment. 9. Warranty: 25 years 10. Finish: As specified in the Door Hardware Schedule. 11. Acceptable Manufacturers: LCN 4041XP or Sargent 350 series.

D. Kickplates: Furnish Stainless Steel Kickplates .050 thick. Use 304 Stainless Steel. Listed Rockwood. Equivalent by Trimco or Ives.

E. Bumpers: 1. Rockwood. 2. BHMA L02101. Wrought, forged, or cast, approximately 2-1/2 inch diameter, convex

rubber center, concealed fasteners.


F. Thresholds: Solid Plastic Type. 1. 1/2" high - 5" wide. See HW Sets for Product Number. Cope at jambs. Heavy Duty. 2. Furnish full wall opening width when frames are recessed. 3. Cope in front of mullions if thresholds project beyond door faces. 4. Furnish with non-ferrous Stainless Steel Screws and Lead Anchors. 5. Manufacturer to be Everlast Thresholds. Contact Randy VanAvery 269-665-4357. No

substitutions unless approved by Architect.

G. Door Sweeps: Shall be as scheduled in Hardware Sets x door manufacturer.

H. Weather-stripping: Shall be as scheduled in Hardware Sets x door manufacturer.

I. Miscellaneous: 1. Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer's

names in Hardware Sets.

J. Fasteners: 1. Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and

expansion shields for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Furnish machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum doors and frames. Furnish full thread wood screws for attachment to solid wood doors and frames. "TEK" type screws are not acceptable.

2.03 Finishes:

A. Generally, US32D / BHMA 630 / and 26D as indicated on HW sets. 1. Hinges, Stainless Steel BHMA 689, 630 or 626 where shown in HW sets. 2. Continuous Hinges: 689. 3. Locksets: Stainless Steel BHMA 689, 630 or 626 as shown in HW sets. 4. Closers: Aluminum BHMA 689. 5. Push pulls: 316 Stainless. 6. Templates and Hardware Location:

B. Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and frame manufacturers.

C. Refer to Article 3.1 B.2, Locations, and coordinate with templates.

2.04 Cylinders Key Control and Keying:

A. Supplier shall meet with Architect and Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing.

B. Supplier shall include the cost of this service in his proposal.

C. The intent of this key and cylinder specification is to provide key control in order to assure complete security throughout the construction and occupancy phases of this project. The project owner is assured that the cylinders and keys used during construction are replaced before project completion and the permanent cylinders and keys are a security type.

D. Key Material: Provide manufacturer's standard embossed keys of nickel silver to ensure durability. Key Quantity: Furnish keys in the following quantities:


10 each Temporary construction keys

6 each Master keys per master group

4 each Change keys per cylinder or keyed alike group

2 each Key blanks per cylinder

E. Available manufacturers: Consult with Owner and Architect to coordinate with existing keyway.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. General: 1. Install hardware according to manufacturer's installations and to manufacturer's template

dimensions. Attach all items of finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacturer of the item.

2. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum doors and frames: Drilled and tapped machine screws.

3. Solid wood doors and frames: Full thread wood screws. Drill pilot holes before inserting screws.

4. Refer to Article 2.3, cylinders and keying regarding conversion of construction cores to final cores.

B. Locations: 1. Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items. 2. Include this list in Hardware Schedule.

CATEGORY DIMENSION

Hinges Door Manufacturer's Standard Flush Bolt Levers 72" and 12" Levers Door Manufacturer's Standard Exit Device Touchbar Per Template Deadlatch Cylinder 43" Astragals

C. Final Adjustment: 1. Provide the services of a representative to inspect material furnished and its installation

and adjustment, to make final hardware adjustment, and to instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment, care and maintenance of hardware.

2. Locksets, closers and exit devices shall be inspected by the factory representative and adjusted after installation and after the HVAC system is in operation, to insure correct installation and proper adjustment in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall prepare a written report stating compliance, and also recording locations and kinds of noncompliance. The original report shall be forwarded to the Architect with copies to the Contractor, hardware distributor, hardware installer and building Owner.

END OF SECTION

812008 09 96 00 - 1 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS FV027.02

SECTION 09 96 00

HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and application of

paint, stain and labeling products as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

B. Work includes: 1. Surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following

interior, concealed, and exterior surfaces for all items furnished or installed under this Work, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or herein specified. a. Machinery and equipment. b. Ferrous metals, structural steel. c. Interior, below grade cast-in-place concrete (sealer). d. Concrete floors (Sealer). e. Immersed cast-in-place and precast concrete (including trenches and sump). f. Exposed lintels, plain or galvanized. g. Exposed pipe and fittings including wall and floor sleeves. h. Exposed pipe insulation. i. Exposed conduit and appurtenances (except conduit mounted on unpainted

surfaces). j. Floors, walls and ceilings as indicated in the drawings on the room finish schedule,

otherwise: 1) Bottom side of exposed interior precast concrete plank.

k. Steel doors and frame. l. All other surfaces not specifically excluded in the following paragraph.

2. Surfaces not to be painted or finished include the following: a. Manufacturer's name and identification plates. b. Concealed ducts, pipes and conduits. c. Galvanized steel. d. Galvanized, aluminum or fiberglass grating. e. Prefinished electrical and control panels with factory applied final finish. f. Aluminum (unless indicated in the surface to be painted). g. Door and window hardware. h. Stainless steel (unless indicated in the surfaces to be painted). i. Prefinished wall, ceiling and floor coverings. j. Items with factory applied final finish, such as cabinets, anodized door and window

frames, and the like, but excluding machinery and equipment. k. Items indicated on the Drawings as not to be painted.

C. Related Sections: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to:


b. Section 44 40 01 – Process Equipment Identification.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following: 1. ASTM Standard Practice:


a. A780 - Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 2. ASTM Standard Test Method:

a. D4263 - Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 3. ASME:

a. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 4. International Concrete Repair Institute Technical Guidelines:

a. 310.2 - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays.

5. National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc.: a. NAPF 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings. 6. Society for Protective Coatings - Surface Preparation Standards and Specifications:

a. SSPC-SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. b. SSPC-SP5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. c. SSPC-SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. d. SSPC-SP7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. e. SSPC-SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. f. SSPC-SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. g. SSPC-SP12 - Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to

Recoating. h. SSPC-SP13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete. i. SSPC-SP14 - Industrial Blast Cleaning. j. SSPC-SP15 - Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning. k. SSPC-SP16 - Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Non-Ferrous Metals. l. SSPC-VIS1 - Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry

Abrasive Blast Cleaning. m. SSPC-VIS3 - Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by

Hand and Power Tool Cleaning. 7. Society for Protective Coatings - Paint and Coating Standards and Specifications:

a. SSPC-PA1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel. b. SSPC-PA2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. c. SSPC-PA3 - A Guide to Safety in Paint Application.

8. Society for Protective Coatings - Qualification Procedures and Quality Systems: a. SSPC-QP1 - Standard Procedure for Evaluating Painting Contractors (Field

Application to Complex Industrial Structures).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations: 1. DFT: Dry film thickness. 2. ICRI: International Concrete Repair Institute. 3. Mil: Thousandth of an inch. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 5. FRP: Fiberglass reinforced plastic. 6. sf: Square feet. 7. DIP: Ductile iron pipe. 8. SFCMU: Split Face Concrete Masonry Unit. 9. GFCMU: Ground Face Concrete Masonry Unit, a.k.a. burnished.

B. Terms: 1. Exposure: Environmental conditions to which different surfaces may be exposed are as

follows: a. Interior: All surfaces within the confines of a building or other enclosure not

constantly exposed to weather, trapped moisture, high heat or other deteriorating conditions, and exposed to view.

b. Concealed: All surfaces within the confines of a building or other enclosure not constantly exposed to weather, trapped moisture, high heat or other deteriorating conditions, and normally concealed from view.


c. Immersed: Immersed surfaces include all surfaces below a water surface or exposed to spray. Surfaces exposed to spray include all areas to 8 inches above maximum water surface in quiescent tanks and to 18 inches above maximum water surface in mixed or agitated tanks. Also included as immersed surfaces are all floors, walls and the bottom side of the roof of an enclosed tank.

d. Exterior: 1) Above grade: All surfaces above finished grade and not included in a., b. or

c. above. 2) Below grade: All surfaces below finished grade and not included in a., b. or c.

above.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's literature: 1. Submit specification data sheets and color charts for all materials proposed for use on the

Work.

C. Manufacturer's certificates: 1. Submit signed affidavit from coatings Manufacturer that submitted coatings are of same or

better quality than those specified.

D. Applicator's experience. 1. Applicator shall have experience with the coating systems specified. 2. Experience shall be substantiated by previous project experience, certifications, seminar

attendance, Manufacturer validation or similar means.

E. Product and maintenance schedules: 1. At or before the Completion of the Work, submit complete lists, in a room finish schedule,

of the products used. Include item covered, coating Manufacturer's name, type of coating and color.

2. Provide pipe coding schedules listing pipe name, coating Manufacturer's name, type of coating and color.

3. Provide maintenance manuals detailing the proper procedures and materials to be used for maintenance and repainting of the various coatings.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Applicator shall be experienced in performing high-performance coating work, shall have completed not less than 10 years with coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project, and have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Applicator shall be certified by SSPC-QP 1 for surface preparation and field coating

application and SSPC-QP 3 for shop painting, as applicable. 2. Applicator's Personnel: Persons trained for application of specified coatings.

B. General: 1. Acceptability of materials and performance shall be determined by ENGINEER. 2. Testing or certifications may be required to aid ENGINEER determination. 3. Expense of testing and certifications when required and, unless noted otherwise in the

Contract Documents, shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. 4. If destructive testing is required, CONTRACTOR shall repair damaged area. Expense of

repair shall be borne by CONTRACTOR, 5. Request, in writing, a review of each coat by ENGINEER of first finished surface of each

type for color, texture and workmanship. First accepted surface of each type and color shall be visibly labeled by ENGINEER with removable label as Project standard for that type and


color of item. Labels shall remain in place until job is finished. For spray application, paint a surface of 100 square feet as Project standard.

6. Work may be inspected for proper surface preparation, pretreatment, priming, dry film thickness, curing, color and workmanship. Inspection equipment includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: a. Inspector's wet film and dry film thickness gages. b. Zorelco 369/PHD pin hole detector. c. Mark II Tooke Gage. d. Keane-Tator Surface Profile Comparator. e. Testex Press-O-Film and Micrometer. f. Delmhorst Moisture Detector Model BD-7.

C. Labeling: 1. Include the following on a label on each container:

a. Manufacturer's name. b. Type of coating. c. Manufacturer's stock number. d. Manufacturer's batch identification. e. Color. f. Instructions for mixing and reducing, where applicable. g. Percent total solids by volume. h. Identification of toxic substances and special instructions.

D. It shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure the compatibility of painting materials proposed for this Contract. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate this work with other trades to ensure compliance with these Specifications.

E. Prior to ordering any of the materials of this Section, CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, painting Subcontractor, and paint Manufacturer's representative shall attend a progress meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19 – Project Meetings, and review the work to be performed under this Section.

F. Manufacturer's conditions report: Manufacturer's representative shall review environmental site conditions for surface preparation and coating application. Manufacturer's representative shall inform paint Subcontractor, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER of measures to be taken to ensure high quality coating performance.


A. Delivery: 1. Deliver materials in original sealed containers of the Manufacturer with labels legible and

intact.

B. Storage: 1. Store only acceptable Project materials on Project Site. 2. Store material in a suitable location and in such a manner as to comply with all safety

requirements including any applicable federal, state, and local rules and requirements. Storage shall also be in accordance with instructions of the paint Manufacturer and requirements of insurance underwriters.

3. Restrict storage area to paint materials and related equipment.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental requirements: 1. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations regarding environmental conditions under

which coatings may be applied.


2. Environmental conditions which affect coating application include, but are not necessarily limited to: ambient air temperature, surface temperature, humidity, dew point and environmental cleanliness.

3. Do not expose epoxies during application and cure to sunlight and heaters that emit carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide.

4. CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate acceptability of environmental conditions as required by ENGINEER.

B. Existing painted surfaces: 1. When painting is specified over existing painted surfaces and existing coating types are

not known, Samples of existing coatings shall be analyzed by a laboratory approved by ENGINEER to determine generic type of coating present. A written report from the lab shall be submitted to ENGINEER before any coating is applied. Required modifications to painting schedule shall not be justification for extra payment.

2. Alternate method for steel, concrete or masonry: Remove existing coating by abrasive blasting obtaining surface cleanliness and profile required for coating specified. Paint as new surface.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra materials: 1. Leave with OWNER at least one unopened gallon of each type and color of paint used for

finish coats and one unopened gallon of each type of thinner required. Containers shall be tightly sealed and clearly labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the product of a

single Manufacturer. 2. Except as otherwise specified, materials shall be the product of the following

Manufacturers: a. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings. b. Tnemec Company, Inc.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Reference Manufacturer: 1. Products specified are as manufactured by Tnemec Company, Inc., unless otherwise

indicated; similar products of acceptable manufacturers listed in Article 2.01 may be furnished in lieu of those listed.

B. Material types: 1. Paint, primer and related materials are included by Manufacturer's product numbers in the

Schedules in this Section.

C. Colors: 1. Colors of all finish coats shall be as selected by ENGINEER.

2.03 MIXES

A. Mixing: 1. Paints shall be delivered to the Site ready-mixed, when this is possible. 2. Two-component paints may be mixed at the Site.


3. Mixing shall proceed until paint becomes smooth, homogeneous, and free of surface swirls or pigment lumps.

4. When mixing multi-component paints, remix each component individually, then blend the components, as recommended by the Manufacturer, until the mixture is completely uniform in color.

B. Thinning: 1. Thin first coat of paint applied to immersed concrete tank walls in accordance with

Manufacturer's recommendations. 2. No other thinning will be permitted unless absolutely necessary. 3. Paint shall be spray-applied in as-received condition to demonstrate necessity for thinning. 4. Use only thinners as recommended by paint Manufacturer for specific use. 5. Amount of thinner used shall be reported to ENGINEER. 6. Measure viscosity to ensure proper thinning ratios have been used.

C. Tinting: 1. On-site tinting permitted only when acceptable to ENGINEER. Written approval required. 2. Use only tinting colors recommended by the Manufacturer for the specific type of coating.

2.04 PIPE MARKING

A. Identification labels: 1. Labels and arrows shall be preprinted and manufactured by a company which normally

manufactures pipe identification systems. 2. Materials:

a. Smooth-wall pipes: Self-adhesive vinyl markers. b. Ductile iron pipe and smooth-wall pipes: Acrylic/Vinyl pre-formed plastic.

3. Arrow(s) to indicate flow direction. 4. Colors: ANSI Z53.1 - Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. 5. Identification label color scheme:

Pipe Contents Color Scheme

Fire-quenching fluids White text on red

Toxic and corrosive fluids Black text on orange

Flammable fluids Black text on yellow

Combustible fluids White text on brown

Potable, cooling, boiler feed, and other water White text on green

Compressed air White text on blue

User-defined White text on purple

User-defined Black text on white

User-defined White text on grey

User-defined White text on black

6. Pipe marking labels shall be sized as follows:

Pipe or Insulation OD Lettering Height

Minimum Marker Length

1-1/4" or smaller 1/2" 8"

1-1/2" to 2" 3/4" 8"

2-1/2" to 6" 1-1/4" 12"

8" to 10" 2-1/2" 24"

Larger than 10" 3-1/2" 32"

7. Manufacturers:

a. Brady Worldwide, Inc. b. EMED Co., Inc. c. Seton Identification Products. d. Or equal.


B. Color bands: 1. Thickness: 5-mil. 2. Adhesive backed vinyl tape. 3. Resistant to water, oil, fungus and chemicals. 4. Bands shall be the following widths:

a. Pipe up to and including two-inch diameter: 3/4 inch wide. b. Pipe 2-1/2-inch to 6-inch diameter: 1 inches wide. c. Pipe 8-inch to 12-inch diameter: 2 inches wide. d. Pipe 14-inch diameter and over: 4 inches wide.

5. Manufacturers: a. 3M Company, Vinyl Tape 471. b. Seton Identification Products, Pipe Banding Tape. c. Or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspection: 1. Prior to the commencement of surface preparation or other coating activities, thoroughly

inspect the surfaces to determine if the Work is ready to be prepared and painted. 2. Report in writing to ENGINEER, all conditions that may potentially affect proper application. 3. Do not commence surface preparation or other coating activities until such defects have

been corrected.

B. Correction of defects: 1. Correct defects and deficiencies in surfaces which may adversely affect work of this

Section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with this article, the paint Manufacturer's

recommendations and as specified in the painting schedule of this Section. 2. Cleanliness of abrasive blast-cleaned steel shall be determined by ENGINEER using

SSPC-VIS-1, Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. Small steel panels which have been abrasive blast-cleaned and approved for a specific cleanliness may be used for comparative purposes to facilitate inspection and approval. These panels shall be securely wrapped in clear plastic and sealed to protect them from deterioration and marked with appropriate cleanliness specification, i.e., SSPC-SP6.

3. Compressed air used for blasting shall be periodically checked to verify that it is clean, dry and oil-free by directing its flow toward a sheet of clean white paper. Oil and water separators shall be placed in the air line as close as possible to blast-cleaning equipment. Contaminated air shall not be used for blast cleaning.

4. Measure surface profile of abrasive blast-cleaned steel using a Keane-Tator Surface Profile Comparator or Testex Press-0-Film and Micrometer.

5. Abrasive media shall be selected to provide the type of profile required by the Manufacturer of the coating product. Abrasive media shall contain less than 1% free silica sand.

6. All motors, bearings, chain drives and other moving parts shall be protected by wrapping with plastic and sealing with tape. Protective covers shall be maintained in dust tight condition.

7. Steel and fabrication defects revealed by surface preparation, such as weld imperfections, delaminations, scabs and slivers shall be corrected by appropriate trade before proceeding further with surface preparation.


8. Dust and blast products shall be removed from the abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces by high pressure air or vacuum cleaning. Completely clean up all residues from blasting operations within the entire space to be painted prior to applying any coatings.

9. Surfaces shall be inspected after all surface preparation is complete and prior to application of any coatings.

B. Concrete: 1. New concrete shall cure for at least 28 days before coating. 2. Test concrete for moisture content as specified in Article 3.02 B.2. 3. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate prior to the commencement

of any coating or blasting activities. 4. Prepare concrete surface to open up voids and cracks in accordance with the specification

required for coating to be applied. 5. Patch voids and cracks that will cause discontinuities in coating using a patching compound

compatible with the coating system. 6. Scrub concrete with stiff brush to remove loosely adhered patching compound. 7. Concrete shall be clean and dry before coating.

C. Ferrous metals: 1. Non-immersed ferrous metals:

a. Surface preparation - shop: 1) Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-

SP1 Solvent Cleaning. 2) Abrasive blast clean surfaces to specification required for coating to be

applied. 3) Abrasive blast cleaning shall be done only when the relative humidity is no

higher than 75% and the surface temperature of the steel is at least 5 degrees F above the dew point.

4) Cleaned surfaces shall be coated before any visible rust forms on the surface. No cleaned surfaces shall be left uncoated for more than 24 hours.

5) Apply coating as specified under this Section. b. Surface preparation - field:

1) Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning.

2) Prepare field welds by grinding to remove sharp edges, undercuts, recesses and pin holes. All weld slag and spatter shall be completely removed.

3) All damages, scratches or abraded areas of shop primers and all field welds and all areas within 4 inches of field welds shall be cleaned before painting using surface preparation methods at least as effective as those specified for the structure itself.

4) Feather out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. 5) CONTRACTOR may, at his option, clean and apply one overall coat of primer

for each specified shop coat in place of touch-up or spot priming. CONTRACTOR shall meet all applicable surface preparation and application specifications herein.

2. Immersed ferrous metals: a. Surface preparation - field:

1) Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning.

2) Prepare field welds by grinding to remove sharp edges, undercuts, recesses and pin holes. Weld slag and spatter shall be completely removed.

3) Abrasive blast clean surfaces to specification required for coating to be applied.

4) Abrasive blast cleaning shall be done only when the relative humidity is no higher than 75% and the surface temperature of the steel is at least 5 degrees F above the dew point.

5) Cleaned surfaces shall be coated before any visible rust forms on the surface. No cleaned surfaces shall be left uncoated for more than 24 hours.


6) Apply coating as specified under this Section. 3. Ductile and cast iron pipe and fittings:

a. Use the appropriate coating system for ferrous metals except the surface preparation shall be in accordance with NAPF-03 as follows: 1) Pipe previously coated with asphaltic paint: NAPF-03-04 except no staining

may remain on the surface after abrasive blast cleaning. 2) Pipe not previously coated with asphaltic paint: NAPF-03-04. 3) Fittings previously coated with asphaltic paint: NAPF-03-05 Blast Clean #1. 4) Fittings not previously coated with asphaltic paint in immersed service: NAPF-

03-05 Blast Clean #1. 5) Fittings not previously coated with asphaltic paint in non-immersed service:

NAPF-03-05 Blast Clean #3.

D. Stainless steel: 1. Prepare welds by grinding to remove sharp edges, undercuts, recesses and pin holes. 2. Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1 Solvent

Cleaning. 3. Use only solvents and cleaning solutions containing less than 200 ppm of halogens to

prevent stress corrosion cracking.

E. Nonferrous metals and galvanized steel: 1. Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1 Solvent

Cleaning. 2. Remove white rust by hand or power brushing being careful not to damage or remove the

galvanizing. 3. Remove rust in accordance with SSPC-SP2 or SP3. 4. On galvanized steel, touch-up damaged galvanized areas with one-package epoxy zinc-

rich primer in accordance with ASTM A780. 5. Coat aluminum with an asphalt or bituminous paint over the areas of contact with concrete.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. General: 1. All necessary safety precautions shall be taken in accordance with this Article, SSPC-PA

Guide 3, Manufacturer's recommendations, federal, state, and local rules and requirements, and insurance underwriters.

2. All coatings shall be applied in accordance with this Article, SSPC-PA1, and the Manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint Manufacturer. Moisture content shall be determined by one of the following methods. a. As specified in paragraph Error! Reference source not found. b. By use of moisture meter approved by ENGINEER.

4. Coating thickness: a. Coats shall be applied in a uniform manner and of the minimum mil thickness as

called for in painting schedule. b. Maximum mil thickness shall be as recommended by coating Manufacturer. c. Where the mil thickness is omitted, it shall be as recommended by coating

Manufacturer. 5. Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5 feet. 6. Following coats to be applied within recoat recommendation of the Manufacturer. Schedule

inspection so as not to interfere with recoat time. 7. All coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile-up of paints and skipped

or missed areas. 8. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no

overlapping. 9. Coatings on all hollow metal units to be spray applied. 10. Finish door tops, edges and bottoms the same as face surfaces.


11. Except for contact surfaces, surfaces of fabricated assemblies that are inaccessible after erection shall receive all field coats of paint before erection.

12. All cracks and crevices shall be filled with paint if practical. 13. Wet paint shall be protected against damage from dust or other detrimental foreign matter

as much as is practical. 14. Remove grills, covers, and access panels from mechanical and electrical systems from

location and paint separately: 15. The interior surface of all ducts shall be painted black in the immediate area of all supply

and exhaust grilles. 16. Coat masonry walls prior to mounting equipment. 17. After conditions of temperature and relative humidity have reached acceptable measures

for applying coatings, those conditions must be conservatively estimated to remain in effect for 6-hours after coating application has stopped.

3.04 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. General: 1. Non-buried piping installed as part of this Work shall be identified in accordance with this

Section, as required in the Pipe Identification Schedule, and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Exposed, non-submerged pipes shall be labeled as to contents and direction of flow. Pipe

concealed above suspended ceilings does not require painting or banding, but labels are required.

3. Tanks, pumps, blowers, mixers and other process equipment shall be identified in accordance with Section 44 40 01 – Process Equipment Identification.

B. Color bands: Install color bands spaced every 25 feet, before and after each valve and where pipe enters or leaves a wall.

C. Labels and arrows: 1. Pipe contents text shall be determined by ENGINEER. 2. Place an arrow adjacent to every pipe label to indicate direction(s) of flow. 3. Pipe labels shall be positioned so that they can be easily seen from the normal angle of

approach - below the centerline of the pipe if the pipe is overhead, and above the centerline if the pipe is below eye level. Pipe labels shall be placed: a. Adjacent to all valves. b. Adjacent to all changes of direction. c. On both sides of wall and floor penetrations. d. At regular intervals on straight runs. Maximum acceptable spacing is 50 feet; closer

spacing where necessary for visibility.

D. Valves, fittings and supports: 1. All valves and fittings shall be painted the same base color as the pipe they adjoin. 2. Floor stands shall be painted the same base color as the pipe they adjoin. 3. Wall brackets and pipe hangers shall be painted the same base color as the wall or ceiling

they adjoin. Gray if wall or ceiling is not painted.

3.05 PHYSICAL HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION

A. General: 1. Identify all physical hazards of the facilities constructed and installed under this Work. 2. Identify all physical hazards in accordance with the requirements and standards of OSHA

Standard 1910, Section 1910.144 - Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards, WPCF Manual of Practice No.1, and all governing state and local laws, ordinances and codes.

3. In the event of discrepancy between regulations and standards, the more strict requirements shall govern.


3.06 TRAFFIC MARKINGS

A. General: 1. Parking spaces shall be marked with 4-inch wide lines as indicated on the drawings. 2. Marking paint shall meet Federal Specification GSA-FSS TT-P-115E type 1.


A. Inspection: 1. To facilitate painting and inspection, each coat of paint shall be of a different color or tint. 2. Finished metal surfaces shall be free of skips, voids or pinholes in any coat when tested

with a low voltage detector. 3. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected and acknowledged

in writing by ENGINEER. 4. Only coats of paint acknowledged in writing will be considered in determining number of

coats applied.

B. Final touch-up: 1. Any surface damage shall be repaired with touch-up paint matching material used for

original coating. 2. All repaired areas shall be rubbed out and polished to match surrounding finish. Finish

repair shall be of the quality typically found within the auto body industry. 3. Touch up painting shall include but not be limited to pre-painted piping and equipment.

3.08 CLEANING

A. General: 1. Remove spilled, splashed or spattered paint from all surfaces. 2. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. 3. Prior to acceptance of the Work of this Section, thoroughly clean all painted surfaces and

related areas in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. General: 1. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. 2. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. 3. Shafts and machined surfaces shall be masked off to protect from paint.

B. Protective materials: 1. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or

droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area.

C. Fire hazards: 1. Place cotton waste, cloths, and materials which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal

containers and remove daily from site.

D. Electrical plates and hardware: 1. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to painting

operations. 2. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced upon completion of work in

each area. 3. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.

E. Equipment with factory-applied final finishes:


1. Certain equipment with factory-applied finishes may be accepted by ENGINEER at his discretion. The finishes of equipment with approved factory-applied final finishes shall be protected from scratches and abrasions by all practical means. Any surface damage shall be repaired with touch-up paint furnished by equipment manufacturer by workmen skilled in this type of work. All repaired areas shall be rubbed out and polished to match surrounding finish. Finish repair shall be of the quality typically found within the auto body industry. If damage to item is severe in the judgment of ENGINEER, the equipment will be rejected or a new finish coat will be applied after proper surface preparation at the discretion of ENGINEER. In either case, no additional cost shall be incurred by OWNER.

2. Equipment with non-acceptable factory finishes shall be repainted in accordance with these specifications.

3.10 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. The following schedule is based on Tnemec Company, Inc. except as noted. See paragraph 2.01 for other acceptable Manufacturers. See finish schedule for further information.

Mil DFT 1. Concealed structural steel: Prime system AEP-1

(Shop) Surface preparation: SSPC-SP3 (Shop) First coat: Series 10 Tnemec Primers 2.0-3.0

2. Interior ferrous metals - non-immersed: Epoxy system EP-1 (Shop) Surface preparation: SSPC-SP6 (Shop) First Coat: Series 161 Tneme-Fascure 3.0-5.0 (Field) Second coat: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 4.0-6.0 (Field) Third Coat: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 4.0-6.0

3. Hollow metal doors (prime coated): Epoxy/Polyurethane system Gloss/Semi-Gloss EP-3 (Field) First coat: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 4.0-6.0 (Field) Second coat: Series 1074/1075 Endura-Shield II 2.0-3.0

4. Interior precast concrete: Epoxy system EP-6 (Field) Surface preparation: SSPC-SP13/ICRI 310.2 profile 2-3 (Field) First coat: Series 113/114 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 4.0-6.0 (Field) Second coat: Series 113/114 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 4.0-6.0

5. Cast-in-place concrete - immersed: Moisture Cured Urethane MCU-1 (Field) Surface Prep: SSPC-SP13/ICRI 5-6 Surface Preparation of Concrete (Field) Parge coat: Tnemec Series 218 Mortarclad up to ½" (Field) First coat: Tnemec Series 446 Perma-Shield MCU 8.0-10.0 (Field) Second coat: Tnemec Series 446 Perma-Shield MCU 8.0-10.0

6. Ductile Iron Pipe – immersed or exterior: Epoxy system EP-18 (Shop) Surface prep: NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning of Ductile Iron Pipe. (Shop) First coat: Series Series 1 Omnithane 2.5-3.5 (Field) Second coat: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 4.0-6.0 (Field) Third coat: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 4.0-6.0

7. Ductile Iron Pipe – non-immersed interior: Epoxy system EP-19 (Shop) Surface prep: NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning of Ductile Iron Pipe. (Shop) First coat: Series 37H Chem-Prime H.S. 2.0-3.5 (Field) Second coat: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 4.0-6.0 (Field) Third coat: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 4.0-6.0

8. Interior ferrous metals - non-immersed: Satin waterborne acrylic epoxy WAE-2 (Shop) Surface preparation: SSPC-SP3 (Shop) First coat: Series 10 Tnemec Primers 2.0-3.0


(Field) Second coat: Series 113 Tneme-Tufcoat 4.0-6.0 (Field) Third Coat: Series 113 Tneme-Tufcoat 4.0-6.0

9. Interior cast-in-place concrete - non-immersed: Satin waterborne acrylic epoxy WAE-3 (Field) Surface preparation: Clean & Dry (Field) First coat: Tnemec Series 130 Envirofill 85-100 sq ft per gallon (Field) Second coat: Tnemec Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 4.0-6.0 (Field) Third coat: Tnemec Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 4.0-6.0

3.11 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE:

A. All exposed, non-submerged pipes shall be identified with the following Tnemec colors: 1. Food Waste – 68BR Twine 2. Influent Wastewater – 28GR Black Water 3. Building Sump/NPW Backwash – 28GR Black Water 4. Natural Gas – 06SF Safety Red with 35GR Black bands 5. Domestic Hot Water – 11SF Safety Blue with 06SF Safety Red bands 6. Potable Water – 11SF Safety Blue 7. Service Water – 11SF Safety Blue with 02SF Safety Yellow bands 8. Non-potable Water – 11SF Safety Blue with 35GR Black bands 9. Exposed Roof Drain Piping - same as adjacent walls. 10. Plumbing Vents – 35GR Black.

3.12 ROOM SCHEDULE:

Floor Floor Walls Wall Ceiling Ceiling

Building Room Material Finish Material Finish Material Finish Comments

Food Waste FW01 CONCRETE NOTE 1 PREFINISHED NONE PREFINISHED NONE STEEL FRAMING = EP-1

Food Waste FW02 CONCRETE NOTE 1 CONCRETE WAE-3 CONCRETE WAE-3 STEEL FRAMING = EP-1

Food Waste FW03 CONCRETE NOTE 1 CONCRETE WAE-3 CONCRETE WAE-3 STEEL FRAMING = EP-1

Food Waste FW04 CONCRETE NOTE 1 PREFINISHED NONE PREFINISHED NONE STEEL FRAMING = EP-1

Food Waste T-1 CONCRETE MCU-1 CONCRETE MCU-1 CONCRETE MCU-1



Food Waste SUMP CONCRETE MCU-1 CONCRETE MCU-1 CONCRETE MCU-1

Food Waste TRENCH DRAINS CONCRETE MCU-1 CONCRETE MCU-1 N/A

Coat building trench drains

NOTE 1: Concrete floor finish is covered in specification Section 03 30 00.

END OF SECTION

812008 10 44 13- 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES

FVE027.02

SECTION 10 44 13

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Fire extinguishers.

B. Accessories 1.02 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions for Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

B. Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets with mounted measurements, anchorage details, rough-in measurements, location, and details.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00 –

Submittals. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. J.L. Industries of Bloomington, Minnesota or equal. 2.02 EXTINGUISHERS (FE)

A. Dry Chemical Type ABC: Stainless steel tank, Model Cosmic 10E, manufactured by J.L. Industries with pressure gage or equal.

2.03 CABINETS (FEC)- NOT REQUIRED 2.04 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Bracket: Model #846; compatible with extinguisher, complete with anchorage items; finish: red enamel.

812008 10 44 13- 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES

FVE027.02

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Predrill holes for anchorage. 2.06 SIGNAGE

A. Provide signage as required by local authority.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that proposed locations of extinguishers are acceptable for mounting conditions. In the event of discrepancy, notify architect to determine alternate acceptable location.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install extinguishers plumb and level on walls and columns as indicated on drawings 48 inches maximum from finished floor to handle on extinguisher.

B. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install fire extinguishers where indicated on drawings.

3.03 SCHEDULED LOCATIONS:

A. Provide and install extinguisher where indicated on drawings as specified above as directed by local Fire Marshal.

B. Provide and install bracket mounted extinguisher where indicated on drawings as specified

above as directed by local Fire Marshal.

END OF SECTION

812008 13 34 19 - 1 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS FVE027.02

SECTION 13 34 19

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Manufacturer-engineered, shop-fabricated structural steel building frame.

B. Insulated Metal wall and roof panels including gutters and downspouts and roof mounted equipment curbs.

C. Exterior windows.


A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between accessory components and wall system.

C. Section 08 17 43 – FRP Doors and Frames.

D. Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors.


A. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

C. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a.

D. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2014.

E. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.

F. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.

G. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality; 2014.

H. ASTM C827/C827M - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures; 2016.

I. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2014a.

https://www.aisc.org/globalassets/aisc/publications/standards/specification-for-structural-steel-buildings-360-10.pdf







http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C827/C827M



J. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

K. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.

L. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata).

M. IAS AC472 - Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems; 2012.

N. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004).

O. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on profiles, component dimensions, fasteners.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly dimensions, locations of structural members, connections and openings; wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage, installation; framing anchor bolt settings, sizes, and locations from datum, foundation loads; indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols; indicate net weld lengths; provide professional seal and signature.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of precoated metal panels of manufacturer's standard color line for selection.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate preparation requirements, anchor bolt placement.

F. Erection Drawings: Indicate members by label, assembly sequence, and temporary erection bracing.

G. Manufacturer Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing metal building manufacturer is accredited under IAS AC472.

1. Include statement that manufacturer designs and fabricates metal building system as integrated components and assemblies, including but not limited to primary structural members, secondary members, joints, roof, and wall cladding components specifically designed to support and transfer loads and properly assembled components form a complete or partial building shell.

H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed components and utilities.


A. Design structural components, develop shop drawings, and perform shop and site work under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work.

1. Design Engineer Qualifications: Licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

2. Conform to applicable code for submission of design calculations as required for acquiring permits.

3. Cooperate with regulatory agency or authority and provide data as requested.










B. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of products similar to those required for this project.

1. Not less than 3 years of documented experience

2. Accredited by IAS in accordance with IAS AC472. D. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

3 years' experience.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Buildings:

1. Butler Manufacturing Company: www.butlermfg.com.

2. Ceco Building Systems: www.cecobuildings.com.

3. Chief Buildings: www.chiefbuildings.com/sle.

4. Kirby Building Systems: www.kirbybuildingsystems.com.

5. Metallic Building Company: www.metallic.com.

6. Nucor Building Systems: www.nucorbuildingsystems.com.

7. VP Buildings: www.vp.com.

8. Behlen Building Systems; www.behlenbuildingsystems.com.

9. Or approved equal.

2.02 METAL BUILDING

A. Single span rigid frame.

B. Primary Framing: Rigid frame of rafter beams and columns, canopy beams and braced end frames, and wind bracing.

C. Secondary Framing: Purlins, and other items detailed.

D. Wall System: Preformed metal panels of insulated double mesa profile, with sub-girt framing/anchorage assembly, and accessory components.

E. Roof System: Preformed metal panels oriented parallel to slope, with sub-girt framing/anchorage assembly, and accessory components.

2.03 MATERIALS - FRAMING

A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36/A36M.

B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed.

C. Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.





E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1; galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.

F. Welding Materials: Type required for materials being welded.

G. Primer: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich. Pre-galvanized components/members are acceptable.

H. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; Non-shrink; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch (13.7 MPa).

2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch (48 MPa).

3. Height Change, Plastic State; when tested according to ASTM C827/C827M:

a. Maximum: Plus 4 percent.

b. Minimum: Plus 1 percent.

2.04 MATERIALS - WALLS AND ROOF

A. Insulated Wall Panels:

1. Exterior Metal Facing: 26 ga. galvanized steel.

2. Interior Metal Facing: 26 ga. galvanized steel.

3. Exterior Coating: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF).

4. Interior Coating: Polyester.

5. Profile: Double Mesa.

6. Insulation: CFC-free foamed-in-place polyisocyanurate foam @ 2.2 to 2.5 PCF density. 7. Thickness: As necessary to provide R-value indicated on Drawings.

B. Insulated Roof Panels:

1. Exterior Metal Facing: 26 ga. galvanized steel.

2. Interior Metal Facing: 26 ga. galvanized steel.

3. Exterior Coating: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF).

4. Interior Coating: Polyester.

5. Profile: Standing Seam.

6. Insulation: CFC-free foamed-in-place polyisocyanurate foam @ 2.2 to 2.5 PCF density.

7. Thickness: As necessary to provide R-value indicated on Drawings.

C. Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type.

D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, galvanized to comply with requirements of ASTM A153/A153M, finish to match adjacent surfaces when exterior exposed.

E. Bituminous Paint: Asphaltic type.

F. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard type.

G. Roof Curbs: Insulated metal same as roofing, designed for imposed equipment loads, anchor fasteners to equipment, counterflashed to metal roof system.

H. Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, Flashings, Gutters, Downspouts, Rain Water Diverter, Fascias, and Infills: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.

2.05 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS

A. Windows: Manufacturer's standard.

1. Glass and Glazing: Insulated.

2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.





2.06 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Installed Thermal Resistance of Wall System: Minimum R-value as indicated on Drawings.

B. Installed Thermal Resistance of Roof System: Minimum R-value as indicated on Drawings.

C. Design members to withstand dead load, applicable snow load, and design loads due to pressure and suction of wind calculated in accordance with applicable code. 1. Design loads are indicated on Drawings.

D. Design members to withstand UL 580 Uplift Class 60.

E. Exterior wall and roof system shall withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection of 1/180 of span.

F. Provide drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within wall or roof system.

G. Permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of 90 degrees F (50 degrees C).

H. Size and fabricate wall and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

2.07 FABRICATION - FRAMING

A. Fabricate members in accordance with AISC 360 for plate, bar, tube, or rolled structural shapes.

B. Anchor Bolts: Formed with bent shank, assembled with template for casting into concrete.

C. Provide wall opening framing for doors, windows, and other accessory components.

2.08 FABRICATION - WALL AND ROOF PANELS

A. Girts/Purlins: Rolled formed structural shape to receive siding, roofing and liner sheet.

B. Flashings, Closure Pieces, Fascia: Same material and finish as adjacent material, profile to suit system.

2.09 FABRICATION - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Fabricate of same material and finish as roofing metal.

B. Form gutters and downspouts of standard profile and size indicated to collect and remove water. Fabricate with connection pieces.

C. Form sections in maximum possible lengths. Hem exposed edges. Allow for expansion at joints.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Framing Members: Clean, prepare, and shop prime. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and placed anchors are in correct position

3.02 ERECTION - FRAMING

A. Erect framing in accordance with AISC 360.

B. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Locate braced bays as indicated.

C. Set column base plates with non-shrink grout to achieve full plate bearing.

D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval.

E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed.

3.03 ERECTION - WALL AND ROOF PANELS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface.

C. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb.

D. Locate end laps over supports. End laps minimum 2 inches (50 mm). Place side laps over bearing.

E. Provide expansion joints where indicated.

F. Use concealed fasteners.

G. Install sealant and gaskets, providing weather tight installation.

3.04 ERECTION - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Rigidly support and secure components. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts.

B. Slope gutters minimum 1/8 inch/ft (10 mm/m).

C. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system.

3.05 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORY COMPONENTS IN WALL SYSTEM

A. Install windows and glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from level; 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plumb.



B. Siding and Roofing: 1/8 inch (3 mm) from true position.

END OF SECTION

812008 22 00 00-1 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

FVE027.02

SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. General:

1. "Provide" means furnish and install. 2. Although the drawings attempt to depict piping and equipment as installed, actual conditions

and locations of existing may differ from that which is shown. Field verify actual conditions prior to bid.

3. Submit equipment and product submittals to Engineer for approval prior to construction.

1.02 WORK SCOPE SUMMARY

A. Provide building non-potable water service with backflow preventer. B. Provide non-potable water service piping to building fixtures and food waste pulper. C. Provide water hammer arrester on connection to food waste pulper. D. Provide hose stations and sample sink. E. Provide non-potable water signage including pictograph. F. Provide sanitary waste and vent piping to built-in trench drains and sanitary drains. Route to

process sump. Process sump, pump, cover, and controls provided by others. G. Provide sanitary fixtures including cast iron floor drains, stainless steel floor drains, cleanouts,

hub drain, and catch basin. H. Provide non-potable water pipe insulation and colored PVC jacketing. I. Provide floor drains in trench drain. Note: Trench drain body and grates are by others.

1.03 INTENT

A. The intent of this Division is to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation.

B. Furnish all materials, supplies, equipment, tools, transportation and facilities, and perform all

labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the mechanical systems as shown on the Drawings, as herein specified, and as required to make complete and operating systems.

C. The work shall also include the completion of such details of mechanical work not mentioned or specifically shown, but which are necessary for the successful operation of all mechanical systems.

1.04 CODES

A. Where Standards or Codes are mentioned, the latest edition or revision in force shall be followed.

B. Contract Documents shall take precedence when they are more stringent than codes,

ordinances, standards, and statutes. Codes, ordinances, standards and statutes shall take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the Drawings and Specifications.

C. Should any change be required to conform to the codes, ordinances and rules, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER and shall include the costs involved in this work. CONTRACTOR shall be held to complete all work necessary to meet these local code requirements without additional compensation after award of the Contract.


FVE027.02

1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Secure and pay for all permits, inspections, tests and fees required for the work to be performed.

B. Upon completion of the work, furnish Inspection Certificates as normally issued in connection with the work.

1.06 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Schedules shown on Drawings are for convenience and not intended to be a count of equipment,

fixtures, etc. Each supplier shall make a separate count of these items and shall be required to furnish the equipment, fixture and materials wherever shown on the Drawings but not included in the Schedule.

B. Drawings show arrangement, general design and extent to the systems and are diagrammatic except where in certain cases they are detailed giving exact locations and arrangement.

C. Drawings are not intended to be scaled for rough-in dimensions. Where shop drawings are required for this purpose or field measurements are needed for the installation, they shall be prepared by the installing contractor.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Prior to delivery of any material to the job site, the CONTRACTOR shall submit

shop drawings for review to the ENGINEER.

B. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: 1. Upon completion of all work and tests, instruct the OWNER in the operation and

maintenance of all components. 2. Furnish sets of written Operation and Maintenance Data.

C. Operations and Maintenance Data - Submit for each piece of equipment, accessory, and control.

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23.

D. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to maintain a complete and accurate set of marked up drawings during construction per Data per specifications in Division 1. Mark ups shall record any and all changes or deviations from the contract drawings.

B. Record drawings shall be delivered to the ENGINEER after completion of the work as a permanent record of the installation as actually constructed.

1.09 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

A. Each CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and good condition of all work and

materials in Contract until its completion.

B. Assume entire responsibility for all the materials, workmanship and satisfactory performance of the systems installed. It is not intended to limit or restrict the CONTRACTOR to the use of materials and manner of shop fabrication or erection that is not in accord with best standard practice.


FVE027.02

C. It is also not intended that the drawings or this Specification indicate or specify each item or material which is required to complete a satisfactory installation. Where such items are required and they are considered to be the accepted trade practice to provide same, they shall be considered to be both specified and indicated.

D. The design and construction of all equipment and materials specified herein shall conform in all details with the latest revised codes of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, the American Standards Association, American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers, and all existing laws, ordinances and requirements of the State.


A. Protect all materials and equipment during delivery and during storage on site. Store materials and equipment on suitable blocking to maintain parts clear of the ground and to insure drainage of all rainwater.

1.11 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION

A. Submit to and obtain from trades concerned, copies of shop drawings and catalog data of work which connects with or affects their work.

B. Make arrangements with other trades as required to properly correlate installation into the overall project.

C. Each CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for establishing elevations and routing of piping and to correlate the work with other trades.

D. Coordinate location and arrangement of equipment, piping, etc. In case of interferences between various items, or if simplified construction procedures are possible by relocation or changes in arrangement, change may be made if approved by the ENGINEER in writing.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Warranty all labor, materials, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance.

B. Alterations, repairs, or replacement of defects in materials, equipment, and labor shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR at CONTRACTOR'S expense.

1.13 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE ACCESSIBILITY

A. Install equipment, ductwork and piping to permit service and maintenance to all parts of the systems installed. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to provide proper accessibility, but any major change will require written approval.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is CONTRACTOR'S option or compliance with governing regulations

B. Size system drain piping as shown or, if not shown, as required to properly drain piping systems,

including valves and equipment.


FVE027.02

C. Manufacturer's equipment used as basis of design for project is name indicated in Specifications for particular type of equipment or application contained in these contract documents. If no manufacturer is listed, basis of design is industry standard indicated.

2.02 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials shall be new and shall be prepared, fabricated and installed with skill and workmanship as is commonly considered to be the best in the trade involved. Work shall be performed at such times as will be best for the proper conduct of the entire project.

B. The ENGINEER shall notify the CONTRACTOR of rejected or faulty work upon discovery, but this failure to detect omissions or violations of the Contract will not act as a waiver of the right to demand correction of defects in materials or workmanship.

C. Certain materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer or trade name and catalog or model number to establish standards of quality, performance, design and suitability for intended use. The products of other manufacturers may be authorized by the ENGINEER if they are equal to those specified and so approved in writing by the ENGINEER.

D. If the CONTRACTOR provides equipment or materials other than that upon which the design is

based, it shall be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to coordinate its installation with the work of all other trades and with the space available. CONTRACTOR shall also pay for any changes caused to other trades as a result of the substitution.

2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide the supports and hangers for equipment installed under this work.

2.04 COMPONENTS AND REVISIONS

A. Components normally furnished with equipment shall be considered as part of the specification whether specifically mentioned or not. Any revision necessary due to substitution shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR without extra cost to the project.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES

A. Verify site conditions under which this work must be conducted prior to commencing.

CONTRACTOR shall be held to have examined the premises and shall be satisfied and fully conversant with all conditions. No claim for additional compensation due to CONTRACTOR'S failure to make this evaluation are allowed.

B. Examine all spaces, surfaces, and areas to receive the work. Do not proceed until corrections, if any required, have been made.

C. Verify dimensions, elevations, grades and obtain all measurements required for proper execution of the work.

D. Verify points of connections to utilities prior to start of construction and report any inconsistency before commencing work.

3.02 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Each sub-contractor shall have in charge of work a competent, experienced superintendent who shall be qualified for the work to be performed.


FVE027.02

B. Coordinate and schedule the work with other trades to properly expedite the completion of the

project. Consult with other trades so that they are informed for coordination of all services.

C. Equipment shall be cleaned, aligned to tolerances specified by equipment manufacturer, and lubricated prior to start-up. Flush piping, valves, strainers, and similar devices. Adjust systems for proper operation.

D. Perform system adjustments and place all equipment in operating condition. Obtain the services of approved factory trained technicians where specified in this Division to start the equipment in accordance with factory recommendations.

3.03 PURGING OF FLAMMABLE GAS PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Purge Flammable Gas Piping Systems in compliance with NFPA 56, 2014 Edition, Chapter 7

- Purging into Service or Chapter 8 - Purging Out of Service, and the accepted Cleaning &

Purging Plan(s).

B. Purge Fuel Gas Piping Systems in compliance with NFPA 54, 2015 Edition, Chapter 8.3.

Purging Requirements.

C. Ensure that persons whose duties fall within the scope of these codes and plans review the

applicable cleaning and purging plan, and are provided training consistent with the scope of

their job activities. Training topics to include, as a minimum, hazards of flammable gas,

hazards of compressed gases to be used, safe handling practices for such gases, proper use

of personal protective equipment (PPE), proper use of monitoring and instrumentation

equipment, site specific emergency action plans and procedures.

D. Coordinate the safe purging of flammable gases or fuel gases with facility operating staff and

facility safety procedures, such as lockout/tagout, evacuation of exclusion zones, prohibition

of hot work within exclusion zones, and emergency response procedures. Schedule and

notify facility operating staff of the start and finish of each purging activity.

E. Prepare and retain records documenting the performance of each purging activity for at least

2 years following completion of the activity.

3.04 CLEARANCES

A. Mechanical equipment shall be installed so that maintenance and replacement can be performed without the removal of other equipment.

B. Clearance around fans, etc., shall be provided for operation, maintenance, replacement, repair and removal.

C. Piping connections to equipment shall be made with valves, unions, or flange fittings to permit their repair or removal without causing damage to piping or equipment.

D. Install all ducts, piping, conduit, wiring, switches, panels, etc., to accommodate any obstacles anticipated or encountered during construction. Determine exact route and location of ductwork, piping or raceway prior to fabrication.

E. Prior to shop fabrication of ductwork, piping, conduit, etc., make field measurements and make shop drawings to check for clearances and interferences.

F. Due to the scale of drawings, all required fittings, offsets, elevation changes, and routing are not shown. The intent of these drawings and specifications is that these shall be installed without additional cost.


FVE027.02

G. Maintain proper headroom and pitch of lines.

3.05 OPENINGS

A. Provide openings in walls, ceilings, floors or roofing as required for the installation of the work.

B. The location and size of all openings shall be the responsibility of each sub-contractor for the trade involved.

C. Install and provide sleeves, inserts, boxes, curbs, etc. ahead of the work to be performed.

D. Openings shall be neatly patched after installation of the work.

E. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

3.06 GENERAL CLEANING

A. Upon completion of the work, leave all surfaces broom clean and vacuum all piping.

B. The entire installation shall be thoroughly free from oil and grease, dust and dirt, and any other foreign matter.

3.07 REMOVAL OF RUBBISH

A. Remove on a daily basis all rubbish, debris, dirt, cartons, materials, etc., resulting from the work. Remove during construction to keep dirt accumulation to a minimum.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect all work from damage and protect the OWNER's property from injury or loss during the performance of the work.

B. Properly protect adjacent property as provided by law and the contract documents. Provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protections required by local conditions.

C. Any damage shall be repaired to original condition and acceptable to the OWNER.

END OF SECTION

812008 22 00 05-1 PLUMBING SYSTEMS

FVE027.02

SECTION 22 00 05

PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section identifies includes equipment, fixtures, insulation and piping as required for the following systems: 1. Soil and Waste Piping Systems:

a. Above ground soil, waste and vent piping in buildings including traps and connections to fixtures and drains.

b. Underground soil waste and vent piping up to 5 ft outside the inner face of foundation wall.

2. Domestic Water Piping System: a. Domestic cold non-potable water piping (W2)

3. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's technical data for all fixtures, drain, valves and equipment. Include in submittal, specifications, capacity ratings, pump curves showing scheduled operating point clearly identified, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings - Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction

details, rough-in elevations, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details. C. Wiring Diagrams - Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to

equipment. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

D. Submit product information on:

1. Floor Drains 2. Catch Basin 3. Cleanouts 4. Sink 5. Water Hammer Arrestor 6. Valves 7. Pipe Hangers

E. Operations and Maintenance Data - Submit for each piece of equipment, accessory, and control.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide plumbing equipment, fixtures, insulation and piping from firms regularly engaged in manufacture of same types and sizes of equipment required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less then 3 years.

B. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with all applicable portions of building codes pertaining to

plumbing materials, construction and installation of products. 1. Michigan Plumbing Code - 2015.


FVE027.02

C. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and installation of soil waste piping systems.

D. Piping installation and testing shall be per applicable sections of the national standards: 1. Building Services Piping: ASME/ANSI B31.9. 2. Plumbing Systems: ASME/ANSI A112.1.2, A112.6.1M, A112.14.1, A112.18.1M, A112,19.1M,

A112.19.2M, A112.19.3M, A112.19.4M, A112.19.5, A112.19.7M, A112.19.8M, A112.21M, A112.21.2.2M, A112.21.3M, A112.26.1M, and A112.36.2M.




including valves and equipment. C. Manufacturer's equipment used as basis of design for project is name indicated in Specifications

for particular type of equipment or application contained in these contract documents. If no manufacturer listed, basis of design is industry standard indicated.

2.02 DOMESTIC COLD WATER SYSTEM

A. Piping:

1. Above Ground Interior 2 Inches and Smaller: Type "L" hard drawn, seamless, copper tubing, conforming to ASTM B88. Fittings shall be sweat type wrought copper, ANSI B16.22. Tees formed into mains are not allowed.

2. Buried: Type "K" light drawn or annealed, seamless, copper tubing, conforming to ASTM B88. Fittings shall be flared or compression, conforming to ANSI B16.26.

B. Backflow Preventers: 1. Reduced pressure principle on the water service. 2. Model: See drawing detail. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Apollo-Conbraco, Febco, Watts, or equal.

C. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Size according to the fixture unit method as determined by the Plumbing and Drainage

Institute. 2. Provide water hammer arrestor on piping connection to food waste pulper. 3. Model: Zurn Z-1700. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Josam, Smith, Wade, Zurn, or equal.

2.03 SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT SYSTEM

A. Piping: Size 12-in. or smaller, below or above ground within building footprint:

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: a. Pipe Weight: Type DWV, ASTM D2665. b. Fittings: PVC Plastic, Type DWV, socket type. c. Joints: Solvent cement joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.

B. Floor Drains:

1. See plumbing fixture schedule on drawings. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, Wade, Smith, AWI, or equal.


FVE027.02

C. Catch Basin: 1. See plumbing fixture schedule on drawings. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, Wade, Smith, or equal.

D. Cleanouts:

1. Locations: At each 90 degree bend in suspended and underground waste and drain pipes, at 50 foot intervals in straight runs, at base of each downspout and riser, above P-traps and elsewhere as shown.

2. See plumbing fixture schedule on drawings. 3. Exposed Concrete Floor Areas: Sectional cast iron with serrated cut-off section, brass head

plug with cover. 4. Finish Wall Areas: Cast brass countersunk plug, polished brass cover plate secured to plug

with counter sunk screws. 5. Concealed Suspended Pipe: Wye branch with raised brass plug. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Josam, Zurn, Wade, Smith, or equal.

2.04 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS

A. Size 2 Inch and under: 150 psi malleable iron, bronze to iron ground joint unions for threaded

ferrous piping. Provide all bronze couplings for copper piping.

2.05 BOLTS, STUDS AND NUTS

A. Steel Bolts, Studs, and Nuts: Comply with the current ASTM A307, Grade B, or equal.

B. Provide galvanized or cadmium plated carbon steel bolts and nuts for flanged pipe joints.

C. Bolt Heads and Nuts: Semi-finished, hexagonal, complying with the dimensions for the current American Standard for Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, ANSI B18.2.1.

D. Threads: American National form right hand machine cut threads complying with the current American Standard for Unified Inch Screw Threads ANSI B1.1, Coarse Thread Series, Class 2 fit.

2.06 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger material shall be the same as the piping material. No exceptions.

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inch: Adjustable wrought steel ring.

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Adjustable wrought steel clevis.

D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

H. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange and concrete pier to

steel support.

I. Design hangers to impede disengagement by movement of supported pipe.

J. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or provide sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.


FVE027.02

K. Acceptable Manufactures: Anvil, B-Line, or approved equal.

2.07 PIPE SLEEVES

A. For pipes that pass through the building, both below and above grade:

B. Modular Mechanical Type Seal: Use LINKSEAL type pipe sleeves for the annular space between

pipes and sleeves to seal against water or earth, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links compressed to positive seal by through bolts bearing on reinforced nylon polymer pressure plates. Provide 316 stainless steel bolts.

C. For pipes passing between non-fire rated walls: Material: Seamless pipe, galvanized, ASTM A53 Large enough to accommodate the pipe and its covering, wall sleeves to be flush on both sides, and floor sleeves to be extended 1 inch above floor level. Where escutcheon plates are required, extend the sleeves 1/4 inch above the floor.

2.08 VALVES

A. General: 1. Valves installed in insulated piping systems shall be furnished with extended stem as

required to allow operation of valve without damage to or interference with insulation system.

B. Ball Valves for Water Service on Stainless Steel piping systems: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Nibco, Figure T-580-S6-R-66 b. Nibco, Figure K-590-S6-R-66 c. Apollo, Style 76. d. Apollo, Style 85. e. Or equal.

2. Comply with MSS-SP-110. 3. Conventional port, two-piece stainless steel body for threaded valves. 4. Conventional port, three-piece stainless steel body for socket weld valves. 5. Stainless steel ball and stem. 6. Reinforced TFE Seats. 7. 1000 psi CWP.

C. Miscellaneous Small Valves: 1. This article applies to all valves on plumbing and building service piping. 2. Refer to valve schedules in Part 3 - Execution.

2.09 FIXTURES

A. Sample Sink: (SS-1): 1. Manufacturers:

a. Kohler, Model Bannon K-6718. b. Or equal.

2. Enamel coated cast iron with stainless steel rim guard. 3. Blank back. 4. Faucet:

a. Chicago Faucet, Model 835, or equal. b. Wall mounted service sink faucet. c. Top inlets. d. Polished chrome finish. e. Vacuum breaker spout. f. Pail hook.


FVE027.02

g. Wall brace. 5. Accessories:

a. 3 inch trap with strainer, Kohler K-6673. b. Hose vacuum breaker. c. 5 feet long hose and wall mounted hose clamp.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Run piping parallel with building lines and as direct as possible. Piping shall be concealed as far as possible in the finished portions of the building.

B. Downfeed runouts for water piping shall be taken at 45 degrees or from bottom of main and upfeed runouts from the top of the main.

C. Cut pipe accurately and install without springing or forcing. All burrs shall be removed after

cutting.

D. Install plumbing to applicable code requirements.

E. Install ball valves on all branches serving two or more outlets close to the point where the branches leave the main.

F. Provide shut-off valves and access doors for all piping installed in chases.

G. Install all supply piping for fixtures through the sidewalls unless otherwise noted on Drawings. H. Install shock absorbers on the water supply at flush valves or self-closing valves and at

equipment with solenoid valves.

I. Install above ground water piping so as to be completely drainable with stop and drain valves installed accessibly at the low points of the system.

J. Lubricate cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil.

K. Install shut-off valves for all fixtures and equipment. L. Sanitary and storm lines sizes 3 inch and larger graded 1/8 inch per foot unless otherwise

indicated. Sanitary lines smaller than 3 inch graded 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Preparation: Ream pipes and tubes, clean off scale and dirt, inside and outside, before

assembly. Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping.

B. Make screwed joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other approved non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.

C. Provide neoprene gasketing system for cast iron bell and spigot pipe joints.

D. Provide non-conducting type connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems. Brass adapters and valves are acceptable.

E. Install pipe per manufacturer's instructions.


FVE027.02

F. Make connections to equipment with unions.

3.03 PIPE HANGERS A. Below are tables illustrating acceptable design hanger spacing. Follow applicable code

requirements where more stringent.

B. Support horizontal steel and copper piping as follows:

Nominal Pipe

Size (in.)

Max. Distance

Between Support (ft.)

1/2 & 3/4 6

1 & 1-1/2 8

2 & 2-1/2 10

3 & 4 12

6 to 12 14

C. Space Support for PVC pipe as follows:

Nominal Pipe

Size (in.)

Max. Distance

Between Support (ft.)

3/4 or less 4

1 & 1-1/2 5

2 & 2-1/2 6

3 & 4 7

6 & 8 9

10 & 12 10

D. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent

work.

E. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow.

F. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch minimum after piping is erected.

G. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe near each joint, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.

H. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support vertical cast iron soil pipe at each floor at joint.

I. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

J. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

K. Size hangers to fit around pipe, insulation and hanger shield.

3.04 FLASHING

A. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 12 inch minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inch minimum clear on sides with minimum 24 inch sheet size. For pipes through outside walls turn flange back into wall and caulk.


FVE027.02

3.05 SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in advance of concrete work. Provide suitable reinforcing around sleeves. Core drilling is allowed up to 8" openings, with permission of ENGINEER.

B. Install seals and provide floor plate.

C. Size sleeves large enough to accommodate the pipe and covering. Wall sleeves to be flush on both sides and floor sleeves shall extend 1-inch above floor level. Where escutcheon plates are required, extend sleeves 1/4 inch above floor.

D. Where piping passes through floor, ceiling or wall where no potential moisture exists, close off

space between pipe and construction with non-combustible insulation. Provide tight fitting metal caps on both sides and caulk.

E. Use modular mechanical type seal for the annular space between pipes and sleeves to seal

against water or earth.

F. Install chrome plated escutcheons where piping passes through finished surface. 3.06 VALVES

A. General:

1. Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible. 2. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of

body. 3. In potable water systems, provide valves where the wetted surfaces contain no more than

0.25% lead by weighted average "lead free" meeting NSF/ANSI Standard 61 or NSF/ANSI Standard 372.

B. Installation: 1. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 2. Install ball valves for shut-off and isolating service, to isolate equipment, part of systems or

vertical risers. 3. Miscellaneous Valve Schedule:

Type

Size

Milwaukee

Cat. #

Hmd.

Cat. #

Crane

Cat. #

Nibco

Cat. #

Ball Valves

2" and smaller UPBA450S UP8311A T-585-66-LF

Check Valves

2" and smaller. All bronze with sweat ends

1509T IB945 1342 S-413-Y

2" and smaller. All bronze with screwed ends

1510T IB940 137 T-413-Y

Gate Valves

2" and smaller. All bronze with sweat ends

1169 IB635 1334 S-134

2" and smaller. All bronze with screwed ends

1151 IB629 431UB T-134

3.06 PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulate all exposed domestic and non-potable water piping systems in their entirety.

B. See SECTION 22 07 00 – Plumbing Insulation for details.


FVE027.02

3.08 TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS A. General:

1. Each system of piping and control tubing tested by installer under superintendence of the Contractor.

2. Provide pumps, gauges, instruments, test equipment personnel and clean auxiliary water. After tests have been made, remove all test equipment and drain all pipes.

3. Submit a complete test report to the Engineer. 4. Operate pumps which have mechanical seal only with water in the system. 5. Test prior to painting, installation and insulation, or concealment. 6. Tests may be made on sections of piping as installed. 7. Re-test repaired or revised piping.

B. Pressure Systems: 1. Domestic cold water. 2. Test Pressure: 150 percent of the operating pressure or pump shut-off head pressure

whichever is greater. 3. Minimum Pressure: 50 psi. 4. Test Period: 2 hours minimum.

C. Gravity Systems:

1. Waste drain, and vent systems and their branches. 2. Entire System: Close all openings except the highest and fill system with water to point of

overflow. 3. Sections: Close all openings except highest, and provide a head of 10 feet. In testing

successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of next preceding section shall be included so that every joint and pipe in the whole system (except the uppermost 10 feet) shall have been subjected to a head of 10 feet of water.

4. After system or section under test has been filled with water, wait at least 15 minutes before starting inspection.

5. After 2 hours (minimum) there shall be no evidence of leakage. 6. Test waste, drain and vent pipe system before fixtures are installed and retest after fixtures

have been installed.

3.07 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Domestic Water: Flush with chlorine solution - AWWA C651 "Disinfecting Water Mains".

3.08 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Label all piping showing contents and direction of flow per ANSI/ASME A13.1.

B. Verify label and text colors with Owner so as to match existing labeling scheme.

C. Place label adjacent to each valve and branch takeoff, at each side of a wall or partition through which pipe passes; adjacent to all changes of direction and at 25 feet 0 inch spacing on straight runs.

D. Labels shall be provided as follows:

Outside Pipe Diameter

(Including Insulation)

Minimum Length of Label

Color Field

Minimum Letter Height

0.75 - 1.25 Inches 8 Inches 0.5 Inches

1.5 - 2 Inches 8 Inches 0.75 Inches

2.5 - 6 Inches 12 Inches 1.25 Inches


FVE027.02

E. Label Manufacturers: Seton Identification Products, Brady, Topflight Corporation, or equal.

3.09 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide equipment nameplates in a style, size and color to match existing Owner scheme.

B. Verify equipment naming scheme and desired nameplate types with Owner.

C. If no existing Owner identification scheme exists, provide at a minimum a 2 x 4 inch engraved plastic laminate plate.

END SECTION

812008 22 07 00-1 PLUMBING INSULATION

FVE027.02

SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION


A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of thermal insulation for the cold water lines as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as required for the proper and complete performance of the Work.

B. Types of plumbing insulation specified in this Section include the following:

1. Piping Systems Insulation: Fiberglass with PVC Jacketing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. See Section 22 00 00 for plumbing work scope and general provisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, r-factor, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Include technical product data on adhesives and finishes.


A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects

with mechanical insulation's similar to that required for this project.

B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method and UL 181. Shipping containers for insulating materials shall bear the UL label.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide one-year material and labor warranty from the date of final acceptance.




including valves and equipment. C. Manufacturer's equipment used as basis of design for project is name indicated in Specifications

for particular type of equipment or application contained in these contract documents. If no manufacturer is listed, basis of design is industry standard indicated.


FVE027.02

2.02 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS A. Subsequent references by name/model number to specific manufacturer's products are intended

to indicate level of quality only.

B. Fiberglass: Provide 1-piece, preformed, rigid molded fibrous glass, 4-lb density, with k factor of 0.24 at 75 deg F complying with ASTM C547, rated for use to 850 degrees F; with factory-applied, self-sealing lap vapor barrier jacketing complying with ASTM C921. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH. b. Manville. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation, "SSL-II."

C. Jackets for Field Application to Piping Insulation: Provide jacketing complying with ASTM C921;

Type I (vapor barrier). 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Ceelco, "CEEL-TITE 100 Series." b. Proto.

2. Encase pipe fittings insulation with 1-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, installed and adhered in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Encase piping insulation with 0.03-inch heavy-duty, ultraviolet resistant, PVC jacketing and matching preformed 45-degree and 90-degree, short-radius and long-radius elbows, same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. Install and adhere in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Jacketing to be ASTM D1784, 30 mil thickness, solid color, Johns Manville Zeston 300 PVC, or equal.

5. Color to be directed per Owner.

D. Insulation on Cold Fittings: Insulate fittings 3 inches and smaller with flexible fiberglass blanket compressed to the thickness of the adjacent insulation. Finish with a skim coat of approved insulating cement, glass fabric and approved vapor barrier mastic. For larger than 3 inches, insulate with flexible fiberglass blanket or mitered segments of fiberglass pipe insulation and finish as above.

E. Piping Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, and cement as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

F. Piping Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, sealers, and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. Adhesives shall be waterproof.

G. Adhesives: 1. Benjamin Foster. 2. Childers. 3. Marathon Corporation.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.


FVE027.02

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. Install insulation products as specified herein, and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. Stapling of vapor barrier jackets on cold piping will be permitted only if the staples are sealed with an approved vapor barrier mastic of vapor barrier tape. Maintain the vapor barrier seal throughout each system.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend piping insulation and vapor barrier without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated or prohibited by code.

H. Continue pipe covering for all insulated cold piping through all hangers and sleeves, with protective metal shield at each hanger, and with 12-inch section of covering material at each hanger of sufficient density to avoid crushing the insulation and damage to vapor barrier. As an option, provide wood blocking or dowel inserts at hangers in place of extra dense covering material.

I. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape or band. Seal exposed ends of cold piping insulation with vapor barrier mastic.

J. Trim covering neatly at hanger for all heated piping.

3.03 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Insulation Installer shall advise CONTRACTOR of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

B. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

C. Remove and replace all insulating materials on which mold or mildew has occurred, or which have been discolored or stained due to mold, mildew or condensation within 1 year of Substantial Completion.


FVE027.02

3.04 SCHEDULES

A. General: Insulation thickness, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90A.

B. Piping: 1. Plumbing Piping Items Not Insulated: Chrome-plated exposed piping, air chambers, unions,

strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, backflow preventers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried potable cold water piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

2. Piping Insulation Schedule: Minimum insulation thickness for the following pipe sizes.

Service Pipe Sizes (inches)

1& less 1-1/4 - 2 2-1/2 - 4

Domestic Cold Water (Potable) 1 1 1

Non-Potable Water (W2) 1 1 1

3.04 FIELD TESTS

A. Tests: 1. Do not insulate piping systems until all leak and pressure testing has been performed and

accepted.

B. Submittals: 1. Inspect all insulation after work is complete and submit a field report that the installation work

is complete. 2. After completing any punch list items resubmit field report.

END SECTION

812008 23 00 00 - 1 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 00 00

MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. General: 1. "Provide" means furnish and install. 2. The provisions of this Section shall apply to other work specified in this Division

23 - Mechanical. 3. Although the drawings attempt to depict ductwork and equipment as installed,

actual conditions and locations of existing may differ from that which is shown. Field verify actual conditions prior to bid.

4. Submit equipment and product submittals to Engineer for approval prior to construction.

1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. General: 1. Provide direct-fired gas make-up air unit, gas unit heaters, gas radiant tube

heaters, and supply thermostats. Thermostats to be installed by Electrical Contractor.

2. Provide heating hot water boiler, circulating pump, glycol fill package, dual pre-insulated pex tubing, radiant pex tubing for FOG tank including manifolds and valve box, 45% propylene glycol fill, boiler controls, and boiler programming and startup by factory representative.

3. Provide pipe insulation with PVC jacketing with color as identified in insulation specification.

4. Provide aluminum ductwork as shown on the drawings. 5. Provide outside air duct insulation with aluminum jacketing. 6. Provide exhaust, supply and transfer air fans, motorized dampers, wall louvers

and supply line-voltage thermostat for supply fan. 7. Provide all support rod, hangers, and intermediate steel members required for

supporting pipe, duct, and equipment specified in Division 23 - Mechanical. 8. Provide new natural gas service piping including all valves, fittings, hangers, and

pressure regulators. Fees associated with the service modification are to be paid by Owner. Paint all natural gas piping.

9. Provide combustion condensate piping from gas unit heaters to drain. 10. Provide combustion air and flue gas duct and terminations. 11. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor for power and Plant Control Systems

Integrator for HVAC system programming. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for verifying operation of mechanical systems after wiring and programming are complete.

1.03 INTENT

A. The intent of this Division is to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. B. Furnish all materials, supplies, equipment, tools, transportation and facilities, and perform

all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of the mechanical systems as shown on the Drawings, as herein specified, and as required to make complete and operating systems.


FVE027.02

C. The work shall also include the completion of such details of mechanical work not mentioned or specifically shown, but which are necessary for the successful operation of all mechanical systems.

1.04 CODES

A. Where Standards or Codes are mentioned, the latest edition or revision in force shall be followed.

B. Contract Documents shall take precedence when they are more stringent than codes,

ordinances, standards, and statutes. Codes, ordinances, standards and statutes shall take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the Drawings and Specifications.

C. Should any change be required to conform to the codes, ordinances and rules, the

CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER and shall include the costs involved in this work. CONTRACTOR shall be held to complete all work necessary to meet these local code requirements without additional compensation after award of the Contract.

1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Secure and pay for all permits, inspections, tests and fees required for the work to be performed.

B. Upon completion of the work, furnish Inspection Certificates as normally issued in

connection with the work.

1.06 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Schedules shown on Drawings are for convenience and not intended to be a count of equipment, fixtures, etc. Each supplier shall make a separate count of these items and shall be required to furnish the equipment, fixture and materials wherever shown on the Drawings but not included in the Schedule.

B. Drawings are not intended to be scaled for rough-in dimensions. Where shop drawings

are required for this purpose or field measurements are needed for the installation, they shall be prepared by the installing contractor.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Prior to delivery of any material to the job site, the CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings for review to the ENGINEER.

B. Substitutions: See Part 2 of this section. C. Submittal: Cleaning & Purging Plans: Flammable Gas Piping System

1. Develop and provide site-specific written cleaning and purging procedure(s) for each piping system in compliance with NFPA 56, 2014 Edition, Flammable Gas Piping Systems, Ch. 4.4.1. Each plan shall include, as a minimum, the following items: a. Scope of work and site specific purge procedure development

b. Environmental conditions and work location(s)

c. Communications plan(s)

d. Control of ignition sources

e. Pre-purge piping system assessment

f. Purge monitoring and instrumentation

g. Reference to site specific emergency action plan(s) and procedures.


FVE027.02

2. Perform, document and submit a Safety Validation for each plan prior to initiation of any cleaning or purging activity.

3. Cleaning and purging procedures/plans shall be documented and available at the job site.

4. Retain plans, safety validation documents and work records for at least 2 years. D. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

1. Upon completion of all work and tests, instruct the OWNER in the operation and maintenance of all components.

2. Furnish sets of written Operation and Maintenance Data.

E. Test and Balance Reports: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, and type written. Submit 2 complete sets of final reports.

1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to maintain a complete and accurate set of marked up drawings during construction. Mark ups shall record any and all changes or deviations from the contract drawings.

B. Record drawings shall be delivered to the ENGINEER after completion of the work as a

permanent record of the installation as actually constructed. 1.09 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY

A. Each CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and good condition of all work and materials in Contract until its completion.

B. Assume entire responsibility for all the materials, workmanship and satisfactory

performance of the systems installed. It is not intended to limit or restrict the CONTRACTOR to the use of materials and manner of shop fabrication or erection that is not in accord with best standard practice.

C. It is also not intended that the drawings or this Specification indicate or specify each item

or material which is required to complete a satisfactory installation. Where such items are required and they are considered to be the accepted trade practice to provide same, they shall be considered to be both specified and indicated.

D. The design and construction of all equipment and materials specified herein shall conform

in all details with the latest revised codes of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, the American Standards Association, American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers, and all existing laws, ordinances and requirements of the State.


A. Protect all materials and equipment during delivery and during storage on site. Store materials and equipment on suitable blocking to maintain parts clear of the ground and to insure drainage of all rainwater.

1.11 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION

A. Submit to and obtain from trades concerned, copies of shop drawings and catalog data of work which connects with or affects their work.

B. Make arrangements with other trades as required to properly correlate installation into the

overall project.


FVE027.02

C. Each CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for establishing elevations and routing of ductwork and piping and to correlate the work with other trades.

D. Coordinate location and arrangement of equipment, ductwork, etc. In case of

interferences between various items, or if simplified construction procedures are possible by relocation or changes in arrangement, change may be made if approved by the ENGINEER in writing.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Warranty all labor, materials, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance.

B. Alterations, repairs, or replacement of defects in materials, equipment, and labor shall be

borne by the CONTRACTOR at CONTRACTOR'S expense. 1.13 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE ACCESSIBILITY

A. Install equipment, ductwork and piping to permit service and maintenance to all parts of the systems installed. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to provide proper accessibility, but any major change will require written approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Reference applicable technical sections in this Division for specific systems.

2.02 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials shall be new and shall be prepared, fabricated and installed with skill and workmanship as is commonly considered to be the best in the trade involved. Work shall be performed at such times as will be best for the proper conduct of the entire project.

B. The ENGINEER shall notify the CONTRACTOR of rejected or faulty work upon discovery,

but this failure to detect omissions or violations of the Contract will not act as a waiver of the right to demand correction of defects in materials or workmanship.

2.03 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Certain materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer or trade name and

catalog or model number to establish standards of quality, performance, design and suitability for intended use. The products of other manufacturers may be authorized by the Engineer if they are equal to those specified as determined by the Engineer and so approved in writing by the Engineer.

B. If the provides equipment or materials listed in the specifications as "equal" or otherwise obtains written approval from the Engineer for a product substitution that is different from the listed Design Basis or specified equipment manufacturer and model number, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate its installation with the work of all other trades and with the space available. The Contractor shall also pay for any changes caused to other trades as a result of the substitution.

2.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide the supports and hangers for equipment installed under this work. Where equipment is to be suspended from the roof steel, provide intermediate support members such that the load is carried at the panel points of the joists or trusses.


FVE027.02

2.05 PIPE SLEEVES

A. For pipes that pass through the building, both below and above grade: B. Modular Mechanical Type Seal: Use LINKSEAL type pipe sleeves for the annular space

between pipes and sleeves to seal against water or earth, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links compressed to positive seal by through bolts bearing on reinforced nylon polymer pressure plates. Provide 316 stainless steel bolts.

C. For pipes passing between non-fire rated walls: Material: Seamless pipe, galvanized,

ASTM A53 Large enough to accommodate the pipe and its covering, wall sleeves to be flush on both sides, and floor sleeves to be extended 1 inch above floor level. Where escutcheon plates are required, extend the sleeves 1/4 inch above the floor.

2.06 COMPONENTS AND REVISIONS

A. Components normally furnished with equipment shall be considered as part of the specification whether specifically mentioned or not. Any revision necessary due to substitution shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR without extra cost to the project.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES

A. Verify site conditions under which this work must be conducted prior to commencing. CONTRACTOR shall be held to have examined the premises and shall be satisfied and fully conversant with all conditions. No claim for additional compensation due to CONTRACTOR'S failure to make this evaluation are allowed.

B. Examine all spaces, surfaces, and areas to receive the work. Do not proceed until

corrections, if any required, have been made. C. Verify dimensions, elevations, grades and obtain all measurements required for proper

execution of the work. D. Verify points of connections to utilities prior to start of construction and report any

inconsistency before commencing work. 3.02 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Each sub-contractor shall have in charge of work a competent, experienced superintendent who shall be qualified for the work to be performed.

B. Coordinate and schedule the work with other trades to properly expedite the completion of

the project. Consult with other trades so that they are informed for coordination of all services.

C. Equipment shall be cleaned, aligned to tolerances specified by equipment manufacturer,

and lubricated prior to start-up. Flush piping, valves, strainers, and similar devices. Adjust systems for proper operation.

D. Perform system adjustments and place all equipment in operating condition. Obtain the services of approved factory trained technicians where specified in this Division to start the equipment in accordance with factory recommendations.


FVE027.02

3.03 LUBRICATION:

A. Motors, fans, compressors, pumps, or other equipment which depend upon lubrication shall be properly lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions by Contractor.

B. Lubrication shall be done prior to making any test runs or turning on any equipment.

C. Extend grease fittings on bearings to points of ready and easy accessibility.

3.04 CLEARANCES AND MAINTENANCE ACCESS

A. Clearance around pumps, coils, fans, air conditioners, etc., shall be provided for operation, maintenance, replacement, repair and removal.

B. Piping connections to equipment shall be made with valves, unions, or flange fittings to permit their repair or removal without causing damage to piping or equipment.

C. Install all ducts, piping, conduit, wiring, switches, panels, fixtures, etc., to accommodate any obstacles anticipated or encountered during construction. Determine exact route and location of ductwork, piping or raceway prior to fabrication.

D. Prior to shop fabrication of ductwork, piping, conduit, etc., make field measurements and make shop drawings to check for clearances and interferences.

E. Due to the scale of drawings, all required fittings, offsets, elevation changes, and routing are not shown. The intent of these drawings and specifications is that these shall be installed without additional cost.

F. Maintain proper headroom and pitch of lines. 3.05 OPENINGS

A. Provide openings in walls, ceilings, floors or roofing as required for the installation of the work.

B. The location and size of all openings shall be the responsibility of each sub-contractor for

the trade involved. C. Install and provide sleeves, inserts, panels, raceways, boxes, curbs, etc., ahead of the

work to be performed. D. Openings shall be neatly patched after installation of the work. E. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through waterproofed walls,

floors, and roofs.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting shall be avoided whenever possible, but any cutting required in the new

construction shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the General Contractor.

B. Where piping, ductwork, conduit, etc. must pass through walls, floors or other building components, the Contractor shall provide reinforcement or support adjacent to the opening to compensate for the removal of any support material.


FVE027.02

3.07 GENERAL CLEANING

A. Upon completion of the work, leave all surfaces broom clean and vacuum all ductwork external surfaces.

B. The entire installation shall be thoroughly free from oil and grease, dust and dirt, and any

other foreign matter. 3.08 REMOVAL OF RUBBISH

A. Remove on a daily basis all rubbish, debris, dirt, cartons, materials, etc., resulting from the work. Remove during construction to keep dirt accumulation to a minimum.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect all work from damage and protect the OWNER's property from injury or loss during the performance of the work.

B. Properly protect adjacent property as provided by law and the contract documents.

Provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protections required by local conditions.

C. Any damage shall be repaired to original condition and acceptable to the OWNER.

3.10 LEAK DAMAGE

A. Damage caused by leaks in any of the equipment or piping installed by the Contractor to

the building or to the work of other Contractors or to the contents, etc., shall be repaired by the Contractor who caused such damage at the Contractor's expense.

3.11 STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING

A. The Contractor shall work under the direction of the Engineer, Construction Manager and Owner to properly commission all mechanical systems.

3.12 OWNER TRAINING

A. After all mechanical systems have been successfully demonstrated to the Owner and

Engineer, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide Owner Training to the Owner's maintenance staff at both Substantial Completion and Final Completion.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 05 53-1 IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic pipe markers. 2. Underground type plastic line marker. 3. Engraved plastic laminate signs. 4. Plastic equipment markers. 5. Piping system color coding schedule.

B. Identification furnished as part of equipment is specified as part of equipment assembly in other

sections and shall comply with requirements of this section.

C. Refer to Section 26 05 53 for identification requirements of electrical and instrumentation work, not work of this section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals not required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 yrs.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and

viewing angles of identification devices. 1.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish minimum 5% extra stock of each mechanical identification material required for each

piping system, additional piping system identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engraving blanks of assorted sizes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Allen Systems, Inc. B. Brady (W.H.) Company, Signmark Division. C. Marking Services, Inc. D. Industrial Safety Supply Company, Inc. E. Seton Name Plate Corporation.


FVE027.02

2.02 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Provide manufacturer's recommended products as specified for each application. B. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is installer's option, but provide

single selection for each product category. C. Bands, markers, and identification materials used in mechanical rooms and process locations

shall be rated for exterior application and suitable for withstanding occasional washdown. 2.03 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS

A. Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering, and wording as indicated or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or required for proper identification and operation and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown or specified, provide

identification indicating individual system number as well as service (i.e., Boiler No. 3, Air Supply Unit No. 10-ASU-2, etc.).

2.04 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A. Snap-on Type: Provide preprinted, semi-rigid snap-on, color coded pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide preprinted, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure

sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. Dot matrix printing is not acceptable. C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 in. (including insulation, if any), provide full band

pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of following methods: 1. Snap-on application of pretensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color coded plastic adhesive tape not less than 4 in. wide,

full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 in. 4. For plastic chemical tubing, use only snap-on type.

D. Large Pipes: For external dia 6 in. and larger (including insulation, if any), provide either full band

or strip type pipe markers not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of following methods: 1. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 4 in. wide,

full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3 in. 2. Strapped to pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type with manufacturer's standard

stainless steel bands.

E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length, and only with approval of ENGINEER. Lettering height shall be as follows:

Outside Pipe Dia (in.) Minimum Letter

Height (in.)

Minimum Length

of Marker (in.)

3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 8

1-1/2 to 2 3/4 8

2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 12

8 to 10 2-1/2 24

Over 10 3-1/2 32


FVE027.02

F. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping

system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic. G. Label and band colors in accordance with ANSI A13.1-2007, Pipe Identification Schedule

Section 23 26 00 and following: 1. Lettering and arrows:

a. Black on yellow background for flammable fluids. b. White on green background for potable, cooling, boiler feed, and other waters.

2.05 UNDERGROUND TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS

A. Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed plastic tape, intended for direct burial service; not less than 6 in. wide by 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing most accurately indicating type of service of buried pipe.

B. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between 2 layers of plastic tape.

2.06 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS

A. Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate complying with FS L-P-387A(1) in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, white with black core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting necessary because of substrate.

B. Thickness: 1/16-in. for units up to 20 sq in. or 8-in. length, 1/8-in. for larger units. C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws except contact type permanent adhesive where

screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. 2.07 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS

A. 2-ply, 1/8-in. thick laminated engraved plastic, engraved. 1. Color: Black letters on white background.

B. Nomenclature: Include following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible:

1. Equipment name (i.e., Chilled Water Pump No. 1). 2. Equipment Tag No. (i.e., 30-P-1).

C. Size: Provide approximate 3-in. by 6-in. (minimum) for equipment.

1. 1-in. high letters for equipment tag number. 2. ½-in. high letters for descriptive equipment name.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces requiring insulation, painting or other covering or finish including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. Locate pipe markers with arrows and color bands as follows wherever piping exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums), and exterior non-concealed locations. 1. Near each valve and control device.


FVE027.02

2. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors, ceilings or enter non-accessible enclosures.

3. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points permitting view of concealed piping. 4. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 5. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 30 ft along each piping run, except reduce

spacing to 20 ft in congested area of piping and equipment. 6. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.

B. Locate color bands at each marker and at intermediate spacing not to exceed 10 ft between

bands, and at lesser spacing as indicated or as required by local codes.

C. Locate directional arrows at each marker. Provide 3 arrows at each tee or branch fitting.

D. Where piping is normally visible from more than 1 side, provide 2 or 3 labels and arrows spaced at 120 degree intervals around pipe in accordance with ANSI A13.1.

E. Painting or Coating:

1. See piping specific Section for system color. 2. Painting of piping, ductwork, and equipment is work of Section 09 96 00. 3. Colors listed are general. Colors shall match existing piping system color coding. 4. For piping scheduled to be color-coded, but not scheduled for complete painting (such as

some plastic piping or aluminum jacked insulation) provide additional banding to represent background color. At each banding location provide following sequence: a. 8-in. wide tape of scheduled pipe color. b. 4-in. wide tape of scheduled band color. c. 8-in. wide tape of scheduled pipe color.

3.03 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. During backfilling/top soil placement of each exterior underground piping system, install continuous underground type plastic line marker located directly over buried line at 6 to 8 in. below finished grade. Where multiple small lines buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16 in., install single line marker.

3.04 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Install engraved plastic marker at each valve, gate, or flow control device as identified by P&ID tag numbers on Drawings.

3.05 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for each unit having equipment tag number on Drawings or in Specifications.

3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device visually blocked.

B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Final Survey and Repairs: 1. One year after date of substantial completion, Contractor shall perform walk-through survey

of mechanical identification systems and shall remove and replace any bands, labels, tags or markers that are loose, discolored, or defective.


FVE027.02

2. Replacement materials shall be provided by Contractor, not drawn from Owner's extra material.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 05 93-1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC FVE027.02

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and General Requirements of contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to work of this Section.

B. Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing work is indicated by requirements of this section,

and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Air distribution systems and associated equipment. 2. Heating water supply and return systems.

C. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing (T/A/B) consists of checking and adjusting all

building environmental systems to produce design objectives. It includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Balancing of air and water distribution. 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design flow rates. 3. Electrical measurements. 4. Assistance with the verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls.

D. Component types of testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in this section includes the

following as applied to mechanical equipment: 1. Fans. 2. Make-up Air Unit. 3. Ductwork systems. 4. Hot water heating systems and associated pumps, including all pumps specified in Section

23 21 23.

E. For make-up air units, etc. perform test and balance activates for the following: 1. Test and record all associated electrical motor data and mechanical fan data including fan

size and type, motor model and type, motor HP, voltage, service factor, max amps, actual amps, calculated brake HP, motor RPM, fan RPM, all pulley and belt information, etc.

2. Test and balance all supply air duct systems (including all air inlets and outlets) and OA cfm measurements to verify / confirm specified design flows for each operating mode.

3. Test and record multiple static pressure values and pressure drops at each air handling device or section including fan inlets and outlets, equipment inlets and outlets, across filters, across each coil, across burner sections, etc. Provide a sketch showing the static pressure values at each equipment sections or location from the equipment inlet to the equipment outlet.

4. Verify all filter data including manf, type, sizes, total number of filters, filter condition, etc. for all filters.

F. For exhaust and supply fans, provide test and balance activities for the following: 1. Test and record all associated electrical motor data and mechanical fan data including fan

size and type, motor model and type, motor HP, voltage, service factor, max amps, actual amps, calculated brake HP, motor RPM, fan RPM, all pulley and belt information, etc.

2. Test and balance all supply and exhaust air duct systems (including all air inlets and outlets).


G. For hydronic systems, provide test and balance activities for the following: 1. Test and record all associated electrical motor data and mechanical pump data including

motor model and type, motor HP, voltage, service factor, max amps, actual amps, calculated brake HP, motor RPM, etc.

2. Test and balance all hydronic heating equipment flows. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. A firm certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), or Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB) in those testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this project.

B. Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as otherwise indicated and NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems".

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit certified test reports signed by Test and Balance Supervisor who performed TAB work.

B. Reports shall be on NEBB forms unless other forms have been approved by the Engineer prior to the start of testing.

C. Include identification and types of instruments used and their most recent calibration date with

submission of final test report.

D. Include copies of certified test reports in maintenance manuals. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no work still to be completed.

B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free from

debris, dirt and discarded building materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes.

B. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork

and housings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.


3.02 TEST AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards.

B. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format

recommended by applicable standards.

C. Preliminary Procedures for air system balancing: 1. Before operating the system, perform these steps:

a. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent.

b. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets (supply and exhaust) and temperature control diagrams.

c. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations. d. Walk the system to determine variations of installation from design. e. Check filters for cleanliness. f. Check dampers for correct and locked position, and temperature control for

completeness of installation before starting fans. g. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. h. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct

traverses. i. Place outlet dampers in the full open position. j. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to

facilitate reporting. k. Lubricate all motors and bearings. l. Check fan belt tension. m. Check fan rotation.

D. Air side system balancing shall include but not be limited to the following procedures:

1. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements. 2. Test and record motor full load amperage. 3. Test and record system static pressures, suction, discharge and external at all air handling

equipment. 4. Test and adjust system for design outside air and recirculated air quantities. 5. Adjust and record all main supply and return air ducts and zones to proper design CFM. 6. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements.

Record data and location. Use manufacturer's rating and calculations. 7. Adjust all grilles to minimize drafts in all areas. 8. Test and record all air temperatures - supply, return, mixed, and outside air.

E. Air side system balancing shall include but not be limited to the following procedures: 1. Before operating the system, perform these steps:

a. Open valves to full open position. b. Remove and clean all strainers. c. Examine hydronic systems and determine if water has been treated and cleaned. d. Check pump rotation. e. Clean and set automatic fill valves for required system pressure, if applicable. f. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is

completely full of water. g. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and

operating freely (automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type). h. Lubricate all motors and bearings.

F. Water side system balancing shall include but not be limited to the following procedures:

1. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.


2. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance; where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across heat transfer elements in the system.

3. Adjust systems to provide indicated pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing; perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.

4. Adjust water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks/valves, valves, and fittings. The system balancer shall not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

5. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.

G. The contractor shall include the cost of new sheaves and belts if it becomes necessary to

change the drives during balancing of system.

H. Patch holes in ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer.

I. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, fan speed control levers, and

similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.

J. Balancing contractor shall coordinate damper position settings with temperature control

contractor to verify airflows and positions. Include time for this verification. See HVAC controls specification for time included by temperature controls contractor to work with balancing contractor.

K. Balancing contractor to work with temperature control contractor and HVAC contractor to verify

correct operation of entire HVAC system, before submitting report.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 07 00-1 HVAC INSULATION FVE027.02

SECTION 23 07 00

HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of mechanical insulation specified in this section includes Ductwork Systems (where

indicated).


A. Installation shall meet the requirements Michigan Mechanical and Energy Codes.

B. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Certainteed Corp. 3. Knauf Fiberglass 4. Manville Corp. 5. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 6. Pittsburg Corning Corp. 7. Rubatex Corp.

C. Installer - A firm with at least 3 years successful installation experience on projects with

mechanical insulation similar to that required for this project.

D. Flame/Smoke Ratings - Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

B. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of

mechanical insulation in accordance with Section 01 78 23. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or level, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products.

B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install

damaged insulation; remove from project site.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass: Provide 1-piece, preformed, rigid molded fibrous glass, 4-lb density, with k-factor of 0.24 at 75 deg F complying with ASTM C547, rated for use to 850 degrees F; with factory-applied, self sealing lap vapor barrier jacketing complying with ASTM C921. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

a. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH.

b. Manville.

c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation, "SSL-II."

B. Jackets for Field Application to Piping Insulation: Provide jacketing complying with ASTM C921; Type I (vapor barrier).

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Ceelco, "CEEL-TITE 100 Series."

b. Proto.

2. Encase pipe fittings insulation with 1-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, installed and

adhered in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Encase piping insulation with 0.03-inch ultraviolet resistant PVC jacketing and matching

preformed 45-degree and 90-degree, short-radius and long-radius elbows, same material,

finish, and thickness as jacket. Install and adhere in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.

2.05 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Outside Air Duct Insulation: 1. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C612, rigid fibrous glass board. Knauf

Insulation Board, or equal. a. Load Bearing: ASTM C612, Type IB; HH-I-558C, Form A, Class 2, average density

6.0 pcf, maximum k = 0.22 Btu in./hr sq ft °F at 75°F. Suitable for operating temperatures to 400°F.

b. Jacketing: Aluminum Foil Faced Vapor Barrier Material: All service type aluminum foil and fiberglass yarn reinforced Kraft paper. FSK type conforming to ASTM C1136 Type II. 1) Maximum water vapor permeability, ASTM E96, 0.02 perms.

2.06 JACKETING MATERIALS

A. PVC Piping Jacket Materials: 1. Heavy-duty UV resistant PVC jacketing, ASTM D1784, 30 mil thickness, solid color, Johns

Manville Zeston 300 PVC, or equal. 2. Color to be Light Blue.

B. Aluminum Duct Jacketing Materials: 1. Metal Jacketing: 0.016 in minimum aluminum with moisture barrier, secured in

accordance with the jacket manufacturer's recommendations. Lap joints to shed water and seal joints completely.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Heating Glycol Supply and Return Piping (HHWR and HHWS):

1. Insulate all interior piping: a. Insulation: Fiberglass pipe insulation, 1-1/2" thickness for pipe sizes 3-in and smaller. b. Insulation for fittings shall be preformed with PVC jacketing. c. Jacketing: PVC.

B. HVAC Ductwork Insulation:

1. Insulate all outside air ductwork from intake louver or hood to associated air handling unit, make-up air unit, or heating coil with 1" thickness of load bearing rigid fiberglass ductwork insulation with aluminum foil facing. Jacket with aluminum duct jacketing.

2. Insulate all exhaust air ductwork from control damper to exhaust hood to cover any ductwork exposed to outdoor air.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure insulation serves intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on systems and equipment subsequent to testing and acceptance tests. Do

not apply insulation to hot surfaces.

C. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

D. Cover fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and

composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar piping

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

F. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Butt insulation joints together to ensure complete and wrinkle-free fit over surfaces to be covered. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction, where feasible. Where multiple layers required, apply each layer of insulation separately.

G. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier of insulation and protect to prevent puncture and other

damage.

H. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

I. Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression

of insulation.

J. Straps shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Screws shall be stainless steel or cadmium plated sheet-metal screws.


3.03 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

B. Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during

remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 09 00-1 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION FOR HVAC

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 09 00

SEQUENCES OF OPERATION FOR HVAC

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Mechanical Contractor shall supply thermostats and equipment as scheduled and shown on the plans.

B. Mechanical Contractor shall provide all materials and labor required to install boiler, boiler controls, heating hot glycol system sensor, heating hot glycol pump, boiler programming, including wiring and conduit as required for a complete and operating boiler and heating hot glycol system. Electrical Contractor is responsible for 120V wiring to the boiler. See Division 26 for line-voltage and low-voltage wiring, device, and conduit requirements.

C. The intent is for the Electrical contractor to install thermostats, MAU remote control panel, and wiring and conduit to control all HVAC systems (except the boiler system) as described here-in.

D. Plant Control System Controls Integrator shall provide programming as required to obtain the functionality of the specified Control Sequences described in this Section (except the boiler system).

E. Control wiring and power wiring between field installed controls, indicating devices and unit control panels for temperature control systems, is work of this Section to be installed in accordance with Division 26.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit Product Data in sufficient detail to confirm compliance with requirements of this Section. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings in one complete submittal package. Partial submittals are unacceptable.

B. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Contractor shall provide shop drawings or other submittals on

devices and equipment to be installed or provided. 1. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed but are the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation, submit three copies of record (as-

built) documents of the documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and shall include: 1. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. 2. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. 3. As-built versions of submittal product data. 4. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems. 5. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components, including

schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.

D. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. E. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:

1. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of control device. Include this data in maintenance manual. At a minimum include:


FVE027.02

a. Maintenance instructions and schedule of recommended maintenance for pieces of equipment that require routine maintenance.

b. Wiring Diagram. c. Recommended spare parts list.

2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: a. Preparation and submittal of operation and maintenance data shall be in accordance with

Section 01 78 23. Contractor is advised that Section 01 78 23 contains specific information related to the submission of O&M data in an electronic version. The Owner will be compiling both a paper and a computer-based O&M manual, and the vendor will need to provide a CD version of the O&M manual information.


A. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by

Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and comply with NEMA standards.

B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for electric-electronic temperature control systems.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA No. 90A where applicable to controls and control

sequences.

D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local, state, and

federal authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and specifications. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to the receipt of bids of the following codes: a. National Electric Code (NEC) b. International Building Code (IBC) c. International Mechanical Code (IMC) d. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building

Automation and Control Systems


A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to

insure the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and that of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air diffusers, and structural and architectural features

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. Temperature Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required

for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use. Sensors must be capable of being calibrated.


FVE027.02

B. Space temperature sensors located in process spaces shall be provided with a NEMA 4X enclosure with corrosion resistant elements.

C. Water temperature sensors shall be of the bulb type mounted within stainless steel wells filled

with a heat conductive compound and in direct contact with the water within the pipe.

D. All field mounted sensors shall be labeled in accordance with Section 26 05 53 with the name or identification number used in the control program.

2.02 CARBON MONOXIDE/NOx DETECTION SYSTEMS

A. See Section 40 91 13 GAS ANALYSIS PROCESS MEASUREMENT DEVICES

B. Provided by electrical contractor.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. All necessary equipment, labor, and materials not specifically indicated or specified, but

necessary to complete work, are to be provided as part of the Contract.

B. Install all control equipment, accessories, wiring, and piping in a neat and workman like manner. All control devices must be installed in accessible locations.

C. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing-in

drawings, and details on drawings. Install electrical work and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division 26 sections of these specifications. Mount controller at convenient locations and heights.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. The Contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment may be installed as shown. Any

discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

B. The Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work. If head room or space conditions appear inadequate or if any discrepancies occur between the plans and the Contractor's work and the plans and the work of others, Contractor shall report discrepancies to the Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate Contractor's work with work of others. Any changes in work covered by this Section made necessary by the failure or neglect of the Contractor to report such discrepancies shall be made by and at the expense of, this Contractor.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or employees and

shall be liable for all damage thus caused.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. Contractor shall protect any material that is not immediately installed. Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.


FVE027.02

3.04 COORDINATION

A. Site: 1. Where the mechanical work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with, work of

other trades, Contractor shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If Contractor installs his/her work before coordinating with other trades, so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, Contractor shall make the necessary changes in his/her work to correct the condition without extra charge.

2. Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work dependent upon other work to facilitate mutual progress.

B. Coordination with controls specified in other sections or divisions. Other sections and/or divisions of this specification include controls and control devices that are to be part of or interfaced to the control system specified in this section. These controls shall be integrated into the system and coordinated by the contractor as follows:

3.05 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring/raceway parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and

parallel to walls) wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. C. Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code (NEC). D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and standards for

performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.


A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable local,

state, and federal codes.

B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship.

C. Contractor shall have work inspection by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the

work.

3.07 WIRING

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes, and Division 26 of this specification. Where the requirements of this Section differ from Division 26, the requirements of this Section shall take precedence.

B. All wiring in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms – or where subject to mechanical damage – shall be installed in raceway at levels below 3 m (10ft).

C. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceways containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing

high-voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).


FVE027.02

D. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip. All wire-to-wire connections shall be at a terminal block.

E. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent

restriction to devices and terminals. F. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120 V. If only higher voltages are available,

the contractor shall provide step-down transformers.

G. Use color-coded conductors throughout with conductors of different colors. H. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These enclosures

include packaged equipment control panel enclosures unless they also contain Class 1 starters. I. Conceal all raceways except within mechanical, process, electrical, or service rooms. Install

raceway to maintain a minimum clearance of 15 cm (6 in.) from high-temperature equipment (e.g., steam pipes or flues).

J. The contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-

built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site. 3.08 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install sensors in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for environment within which the sensor operates. C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by

wall framing.

D. Install all space temperature sensors and thermostats mounted at ADA heights. E. Any temperature sensor or thermostat mounted on an exterior wall shall be mounted on a

thermally insulated sub-base.

F. All wires attached to sensors shall be sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas from affecting sensor readings.

G. All pipe-mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install liquid temperature

sensors with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells. 3.09 WARNING LABELS

A. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all equipment that can be automatically started by

the control system. 1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background. 2. Warning labels shall read as follows:

C A U T I O N This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time

without warning. Switch disconnect to "Off" position before servicing.

B. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all control panels that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects. 1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background. 2. Warning labels shall read as follows.


FVE027.02

C A U T I O N This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects.

Disconnect all power sources before servicing.

C. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed below all warning lights. 1. Labels shall use black lettering (12-point type or larger) on a white background. 2. Warning labels for "loss of ventilation" shall read as follows:

C A U T I O N Ventilation system serving space are currently not in operation.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. All equipment labeling shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 53. All wire, cable and

raceway labeling shall meet the requirements of Section 26 05 53.

B. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels shall be labeled at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with control system address or termination number.

C. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item

served. D. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. All plug-in components shall be

labeled such that label removal of the component does not remove the label. E. Identify room sensors related to equipment with nameplates.

F. Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after equipment is

installed. G. Identifiers shall match record documents

3.11 CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Food Waste Receiving Area Heating and Ventilating:

1. Equipment Served: a. Intake:

1) 900-MD-1B 2) 900-MD-2B 3) 900-MD-3B 4) 900-MAU-1

b. Discharge: 1) 900-MD-1A 2) 900-EF-1 3) 900-MD-2A 4) 900-EF-2 5) 900-MD-3A 6) 900-EF-3 7) 900-MD-4A 8) 900-EF-4

2. Typical occupied airflow (1.6 ACH (0.75 CFM/SF) ventilation): a. As commanded by an adjustable seven-day time schedule in the Plant Control system,

isolation damper 900-MD-4A for exhaust fan 900-EF-4 shall open. When the end switch is made, the fan motor shall start and 900-MAU-1 shall be energized.

b. 900-MAU-1 shall be energized using the remote panel enable/disable relay by the Plant Controls system. When energized, the unit controls shall open a unit-mounted intake


FVE027.02

damper, start the supply fan, and modulate the gas burner as needed to maintain the space temperature setpoint of 55 F (adjustable) at the remote panel space thermostat.

c. MAU remote panel with thermostat to be supplied with the make-up air unit by Mechanical Contractor and installed by Electrical Contractor.

3. Manual summer airflow (13 ACH (6.5 CFM/SF) ventilation): a. 900-MAU-1 and 900-EF-4 shall operate per the typical occupied mode. 900-MAU-1

burner shall be locked out during the summer according to its internal mild weather stat. b. As commanded for up to two hours (adjustable) via individual push button switches on

the ventilation control panel, exhaust fans 900-EF-1, 900-EF-2, and 900-EF-3 (11,850 CFM each) shall be enabled to provide a total of 13 ACH of exhaust ventilation during the manual summer ventilation mode.

c. On a command to start, the enabled fan discharge isolation damper and inlet isolation damper shall open and when their end switches are made, the fan motor shall start. 900-EF-1: 900-MD-1A and 900-MD-1B; 900-EF-2: 900-MD-2A and 900-MD-2B; 900-EF-3: 900-MD-3A and 900-MD-3B.

d. Push button switches and wiring provided by Electrical Contractor. 4. Gas detection sequence (1.6 ACH (0.75 CFM/SF) mode and alarming:

a. Equipment served: 900-MAU-1, 900-MD-4A, 900-EF-4 b. The intent is that wall mounted gas detection sensors, strobe lights, and audible alarms

(provided by Electrical Contractor) will interface with the Plant Control system (programming by Plant Controls Integrator) to enable ventilation equipment if certain products of diesel combustion are detected above specific levels within the Receiving areas. If the ventilation equipment is already operating, the equipment will continue to operate.

c. The Plant Control system shall continuously measure carbon monoxide (CO) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2) concentrations using sensors at multiple locations as shown on the drawings. 1) Detection Levels:

a) Low Level Carbon Monoxide (CO) ("Gas detected"): 25 ppm b) Low Level Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) ("Gas detected"): 3 ppm c) High Level Carbon Monoxide (CO) ("High alert"): 100 ppm d) High Level Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) ("High alert"): 5 ppm

2) Detection Modes: a) Low Level ("Gas detected" mode): The 1.6 ACH/(0.75 CFM/SF) mode will be automatically activated whenever gas concentrations are measured at the above Low Level values. In "Gas detected" mode, a notification will be sent to the Plant Control system and exhaust fan 900-EF-4 (5,000 CFM) shall provide 0.75 CFM/sqft of exhaust ventilation. On a command to start from the Plant Control system, isolation damper 900-MD-4A shall open and when the end switch is made, 900-EF-4 shall be energized. At the same time, make-up air unit 900-MAU-1 shall be energized via interlock with 900-EF-4. See sequence above for typical 900-MAU-1 operation. The ventilation systems shall continue to be activated for a minimum of 15 minutes (adjustable) after the CO/NO2 concentrations have fallen below the indicated low levels. If 900-EF-4 and 900-MAU-1 are already operating at the time of "Gas detected", they will continue to operate. b) High Level ("High Alert"): Should concentrations ever exceed the High Level values, a remote strobe light and audible alarm device shall be activated at each of the building doors (as indicated on the drawings) indicating that the building should be evacuated.

B. Transfer Fan (Pump Room):

1. Equipment Served: a. 900-TF-1.

2. Fan to be operate continuously.


FVE027.02

C. Thermostatically Controlled Supply Fans (Electrical Room): 1. Equipment Served:

a. 900-SF-1. 2. Fan to be enabled by local thermostat supplied by Mechanical Contractor and installed by

Electrical Contractor. 3. See fan schedule on drawings for thermostat. 4. Upon rise in space temperature above setpoint, 80°F, adjustable, motorized damper shall

open, fan shall energize. 5. Upon fall in space temperature below setpoint, 70°, adjustable fan shall stop, motorized

damper shall close.

D. Gas Fired Radiant Tube Heaters: 1. Equipment Served:

a. 900-IRH-1-20-75 b. 900-IRH-2-20-75 c. 900-IRH-3-30-100 d. 900-IRH-4-30-100 e. 900-IRH-5-20-75

2. Electrical Contractor shall wire and install two-stage space thermostat supplied by Mechanical Contractor and other components and wiring as required to meet the sequence of operation. Upon fall in space temperature below setpoint, 60°F, adjustable, infrared heater burner shall energize. Upon satisfaction of space heating requirements, burner shall stop.

E. Gas Fired Unit Heaters: 1. Equipment Served:

a. 900-UH-1. b. 900-UH-2. c. 900-UH-3.

2. Electrical Contractor shall wire and install space thermostat supplied by Mechanical Contractor and other components and wiring as required to meet the sequence of operation. Upon fall in space temperature below setpoint, 60°F, adjustable, unit heater fan and burner shall energize. Upon satisfaction of space heating requirements, burner shall stop and fan shall stop of heat exchanger cooling time delay.

F. Fats, Oils, and Grease (FOG) Tank Radiant Heat System:

1. Equipment Served: a. 900-P-1. b. 900-B-1.

2. The intent of the FOG tank radiant heat system is to maintain the fats, oils, and grease at a temperature (100F, adjustable) to remain in liquid form allowing it to be pumped. FOG tank radiant heat system shall be commissioned and tested in both summer and winter months to determine setpoint temperatures to maintain FOG temperature. In no case shall the HHWS temperature be set above 140F to protect the concrete tank.

3. Temperature Controls Contractor shall wire and install HHWS temperature sensors and other components and wiring as required to meet the sequence of operation.

4. When FOG tank radiant heat system is manually enabled, pump 900-P-1 runs continuously. 5. Call for boiler heat when HHWS temperature falls below 120F (adjustable). Pump 900-P-2

and Boiler 900-B-1 are energized. 6. Boiler 900-B-1 modulates to maintain HHWS temperature of 130F (adjustable). 7. When HHWS temperature rises above 140F (adjustable), boiler and boiler pump shall be de-

energized.


FVE027.02

3.12 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING

A. The intent of system checkout and testing is that all HVAC equipment, dampers, controllers, etc., are tested through all sequences of operation to verify the operation of the equipment and controls system.

B. The Mechanical Coordinator shall take the lead in scheduling, coordinating, and verifying operation. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor and Plant Control system integrator to verify completion of their work and participate in system checkout.

C. Startup Testing. All testing listed in this Section shall be performed by the Contractor in coordination with the Plant Control system integrator and shall make up part of the necessary verification of an operating control system. Testing shall be completed before Owner's representative is notified of the system demonstration.

D. Each trade (Mechanical, Electrical, and Plant Control systems) shall be responsible for the operation and calibration of the items they supplied. 1. Contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and prepare for

service of all instruments, controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this specification.

2. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults. Verify that terminations are tight.

3. Enable the control systems and verify calibration of all input devices individually. Perform calibration procedures according to Manufacturers' recommendations.

4. Verify that all binary output devices (relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators and control valves, magnetic starters, etc.) operate properly and that normal positions are correct.

5. Verify that all analog output devices (I/Ps, actuators, etc.) are functional, that start and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. Contractor shall check all automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. Contractor shall make any necessary adjustments to damper blade travel.

6. Verify that system operation adheres to Control Sequences. Simulate and observe all modes of operation by overriding and varying inputs and schedules.

7. Alarms and Interlocks: a. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will trip

alarm. b. Interlocks shall be tripped using field contacts to check the logic, as well as to ensure

that the fail-safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction. c. Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the initiating

value of the variable and interlock action.

3.13 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. HVAC Systems Demonstration: 1. Prior to acceptance, control system shall undergo a series of performance tests to verify

operation and compliance with this specification. Tests shall occur after Contractor has completed the installation, started up the system, and performed his/her own tests.

2. Tests described in this Section are to be performed in addition to the tests that the Contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation, start-up, and debugging process and as specified in Control System Checkout and Testing paragraph of this Section. Engineer may be present to observe and review these tests. Engineer shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the start of the testing procedures.

3. The demonstration process shall follow process which has been submitted and approved prior to system installation. Approved checklists and forms shall be completed for all systems as part of demonstration.

4. Contractor shall demonstrate actual field operation of each control and sensing point for all modes of operation including occupied, unoccupied, seasonal changeover, and power failure modes. Purpose is to demonstrate the calibration, response, and action of every point and system. Any test equipment required to prove the proper operation shall be provided by and operated by the Contractor.


FVE027.02

5. As each control input and output is checked, a log shall be completed showing the date, technician's initials, and any corrective action taken or needed.

6. Demonstrate compliance with Control Sequences through all modes of operation. 7. Any tests that fail to demonstrate the operation of the system shall be repeated at a later

date. Contractor shall be responsible for any necessary repairs or revisions to the hardware or software to successfully complete all tests.

B. HVAC System Acceptance: 1. All tests described in this Section shall have been performed to satisfaction of both the

Engineer and Owner prior to the acceptance of the control system as meeting requirements of completion. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the contractor may be exempt from the completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Engineer. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.

2. System shall not be accepted until all forms and checklists completed as part of demonstration are submitted and approved.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his/her activities daily. Contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc., under his/her control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a designated location.

B. At completion of work in any area, Contractor shall clean all work, equipment, etc., keeping it free from dust, dirt, and debris, etc.

C. At completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint

damage, and any factory-finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.03 TRAINING

A. Provide one four-hour training session for a designated staff of Owner's representatives.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 11 23-1 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING FVE027.02

SECTION 23 11 23

FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and General Requirements of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to Work of this Section.

B. Extent of natural gas piping system work, is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by

requirements of this Section.

C. Applications for natural gas piping systems include the following: 1. Building distribution system from gas service to gas-fired equipment connections.


A. ANSI Code Compliance - Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B31.2 "Fuel Gas Piping".

B. National Fuel Gas Code Compliance - Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 54 (ANSI

Z223.1) "National Fuel Gas Code", and ANSI Z223.1a "Supplement to National Fuel Gas Code".

C. Local Utility Compliance - Comply with requirements of local natural gas utility.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's data for fuel gas piping systems materials and products.

B. Documentation demonstrating compliance with Spec. Section 00 45 46 regarding the use of

American Iron and Steel in the products being furnished under this Section.

C. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NATURAL GAS PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in natural gas piping systems. Where more than one type of material or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.02 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Building Distribution Piping (5 psi and below) 1. Pipe Size 2-in and Smaller: Black steel pipe, ASTM A53.

a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Malleable iron threaded.


2. Pipe size 2-1/2-in and Larger: Black Steel Pipe. a. Pipe weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Wrought-steel butt welding.

2.03 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Provide piping specialties complying with Section 22 00 05, in accordance with the following listing: 1. Pipe escutcheons. 2. Pipe sleeves. 3. Sleeve seals.

2.04 BASIC SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS

A. Provide supports, anchors, and seals complying with Section 40 05 07, in accordance with the following listing: 1. Clevis hanger or band hangers for horizontal-piping. 2. Two-bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. 3. Concrete anchors and clamps for building attachments. 4. Piping indicated to be routed above the roof structure shall be supported with non-

penetrating roof supports. 2.05 VALVES

A. Isolation Valves. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Milliken 625 Series. b. Key Port Figure 425. c. Or equal.

2. Non-lubricated, resilient seated eccentric plug valve. 3. UL Listed for natural gas service. 4. Drip-tight shut-off up to full pressure rating of valve with pressure in either direction. 5. Pressure rating: 175-psig. 6. Cast iron body and plug. 7. Flanged end connections for sizes 2-1/2-inch and larger. Threaded (FNPT) connections

for sizes 2-inch and smaller. 8. Wrench nut operator. 9. Buna-N plug and stem seals. 10. Secondary seal of plug metal to metal seat interface. 11. Corrosion resistant bearings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF NATURAL GAS PIPING

A. Install natural gas distribution piping in accordance with applicable codes and local utility company requirements.

B. Use sealants on metal gas piping threads which are chemically resistant to natural gas. Use

sealants sparingly, and apply to only male threads of metal joints.

C. Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping.

D. Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads which are chipped, stripped or damaged.


E. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and retain until continuing piping, or equipment connections are completed.

F. Ground gas piping electrically and continuously within project, and bond tightly to grounding

connection.

G. Install drip-legs in gas piping where indicated, and where required by code or regulation.

H. Install "Tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped, at bottom of pipe risers.

I. Install piping with 1" drop in 60' pipe run (0.14%) in direction of flow.

J. Install piping parallel to other piping.

K. All gas piping in concealed locations such as ceiling plenums shall have welded joints.

L. All joints in underground polyethylene gas pipe must be made by qualified personnel proficient in the joining methods of ASTM D2513 thermoplastic gas pressure pipe and polyethylene fittings.

M. Do not install polyethylene gas pipe inside buildings.

N. Vent all interior regulators to the building exterior. Vent termination shall be located a

minimum of 10'-0" away from any outside air intake and 5'-0" from any combustion exhaust outlet.

O. Paint gas piping orange with black bands after all testing is complete in accordance with

Section 09 96 00.

P. Label piping in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Flammable Gas Piping System 1. Clean such piping in compliance with NFPA 54, 2015 Edition, National Fuel Gas Code

and/or NFPA 56, 2014 Edition, Flammable Gas Piping Systems, as applicable. 2. Use of any flammable or fuel gas to clean (blow out) any piping system is prohibited.

3.03 GAS SERVICE

A. Coordinate with Local Natural Gas Utility to provide new service as indicated on Plans. Fees associated with service modification to be paid by Owner.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Provide gas cocks at connection to gas train for each gas-fired equipment item; and on risers

and branches where indicated.

B. Locate gas cocks where easily accessible, and where they will be protected from possible injury.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Install pressure regulators where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Regulators installed indoors shall be vented to outdoors.


3.06 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION

A. Connect gas piping to each gas-fired equipment item, with drip leg, pressure regulating valve (where required), and shutoff gas cock. Comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

3.07 PIPING TESTS

A. Test natural gas piping in accordance with ANSI B31.2 or other recognized testing procedure.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 21 13-1 HYDRONIC PIPING

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of hydronic piping systems work, is indicated on drawings and by requirements of this Section.

B. Applications for hydronic piping systems include the following:

1. Heating glycol piping systems

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data; Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and literature for all items specified herein.

B. Submit outside coating system for buried, interior, exterior, and submerged piping locations.

Include submittal information specified in Section 09 96 00.

C. Submit all product data and coating system information specified above in one complete submittal.

D. Shop drawings showing layout for piping systems shall be submitted in accordance with and transmitted under appropriate piping system Specification section.

E. Submit in accordance with Division 1.


A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Store PEX tubing in cartons or under cover to avoid dirt or foreign material from entering

the tubing. 2. Do not expose PEX tubing to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. If construction delays

are encountered, cover the tubing to prevent exposure to direct sunlight. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with applicable standards: 1. ANSI/ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping 2. ASTM F876 Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing 3. ASTM F877 Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and

Cold-Water Distribution Systems 4. ASTM F1960 Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing

Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing


FVE027.02

B. Reference: Uponor, Inc. - Uponor Pre-insulated Pipe Systems Design and Installation Manual,

current edition as applicable. 1.05 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

B. Radiant System Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's

standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents. 1. Warranty may transfer to subsequent owners. 2. Warranty Period for PEX Tubing: 30-year, non-prorated warranty against failure due to

defect in material or workmanship, beginning with date of installation. 3. Warranty Period for Manifolds and Fittings: 5-year, non-prorated warranty against failure

due to defect in material or workmanship, beginning with date of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. Provide piping materials and factory fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated.

B. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.02 BASIC PIPE, TUBE, VALVES, AND FITTINGS

A. Provide pipe, tube, and fittings in accordance with the following listing: 1. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller.

a. Black Steel Pipe - ANSI/ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120. b. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. c. Pipe Weight: Schedule 80 for ½" pipe. d. Fittings: Class 125 cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4.

2. Wye Pattern Strainers: a. Manufacturer:

1) Nibco. 2) Or equal.

b. Provide in sizes indicated on Plans. Where no size indicated, provide full line size as connecting piping system.

c. Class 125 iron body construction. d. Flanged end connections for sizes 2-1/2" and larger, threaded ends for smaller. e. Bolted cast iron bonnet with cast iron plug. f. Unless indicated otherwise on Plans, provide with 40-mesh, 304 stainless steel

removable screen. 3. Carbon Steel, Threaded Ball Valve

a. Manufacturers:

1) Nibco T-580-CS-66.

2) Or Equal.

b. Two-piece carbon steel bar stock body.

c. Threaded end connections.

d. Conventional port.

e. Stainless steel ball and stem.

f. Reinforced TFE Seats.


FVE027.02

g. 1,500 WOG rating.

4. Bronze Body Check Valves a. Manufacturers:

1) Nibco, Figure T-413. 2) Or Equal.

b. Class 125 bronze body horizontal swing check valve. c. Y-pattern. d. Renewable seat and disc. e. Threaded bonnet. f. Bronze bonnet, hinge pin, disc and disc holder. g. Rated for 125-PSI to 350oF.

5. Bronze Balancing Valve a. Manufacturers:

1) Bell and Gossett Model CB 2) Or Equal.

b. 2-inches and smaller. c. Provide sizes as recommended by manufacturer for flow rates shown on Drawings. d. Threaded connections. e. Bronze body with brass ball. f. Teflon seat rings. g. Differential pressure read-out ports across valve seat area. h. Read-out ports shall be fitted with internal EPT insert and check valve. i. Body shall have 1/4-inch NPT tapped drain/purge port. j. Memory stop to allow valve to be closed for service and then reopened to set point

without disturbing balance position. k. Provide with calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve setting. l. Valves shall be leak tight at full rated working pressure. m. Minimum Cv values as follows:

1) 1/2-inch 1.5. 2) 3/4-inch: 2.7. 3) 1-inch: 5.5. 4) 1-1/4-inches: 12. 5) 1-1/2-inches: 20. 6) 2-inches: 40.

2.03 CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX) PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Uponor. 2. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Rehau b. Mr. PEX

B. To ensure system compatibility consistency, all products, manifolds, components, etc., specified

herein must be manufactured by and/or available from the PEX tubing manufacturer.

C. Tubing 1. Material: Engel-method crosslinked polyethylene (PEX-a) 2. Material Standard: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877 and tested

for compliance by an independent third-party agency. 3. Pressure Ratings: Standard Grade hydrostatic design and pressure ratings as issued by the

Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI), a division of the Society of the Plastics Industry (SPI). a. 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) at 80 psi (551 kPa) b. 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) at 100 psi (689 kPa) c. 73.4 degrees F (23 degrees C) at 160 psi (1102 kPa)

4. Show compliance with ASTM E119 and ANSI/UL 263 through certification listings through UL.


FVE027.02

a. UL Design No. L557 - 1 hour wood frame floor/ceiling assemblies b. UL Design No. K913 - 2 hour concrete floor/ceiling assemblies c. UL Design No. U372 - 1 hour wood stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies d. UL Design No. V444 - 1 hour steel stud/gypsum wallboard wall assemblies

5. Minimum Bend Radius (Cold Bending): Six times the outside diameter. 6. Barrier Tubing Type: Wirsbo hePEX or equal

a. Tubing shall have an oxygen-diffusion barrier that does not exceed an oxygen diffusion rate of 0.10 grams per cubic meter per day at 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) water temperature in accordance with German DIN 4726.

b. Nominal Inside Diameter: Provide tubing with nominal inside diameter in accordance with ASTM F876, as indicated in the system design.

D. Fittings

1. ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fitting manufactured from the following material types: a. UNS No. C69300 Lead-free (LF) Brass b. 20% glass-filled polysulfone as specified in ASTM D6394 c. Unreinforced polysulfone (group 01, class 1, grade 2) as specified in ASTM D6394 d. Polyphenylsulfone (group 03, class 1, grade 2) as specified in ASTM D6394 e. Blend of polyphenylsulfone (55-80%) and unreinforced polysulfone (rem.) as specified in

ASTM D6394 f. Reinforcing cold-expansion rings shall be manufactured from the same source as PEX-a

piping manufacturer and marked "F1960". 2.04 DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLDS

A. Plastic Cable Tie: Minimum 6 inch polyamide 6/6 nylon cable tie. Minimum 20 lb. tensile strength.

B. PVC Bend Supports: 90 degree PVC bend supports shall be used to sleeve tubing at slab penetrations. Bend supports shall be sized for appropriate tubing diameter.

C. Manifold box: Provide manifold box equal to Oldcastle polymer concrete box with solid bottom, straight walls, and flush fitting top. Fasteners are to be stainless steel with hex heads.

2.05 PEX PIPING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Plastic Cable Tie: Minimum 6 inch polyamide 6/6 nylon cable tie. Minimum 20 lb. tensile strength.

B. PVC Bend Supports: 90 degree PVC bend supports shall be used to sleeve tubing at slab penetrations. Bend supports shall be sized for appropriate tubing diameter.

C. Manifold box: Provide manifold box equal to Oldcastle polymer concrete box with solid bottom, straight walls, and flush fitting top. Fasteners are to be stainless steel with hex heads.

2.06 PRE-INSULATED PEX PIPE

A. General: Flexible pre-insulated distribution system that incorporates two crosslinked polyethylene (PEX-a) service tubing for hot fluid distribution systems.

B. Application: For underground HHWS&R between new building and radiant tubing manifold box. See Section 23 83 16 for additional information.

C. Material Requirements: 1. Design Requirements: The PEX-a service tubing is USA manufactured and tested in

accordance with ASTM F876, ASTM F877, ASTM F1960, CSA B137.5 and NSF-rfh. The PEX-a service tubing has hydrostatic ratings in accordance with the temperatures and pressures listed in the ASTM standard. The hydrostatic ratings are: a. 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) at 80 PSI (551 kPa) b. 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) at 100 PSI (689 kPa) c. 73.4 degrees F (23 degrees C) at 160 psi (1102 kPa)


FVE027.02

2. Manufacturer: Uponor, Inc. 3. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Rehau b. Mr. PEX

D. Material: Crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) manufactured to PEX-a or Engel-method standard

E. Material Standard: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F876, F877

F. The PEX service twin tubing in the Ecoflex Thermal Twin pipe have an oxygen diffusion barrier

that does not exceed an oxygen diffusion rate of 0.10 grams per cubic meter per day at 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) water temperature in accordance with German DIN 4726.

G. Nominal Inside Diameter: Provide tubing with nominal inside diameter in accordance with ASTM F876, as indicated. Note: Numbers in brackets are the metric equivalent pipe size. 1. 1 inch [25mm]

H. Outer Jacket 1. Material: Corrugated seamless high-density polyethylene (HDPE) 2. The HDPE jacket completely encompasses and protects the insulation from moisture and

damage. 3. The outer jacket shall be extruded directly over the insulation and is flexible. 4. The outer jacket shall contain 2 percent carbon black, finely divided and thoroughly dispersed

to provide protection from UV degradation.

I. Minimum Bend Radius 1. 1-inch pre-insulated twin tubing with 6.9-inch jacket has a bend radius of 20 inches. 2. The outer jacket shall contain 2 percent carbon black, finely divided and thoroughly dispersed

to provide protection from UV degradation.

J. Insulation 1. The insulation shall be layered expanded cross-linked water-resistant polyethylene closed-

cell foam. 2. All seams of the insulation shall be sealed. 3. Insulation shall not be bonded to the service tubing.

K. End Seals 1. The piping manufacturer will supply all EPDM rubber end caps with water-top seal. 2. EDPM rubber end caps are to be installed on each end prior to connecting the service pipes

and insulating the field joints. 3. The EPDM end caps will seal onto the tubing and outer jacket forming a watertight seal.

L. Cold Expansion Fittings for PEX-a Service Tubing 1. For system compatibility, use fittings offered by the tubing manufacturer. 2. Fittings must comply with the performance requirements of ASTM F877. 3. Fittings are to be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F1960. 4. The fitting assembly consists of a barbed adapter and an applicable sized PEX ring. 5. All buried fittings will be installed, insulated, and sealed in accordance with the instructions of

the piping manufacturer.

M. Compression Fittings for PEX Service Tubing 1. For system compatibility, use fittings offered by the tubing manufacturer. 2. Fittings are to be manufactured from dezincification resistant brass. 3. The fitting assembly must comply with performance requirements of ASTM F877. 4. Fittings will consist of a compression fitting with a coupling sleeve, a fitting body insert with

o-ring(s) and a bolt and nut.


FVE027.02

5. All buried fittings will be installed, insulated, and sealed in accordance with the piping manufacturer's instructions.

6. Male NPT thread for each compression fitting is shown below. a. 1-inch PEX compression fitting has 1 inch male NPT thread.

7. All transition fittings connecting to the compression fittings shall be manufactured of dezincification resistant brass.

N. Accessories

1. Use accessories associated with the installation of the pre-insulated PEX-a distribution piping system as recommended by or available from the manufacturer.

2. Insulation Kits a. Insulation kits will be manufactured of ABS shells or HDPE sleeves, will feature equal

thickness of closed-cell PEX insulation as the pipe, and sealed watertight.

2.04 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

A. Provide supports, anchors, and seals complying with Section 40 05 07, in accordance with the following listing: 1. Steel clevises for horizontal piping hangers and supports. 2. Two-bolt riser clamps, for vertical-piping clamps. 3. Concrete anchors, C-clamps, beam clamps, and steel brackets for building attachment. 4. Protection saddles, for saddles and shields.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid

construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Store pre-insulated piping coils under cover to prevent dirt or foreign material from entering

the service tubing. 2. Do not expose the PEX-a service tubing to direct sunlight for more than 30 days. If

construction delays are encountered, cover the tubing that is exposed to direct sunlight.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING

A. Insulate piping systems in accordance with Section 23 07 00. B. Provide adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves

and equipment.

C. Expansion, Contraction, and Bending: Install piping with provisions for expansion and contraction using expansion loops, swing or expansion joints where required. Provide for expansion and contraction in mains, risers, and runouts. Do not spring or force piping during installation. Do not bend piping without use of bending machine.

D. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align accurately at connection, within

1/16" misalignment tolerance.


FVE027.02

E. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.

F. Locating piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain)

and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams or details.

G. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-

enclosure elements of building; limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. When possible, locate insulated piping for 1-inch clearance outside insulation.

H. Avoid routing piping over electrical equipment. Where piping must pass over electrical

equipment, provide galvanized steel drip pan below piping, minimum 1-inch deep with soldered joints.

I. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of both pipes

and reducer flush.

J. Install piping level with no pitch.

K. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Connect water piping to equipment as indicated on drawings and equipment manufacturer's

written instructions.

M. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

N. Provide pipe, valve, and equipment identification in accordance with Section 09 96 00. Banding

colors shall be selected by Owner.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF RADIANT PIPING SYSTEM

A. Slab-on-grade Installation 1. Fasten the tubing to the wire mesh or reinforcing bar using plastic cable ties. Space ties at a

maximum of 36 inches. Secure tubing at the base and center of each bend. 2. Install edge insulation (by Others) when the controlled system directly contacts an exterior

wall. 3. Install tubing at a consistent depth below the surface elevation. Maintain minimum cover as

shown on plans. Ensure sufficient clearance to avoid control joint cuts. 4. In areas where tubing must cross expansion joints in the concrete, tubing shall be wrapped

with pipe insulation or run within a sleeve of one size larger pex tubing for 6 inches on both sides of joint.

5. For tubing that exits the slab in a 90-degree bend, use PVC bend supports. 6. System shall be pressure-tested per the manufacturer's recommendations at a pressure no

less than 40 psig. Maintain minimum 40 psig pressure during the concrete pour for 24 hours during curing.

B. Manifold Installation

1. Mount manifolds in manifold box per the approved shop drawings.


FVE027.02

C. All piping to be identified with loop numbers marked on pipe wall before connecting to manifold using a permanent tag. 1. Verify actual loop length for each loop on a manifold. 2. All loops must be identified to allow for future balancing

3.04 ADJUSTING RADIANT TUBING SYSTEM

A. Balancing Loops Across the Manifold

1. Balance all loops across each manifold to the flow rates specified on the approved manifold schedule.

2. Balancing is unnecessary when all loop lengths across the manifold are within 3% of each other in length. Install the supply-and-return piping to the manifold in a reverse-return configuration to ensure self-balancing

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PRE-INSULATED PEX PIPING

A. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including:

1. Product technical bulletins 2. Installation instructions and design drawings 3. Uponor Pre-insulated Pipe Systems Design and Installation Manual

B. Examination 1. Site Verification of Conditions 2. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the pre-insulated PEX-a piping

distribution system. 3. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

C. Installation 1. Below-grade Installation

a. Pre-insulated piping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and the details as shown on the contract drawings.

b. The system will be installed with the fewest number of underground joints as possible. c. The system does not require expansion loops, expansion joints or compensators of any

type. d. An EPDM rubber end cap shall be applied at all terminations of the pre-insulated piping

system, including all fitting locations, to form a watertight seal. e. All buried fittings will be installed, insulated and sealed in accordance with the piping

manufacturer's instructions. f. Connection Vaults or Insulation Kits are required for all below-grade installations.

2. Backfill a. The pre-insulated piping system will be backfilled with clean sand material b. Minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the tubing to the trench floor is 4 inches. c. Minimum lateral distance from the side of the tubing to the trench wall is 6 inches. d. Install a minimum of 12 inches of clean fill over the top of the pre-insulated piping. e. The balance of the trench can be backfilled with native soil void of stone greater than 2

inches in diameter.

D. Field Quality Control 1. Site Tests

a. To ensure system integrity, pressure-test the tubing before and during backfilling of the piping.

b. The service tubing will be air tested at 1½ times the operating pressure for a minimum of 1 hour prior to system burial.

E. Protection: Protect installed work from damage caused by subsequent construction activity on the

site.


FVE027.02

3.06 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

A. Install supports, anchors, and seals in accordance with Section 40 05 07. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and on inlet of heating/cooling terminal, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Drain Valves: Provide ½-in ball valve drain at all low points in piping system.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Install hydronic specialties in accordance with Section 23 21 16.

3.09 CLEANING, FLUSHING, AND INSPECTING

A. Clean and flush system, with clear water, of all dirt, metal chips, sand, and foreign matter.

B. After flushing remove, clean, and replace all strainer baskets or screens.

C. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports, accessory items, and obvious leaks.

3.10 LEAK TESTING

A. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges.

B. Test piping system before insulation is installed, wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing.

C. Subject entire piping system to leak tests, either as a whole, or in sections; but leave no part

untested.

D. Provide temporary blind flanges or caps at boiler connections, boilers not to be subjected to test pressure.

E. Fill piping systems with clear water, vent all air, and pressurize at to 75-psig for 2 hours. Test

fails if leakage is observed, or pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure.

F. Test must be witnessed by Owner's representative.

G. Repair piping systems which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

H. Retest system as required to show system is leak free.

I. Coordinate with OWNERS existing water treatment system supplier. Fill HVAC heat side of

system with concentration of 45% propylene glycol solution and inhibitor chemicals recommended by OWNERS supplier. OWNER to provide chemicals as required. Glycol solution shall be provided by Contractor.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 21 16-1 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 21 16

HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES


A. Extent of hydronic specialties required by this Section is indicated on drawings, and/or specified in other Division 23 hydronic piping system sections.

B. Types of hydronic specialties specified in this Section include the following:

1. Expansion Tank. 2. Air Separator. 3. Glycol Feed Package. 4. Vent Valves. 5. Gauges.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type manufactured hydronic specialty. Include pressure drop curb or chart for each type and size of hydronic specialty. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, rated capacities, and features for each required hydronic specialty.

B. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each type of manufactured

hydronic specialty. Submit these data in Maintenance Manual in accordance with Section 01 79 23.

C. Hydronic Specialty Types - Provide hydronic specialties of same type by same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION TANK

A. Manufacturer: 1. Bell & Gossett, Series D 2. Amtrol 3. Wessels. 4. Or Equal.

B. Carbon steel tank designed, constructed, and stamped for 125-psig at 240°F in accordance with

Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Precharged, replaceable bladder type with heavy duty Butyl rubber bladder. Bladder assembly shall be approved by Manufacturer for 40% propylene glycol solution.

D. Tank shall be coated with factory prime coated and field finish coated in accordance with Section

09960.

E. Tank shall be minimum 8-gallon with minimum 2.4-gallon acceptance from 12 to 20-psi, vertical

tank.

F. Provide with air charging valve and 1/2-inch NPT tapping in the bottom of the tank for system and

drain connection.


FVE027.02

2.02 AIR SEPARATOR:

A. Manufacturer: 1. Bell & Gossett, EAS 2. Armstrong, DAS 3. Or Equal.

B. Small coalescing air separator.

C. Minimum 85% air removal efficiency at design flow rates.

D. Threaded inlet and outlet connections.

E. Body: heavy duty cast iron.

2.03 GLYCOL FEED PACKAGE

A. Manufacturer: 1. Wessels Company GMP - 6 2. GTP model GRE-E7-4 3. Or Equal.

B. Description: Prefabricated, automatic and autonomous make-up package.

C. Electrical: 110/1/60

D. The package shall be designed to maintain a fill pressure in the glycol system of 12 psig. The

pressurization assembly shall consist of a pressurization pump with pressure controls, a PRV, and a pressure gauge to continuously monitor PRV outlet pressure. The pressurization assembly shall be mounted on the translucent polyethylene solution container, complete with cover

2.04 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT

A. Manufacturer: 1. Bell & Gossett, Number 107A. 2. Or Equal.

B. Provide automatic air vents where shown on Drawings.

C. Float type vent.

D. Cast iron body and bonnet.

E. Stainless steel and brass internals.

2.05 VENT VALVES

A. Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually with screwdriver or thumbscrew, 1/8" N.P.T. connection.

2.06 GAUGES

A. Pressure Gauges in accordance with Type P4 in Section 40 73 00.

B. Thermometers in accordance with Type T9 in Section 40 74 00.


FVE027.02

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Install hydronic specialties where shown and as required in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and local codes.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF VENT VALVES:

A. Install automatic vent valves where indicated.

B. Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF COMPRESSION/EXPANSION TANKS:

A. Install horizontal tanks on Manufacturer furnished saddles.

B. Install gauge glass and cocks on end of tank when indicated. C. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Tank Fittings: Install tank fittings in bottom of compression tanks. Use manual vent for initial fill

to establish proper water level in tank. E. Precharge bladder type expansion tank systems with compressed air to provide 10-psig pressure

measured at tank. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GAUGES:

A. Install gauges and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for applications where used.

B. Thermometer Installation:

1. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. 2. Install in the following locations:

a. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. b. Elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings.

3. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are

indicated. Install with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid. 4. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are

indicated. 5. Install with stem extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid.

C. Pressure-Gauge Installation:

1. Install pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most readable position.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 21 23-1 HYDRONIC PUMPS

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Hot Glycol Pump No. 1, 900-P-1.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for hot water pump equipment specified. 2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 83.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for glycol water pump equipment.


1. Operating instructions and maintenance data for materials and products for inclusion in O&M Manual.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of pumps in service. 3. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23.

1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. All equipment and parts shipped to the job site shall be properly protected from the elements so

that no damage or deterioration occurs from the time of delivery to the time when the installation is complete and the units are placed into operation.

B. Manufacturer shall define the requirements to properly protect the equipment and parts shipped

to the job site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pump performance requirements shown in Pump Schedule on the drawings. 1. Head shown includes friction head losses reflecting anticipated liquid characteristics but does

not include internal losses in pump. 2. Watts shown represents maximum rated Watts motor to be supplied for each pump; pumps

requiring larger motors are not acceptable.

B. Design pumps for smooth, quiet, and efficient operation over entire capacity range specified.

C. Design pump capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections.

812008 23 21 23-2 HYDRONIC PUMPS

FVE027.02

2.02 PUMPS

A. Provide pumps, thoroughly cleaned prior to shipment.

B. Capacities: 1. Heating Pump No. 1: See Specifications on Drawings.

2.03 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. General:

1. Inline style circulator, suitable for horizontal or vertical installation. 2. Suitable for 203F working temperature and 150-psig working pressure. 3. Motor shall be electronically commutated motor, permanent magnet (ECM/PM). 4. Motor shall be non-overloading at any point on the entire pump curve. 5. Motor shall be protected from contaminants to prevent clogging 6. Pumps shall be capable of speed modulation across the full speed range.

B. Construction:

1. Pump Body: Cast Iron 2. O-Ring: EPDM 3. Bearing: Ceramic 4. Shaft: Ceramic 5. Impeller: Composite/PES 30% GF

C. Seals:

1. Pumps in glycol service shall be furnished with seal material suitable for specified glycol material and concentration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install hot glycol pump equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 31 13-1 METAL DUCTS FVE027.02

SECTION 23 31 13

METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK


B. Extent of ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this

Section.

C. Types of ductwork required for project include the following: 1. Fresh air supply systems. 2. Aluminum mechanical exhaust systems.


A. Installer: Firm with at least 3 years successful installation experience on projects with ductwork systems work similar to that required for Project.

B. NFPA Compliance - Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for The Installation of Air-

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard for The Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems".

C. Underwriters Laboratories - UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. D. Design Criteria:

1. Construct all ductwork to be free from vibration, chatter, objectionable pulsations and leakage under specified operating conditions.

2. Use material, weight, thickness, gauge, construction and installation methods as outlined in the following SMACNA publications, unless noted otherwise: a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. b. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. c. HVAC Systems - Duct Design. d. Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standard. e. Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Submit Product Data in sufficient detail to confirm compliance with requirements of this

Section.

B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications for duct system materials showing thicknesses, weights,

materials of construction, corrosion resistance characteristics, and method of construction.


812008 23 31 13-2 METAL DUCTS FVE027.02


A. Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store

outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: All ductwork shall be constructed of non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 0 or 1 air duct materials, or UL 181.

B. Exposed Ductwork Materials - Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied

spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting.

C. Sheet Metal

1. Aluminum Sheet - ANSI/ASTM B209 aluminum sheet, alloy 3003H-14. 2. Stainless Steel Sheet - ASTM A167, 316 stainless steel sheet No. 2B finish for concealed

work and No. 3 finish for exposed work.

D. Ductwork Material Selection 1. All ductwork, unless indicated otherwise on the PLANS or below, shall be constructed of

aluminum. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.

B. Ductwork Support Materials and Fasteners: Provide 316 stainless steel fasteners, anchors,

rods, straps, trim and angles for support of stainless steel or aluminum ductwork. 2.03 DUCT FABRICATION - GENERAL

A. Fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks for 2-In. W.C. Pressure Class unless specifically identified below: Fabricate to Pressure Class as listed below for equipment served.

B. Ductwork shall be constructed to provide the minimum clear inside dimensions indicated on the Drawings.

C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as

applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline radius 1.5 times the associated duct width; and fabricate to include airfoil turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. Construct so that all interior surfaces are smooth. Use slip and drive or flanged and bolted

construction when fabricating rectangular ductwork. Use spiral lock seam construction when fabricating round spiral ductwork. Sheet metal screws may be used on duct hangers,

812008 23 31 13-3 METAL DUCTS FVE027.02

transverse joints and other SMACNA approved locations if the screw does not extend more than 1/2 inch into the duct.

E. Limit angular tapers to 30(for contracting tapers and expanding tapers).

F. Provide expanded take-offs or 45 degree entry fittings for branch duct connections with branch ductwork airflow velocities greater than 700 fpm. Square edge 90-degree take-off fittings or straight taps will not be accepted.

G. Button punch snaplock construction will not be accepted on aluminum ductwork.

H. When approved by the Engineer, size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in

accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission.

I. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where

easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.

J. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

K. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. Refer to Section 23 33 00, DUCT ACCESSORIES, for accessory requirements.

2.04 DUCT SEALANTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. 3M 800. 2. H.B. Fuller/Foster. 3. Or equal.

B. Install sealants in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, paying special attention to temperature limitations. Allow sealant to fully cure before pressure testing of ductwork, or before startup of air handling systems.

2.05 GASKETS

A. For 2-IN. Pressure Class and lower, provide soft neoprene or butyl gaskets in combination with duct sealant for flanged joints.

2.06 TURNING VANES

A. Provide turning vanes constructed of curved blades supported with bars perpendicular to blades and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

B. Turning vanes installed in aluminum ductwork shall be of aluminum construction.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the

following: 1. Cain Mfg Co. 2. Tuttle & Bailey. 3. Or equal.

812008 23 31 13-4 METAL DUCTS FVE027.02

2.05 DUCT HARDWARE

A. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide duct hardware of one of the following: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co. 3. Or equal.

2.07 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment.

B. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make air tight joint.

C. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement,

and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

D. Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with requirements provide flexible connections of one of the following: 1. Ventfabrics. 2. Or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK

A. Provide ductwork insulation in accordance with Section 23 07 00.

B. Assemble and install ductwork to achieve SMACNA seal Class B and noiseless (no objectional

noise) systems. Install each run with minimum of joints.

C. A rigid ductwork support or form of lateral bracing shall be provided at each change in ductwork

directions, each end or run and elsewhere as noted on Plans to minimize ductwork sway to no more than ½-inch of total travel.

D. Pittsburgh lock seams and slip joints or ductmate shall be used for all rectangular ducts.

E. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal

surfaces smooth.

F. Coordinate ductwork layout with lighting, suspended ceilings, piping, and structural components.

G. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid

diagonal runs wherever possible.

H. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details, and notations. Ensure ductwork does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.

I. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or

812008 23 31 13-5 METAL DUCTS FVE027.02

concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation.

J. Pitch outside air intake ductwork toward intake to allow drainage to building exterior.

K. Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between

construction opening and duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge and material as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2".

L. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, equipment, controls and

other associated work of ductwork system.

M. Sealant shall be pumped or painted into joints, as required, after assembly. Sealant shall be allowed to set for 48 hours before any air pressure is put on system. All tie bars, bolts and rivets shall be sealed with the specified sealant.

N. All ductwork shall be airtight before concealment and/or before insulation is applied.

O. All tie rods shall be 3/8" dia. When one tie rod is required, it shall be installed in the center of

the duct. When two tie rods are required, installation shall be at 1/3 points across ducts. When three tie rods are required, installation shall be at 1/4 points across ducts. Where tie rods are required in the horizontal and vertical side, they shall be welded together where they cross. All tie rods shall be welded to reinforcing angles or joints

P. Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork.

Q. Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"- Latest Edition hangers and supports section.

R. Where dissimilar metals meet, provide positive electric isolation using insulating material, sealants, and fasteners.

3.02 DUCT OBSTRUCTIONS

A. Install streamlined metal sleeve around any obstruction which must run through ducts with approval by the Engineer only.

B. Sleeves to have rounded noses on upstream face and tapered back to point on downstream

side of obstructions. Sleeves to extend completely between walls of duct and be firmly riveted in place.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC DAMPERS

A. Install all automatic dampers furnished by and under the supervision of the automatic temperature control manufacturer.

B. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers shall

be the responsibility of the ductwork installer.

C. The temperature control manufacturer shall submit a schedule of damper sizes to the ductwork installer, with a copy to the Engineer.

3.04 LOUVERS

A. Outdoor air intake and exhaust louvers are specified under other sections. Where ductwork

indicated to be connected to louver, provide 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/4" aluminum angle frames all

812008 23 31 13-6 METAL DUCTS FVE027.02

around the louver openings securely bolted to construction with mastic caulking compound between angle and construction. Ductwork, casings, etc., shall be riveted to the outstanding leg of angle frames.

B. Where louvers contain gravity or motor operated dampers and are shown to be non-ducted,

provide No. 2 (1/2" mesh) 0.063" dia. aluminum bird screens with rewireable and removable extruded aluminum frames or aluminum expanded metal on the interior face of damper installed to not interfere with damper operation.

3.05 CAULKING AND TAPING

A. Caulk all joints, rivets, flanges, flexible connections, filter frames, openings, seams, etc.

B. Caulk all casings airtight.

C. Caulking shall be 3M No. EC-800 premium grade.

D. Where pressure testing indicates a leak that caulking has not sealed, provide a sheet metal

jacket over the seam or joint and weld in place. Weldments to be continuous. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or any distribution devices at time of

ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 34 23-1 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 34 23

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS


A. This section identifies power and gravity ventilators to be furnished and installed as shown on HVAC drawings and schedules and as specified herein. Power ventilators required for this project include: 1. Axial wall fans. (900-EF-1, 900-EF-2, 900-EF-3) 2. Centrifugal square inline fans. (900-EF-4, 900-TF-1, 900-SF-1)

B. The following is not work of this section, refer to Division 26.

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on ventilators. All components required to make a complete installation shall be provided, including but not limited to starters, disconnects and required electrical devices. Electrical equipment specified to be furnished or factory installed by manufacturer shall be provided under this section in accordance with Division 26.

C. Control and interlock wiring between ventilators and field installed devices shall be work of

Section 23 09 00 installed in accordance with Division 26. Interlock and control wiring specified as factory installed is work of this section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's technical data for power ventilators, including specifications, capacity ratings including fan curves showing scheduled operating point clearly identified, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings - Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction

details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details.

C. Wiring Diagrams - Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to power ventilators. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

D. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power ventilator,

accessory, and control. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Section 01 78 23.

E. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide power ventilators from firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power and gravity ventilators of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. AMCA Compliance - Provide power ventilators which have been tested and rated in

accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2. UL Compliance - Provide power ventilators which are designed, manufactured, and tested in

accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators".


FVE027.02

3. NEMA Compliance - Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA standards.

1.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Furnish one spare set of belts for all belt driven ventilators.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.03 AXIAL WALL FANS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Cook. 2. Or equal by Greenheck as determined by engineer.

B. Type: Axial flow, direct or belt driven propeller fan as scheduled. C. Construction: Fan panel shall be single piece construction of galvanized or painted steel with

deep formed inlet venturi and pre-punched mounting holes. Drive support frame shall be of heavy gauge steel construction.

D. Wheel, Shaft and Drive: Propeller shall be constructed of extruded aluminum blades securely

fastened to cast hub. Hub shall be keyed to ground and polished shaft. Bearings shall be heavy-duty pillow block bearings selected for minimum life of 100,000 hours at maximum rated speed of the fan. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of installed motor horsepower. Sheaves shall be of cast iron construction, motor sheaves shall be adjustable for system balancing. Fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced and tested before shipment.

E. Electrical: Provide factory-wired, fusible type disconnect switch in accordance with Division 16.

F. Motors: Provide TEFC motors of scheduled horsepowers in accordance with Division 16.

G. Finish: All steel components to be provided with baked epoxy powder coating with standard color.

H. Accessories: Provide fans with the following accessories as scheduled:

1. Dampers: Provide motor operated dampers as scheduled. 2. Wall Housing: Provide manufacturer's standard wall housing for scheduled fan size. Housing

shall be constructed of aluminum or epoxy coated steel with pre-punched mounting holes. Provide housing with motor side guard of aluminum wire construction.

3. Weatherhood: Provide manufacturer's standard weatherhood constructed of aluminum with aluminum insect screen. Provide weatherhood with painted finish, final color to be selected by Architect.

2.02 CENTRIFUGAL SQUARE INLINE FANS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Cook. 2. Or equal by Greenheck as determined by engineer.

B. Type: V-belt or direct drive as scheduled with galvanized steel housing, integral inlet cone, removable access doors on 3 sides, inlet and outlet duct collar, horizontal hanging brackets.

C. Fan Wheel: Backward inclined centrifugal type, aluminum construction.


FVE027.02

D. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.

E. Provide TEFC motors of scheduled horsepowers in accordance with Division 26 for Unclassified Areas.

F. Finish: All steel components to be provided with baked epoxy powder coating with standard colors.

G. Bearings: ABMA 9 life at 200,000 hours.

H. Accessories: 1. Belt guard. 2. Flexible duct connector. 3. Filter box with throwaway type filter. All steel components to be provided with baked epoxy

powder coating with standard color. 4. Flanged inlet and outlet. 5. Disconnect Switch: NEMA 250 Type 4X enclosure.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which power ventilators are to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, industry standards, Michigan Mechanical Code and as indicated in this section and on the Drawings.

B. Coordinate installation with electrical work for power wiring to each piece of powered equipment.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Power Ventilators: 1. Coordinate installation of power ventilators with work of walls and ceiling as necessary for

proper interfacing. 2. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within power ventilators. Adjust dampers for

free operation. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of installation, start-up and test each power and gravity ventilator to demonstrate capabilities and compliance with requirements.

B. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning units then retest to demonstrate compliance.

C. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 37 00-1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS FVE027.02

SECTION 23 37 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Drawings and General Requirements of contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-specification sections apply to Work of this Section.

B. Extent of outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by

requirements of this Section.

C. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following: 1. Diffusers, registers and grilles. 2. Louvers


A. ASHRAE Standards - Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) Standard 70 "Methods of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets".

B. ADC Test Code - Comply with Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Equipment Test Code 1062R4

"Certification, Rating and Test Manual".

C. AMCA Standards - Comply with Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Standard 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".

D. ANSI/NFPA Standards - Comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard

90A "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".

E. ARI Standard - Comply with Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 650 - "Air Outlets and Inlets".

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Schedule of outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, model number, size, and

accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating

construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of outlet and inlet furnished, including pressure drop,

throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.

B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists in accordance with Section 01 78 23. Include this data in maintenance manuals.



1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work

traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR GRILLES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus. 2. Carnes. 3. A-J Manufacturing Company. 4. Or equal as determined by Engineer based on complete shop drawings.

B. Construction: Provide grilles constructed of aluminum or stainless steel as scheduled.

C. Performance: Provide grilles that do not exceed scheduled maximum pressure drop and

noise criteria ratings at scheduled airflow rate or airflow rate as shown on drawings.

D. Substrate Compatibility: Provide grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate and specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of grille.

E. Grille Face / Pattern: Provide grilles of the following face / pattern type as scheduled. Blade width and spacing shall be dictated by the model number shown in the schedules. 1. Vision Proof: Provide extruded aluminum, inverted "vee" pattern core with double flange

frame. 2. Single Deflection: Provide grilles with ¾-in horizontal sets of blades fixed at a 45° from

horizontal position. 3. Double Deflection: Provide grilles with ¾-in horizontal and vertical sets of blades. Refer

to schedules for position of each set of blades. 4. Large Double Deflection: Provide grilles with 1-1/2-in horizontal and vertical sets of

blades. Refer to schedules for position of each set of blades.

F. Finish: Provide grilles with finish as scheduled.

2.02 LOUVERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin. 2. Greenheck. 3. Carnes. 4. Or equal as determined by Engineer based on complete shop drawings.

B. Construction: Provide louvers constructed of aluminum extrusions, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld

units or use stainless steel fasteners.

C. Performance: Provide wind driven rain resistant louvers of sizes as shown in schedules or on drawings. Louvers shall not exceed scheduled maximum values for free area face velocity


and pressure drop at schedules airflow rates. Intake air louvers shall not have rated minimum water entrainment velocity lower than scheduled maximum free area velocity. Air Intake air louvers shall achieve a rain penetration class rating of Class A – 1 to 0.99 effective at 8-in/hr rainfall rate and 50-mph wind.

D. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with

adjacent substrate and specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support for weatherproof installation. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver.

E. Finish: Provide louvers with 2-coat 70% PVDF finish. Finish color to be selected by Architect.

F. Accessories: Provide louvers with the following accessories as scheduled:

1. Bird Screen: Provide manufacturer's standard aluminum bird screen mounted on inside face of louver.

2. Extended sill. 3. Flanged frame.

2.03 DAMPERS

A. General:

1. No single damper shall be larger in size than 48-in in either dimension. Where a larger damper is required, multiple damper assemblies shall be provided.

2. Where multiple damper assemblies are provided, a common actuator may be used to drive a maximum of four dampers. Provide stainless steel connecting linkage as required. Where an assembly is constructed of more than four dampers, multiple actuators shall be provided.

B. Control Dampers: 1. Manufacturer:

a. Ruskin model TED50XT. b. Or equal.

2. Ultra low leakage damper. 3. 16 gauge galvanized steel frame. Dampers installed in aluminum or stainless steel duct

systems or unducted applications in areas specified to use aluminum or stainless steel ducts shall be provided with Hi-Pro polyester coating or be fabricated of 304 stainless steel frame and blades.

4. Airfoil shaped double skin blades completely symmetrical about the axle pivot point. 5. Blade axles in synthetic sleeve bearings. 6. Silicone blade seals. 7. Flexible stainless steel jamb seals. 8. External (out of the airstream) blade to blade linkage. 9. Suitable for pressures to 8-in. w.c. and velocities to 4,000-fpm with maximum AMCA

leakage rate of 6 cfm/sq. ft at 4-in w.c.

C. Damper Actuators: 1. Actuators shall be adequately sized for the damper size and air pressures anticipated in

the system with a safety factor of two. 2. Actuators shall have ISO9001 quality certification and be UL listed under standard

60730-1 or UL listed under standard 873. 3. Actuators used on dampers shall be designed to directly couple and mount to a stem,

shaft or ISO style-mounting pad. Actuator mounting clamps shall be a V-bolt with a toothed V-clamp creating a cold weld, positive grip effect. Single point, bolt, or single screw actuator type fastening techniques or direct-coupled actuators requiring field assembly of the universal clamp is not acceptable.


4. Actuators shall be fully modulating/proportional, pulse width, floating/tristate, or two position as indicated in the sequence of operation and be factory or field selectable. Actuators shall have visual position indicators and shall operate in sequence with other devices if required.

5. Provide actuators with end switches or position feedback as indicated in the sequences of operation.

6. Actuators shall have an operating range of –22° to 122°F. 7. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA input signal and provide a 2-

10 VDC or 4-20 mA (with a 500 W load resistor) operating range. 8. Actuators shall be capable of operating on 24 or 120 VAC, or 24VDC and Class 2 wiring

as dictated by the application. Power consumption shall not exceed 10 VA for AC, including 120VAC actuators, and 8 watts per actuator for DC applications. Power supply requirements are Contractors option.

9. Actuators shall have electronic overload protection or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent actuator damage throughout the entire rotation. End switches to deactivate the actuator at the end rotation or magnetic clutches are not acceptable.

10. For power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Spring return actuators shall be capable of CW or CCW mounting orientation. Spring return models > 60 in-lbs. and non-spring return models > 90 in-lbs. shall be capable of mounting on shafts up to 1.05-in diameter. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. of torque shall have a metal, manual override crank. Actuators using "on-board" chemical storage systems, capacitors, or other "on-board" non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are unacceptable. Upon loss of control signal, a proportional actuator shall fail open or closed as described below. Upon loss of power, a nonspring return actuator shall maintain the last position.

11. Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and electrically paralleled to increase torque if required. Dampers requiring greater torque or higher close off may be assembled with multiple low torque actuators. Dual mounted actuators using additional anti-rotation strap mechanical linkages, or special factory wiring to function are not acceptable. Actuators in a tandem pair must be "off the shelf," standard actuators ready for field wiring.

12. Damper actuators shall not produce more than 62 dB (A) when furnished with a mechanical fail-safe spring. Non-spring return actuators shall conform to a maximum noise rating of 45 dB(A) with power on or in the running or driving mode.

13. Proportional actuators shall be fully programmable. Control input, position feedback and running time shall be factory or field programmable. Diagnostic feedback shall provide indications of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload, mechanical travel and mechanical load limit. The actuators shall also provide actuator service data, at minimum, number of hours powered and number of hours in motion.

14. Proportional actuators shall be capable of digital communication, as built. 15. All damper operators shall be oil submerged, geartrain type, inherently positive

positioning. 16. The actuators shall be mounted externally of ducts or air handling equipment wherever

possible for ease of service and isolated from internal temperatures. 17. Actuator enclosure:

a. Unless otherwise indicated, NEMA 2. b. In areas designated as Class 1, Division 1 or 2 hazardous environment, provide

explosion proof enclosure. c. All process areas (not Mechanical Rooms, in air handling units (AHU) or

Administrative Spaces), NEMA 4X. 18. Fail Position:

a. Outside Air Louvers/Intakes: Closed with exception of units serving generator rooms. b. Electrical Room Outside Air and Discharge Air Dampers: Open.


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers.

3.03 ACTUATOR INSTALLATION

A. General. Mount and link control damper actuators according to Manufacturer's instructions.

1. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.

2. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.

3. Provide all mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.

B. Electric/Electronic: 1. Dampers: Actuators shall be direct mounted on damper shaft or jackshaft unless shown

as a linkage installation. For low-leakage dampers with seals, the actuator shall be mounted with a minimum 5° travel available for tightening the damper seal. Actuators shall be mounted following Manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION

A. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility

with sheet metal design.

B. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure ¼ in. larger than damper dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.

C. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely

square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to opposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be within 0.3 cm (1/8 in.) of each other.

D. Follow the Manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless

specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.

E. Install extended shaft or jackshaft according to Manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a

sticker on the damper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of damper to that blade.)


F. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle damper after installation to ensure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections must open and close simultaneously.

G. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end. H. Support ductwork in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight. I. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or

opening to prevent leakage around perimeter of damper. 3.05 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, operating keys for each type of outlet and inlet that requires them.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 52 33-1 FIRE TUBE BOILERS

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 52 33

FIRE TUBE BOILERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Types of heating equipment specified in this section includes the following:

1. Low pressure, natural gas fired, modulating, hot water boilers.

B. The following is not work of this section, refer to Division 26. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on heaters. All components

required to make a complete installation shall be provided, including but not limited to starters, disconnects, outlets, and required electrical devices. Electrical equipment specified to be furnished or factory installed by manufacturer shall be provided under this section in accordance with Division 26.

C. Control and interlock wiring between boilers and field installed devices shall be work of Division

26 and 40 installed, in accordance with Division 26. Interlock and control wiring specified as factory installed is work of this section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for boilers specified. 2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 83.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. General assembly drawing of the boiler including product description, model number, dimensions, clearances, weights, service sizes, etc.

2. Schematic flow diagram of the boiler's gas valve train(s). 3. Schematic wiring diagram of the boiler's control system that shows all components,

interlocks, etc. and shall clearly identify factory wiring and field wiring.

D. Full Function Factory Fire Test must be performed and documented on the boiler's fire test label. A Factory Authorized Start-up must be completed prior to final acceptance by the engineer.

E. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. F. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:


2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of pumps in service. 3. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23.


A. ANSI Z21.13 / CSA 4.9 (Gas Fired Low Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers)

B. ASME Section IV ("H" Stamp Heating Boilers)


FVE027.02

C. ASME CSD-1 (Controls and Safety Devices) D. NBIC - Part 1 (Installation) E. NFPA 54/ANSI Z221.3 (National Fuel Gas Code) F. NFPA 70 (National Electric Code)


A. The equipment shall, at a minimum, be in strict compliance with the requirements of this specification, shall perform as specified and shall be the manufacturer's standard commercial product unless specified otherwise.

B. Electrically operated components specified are to be "Listed" and/or "Labeled" as defined by NFPA 70, Article 100.

C. Boiler shall bear an ASME "H" stamp in accordance with ASME Section IV. D. Boiler shall be CSA certified to the ANSI Z21.13 / CSA 4.9 standard for Gas Fired Low Pressure

Steam and Hot Water Boilers and shall bear an authorized CSA rating label. E. Boiler shall be AHRI listed and certified in accordance with the Commercial Boiler program and

the BTS-2000 testing standard. F. Boiler shall undergo a Full Function Factory Fire Test and bear a fire test label. G. Boiler shall be registered through the National Board from the factory. H. The manufacturer shall make available, upon request, all quality assurance documentation and

results of Full Function Factory Fire Test based on the boiler's serial number.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Equipment shall be handled, stored and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Factory Authorized Start-up must be completed after all appliance connections are completed, e.g. gas, electrical, water and vent.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Boiler Manufacturer shall warrant the boiler's heat exchanger and fuel burner for a period of

twelve (12) years from date of startup, provided that startup is completed within six (6) months of shipment and the start-up report is furnished to the manufacturer within thirty (30) days of startup.

1.07 CERTIFICATION

A. Manufacturer's Certification - The boiler manufacturer shall certify the following: 1. The products and systems furnished are in strict compliance with the specifications. 2. The boiler, burner and other associated mechanical and electrical equipment have all been

properly coordinated and integrated to provide a complete and operable boiler. 3. The boiler shall be in compliance with ANSI Z21.13 / CSA 4.9 (latest edition). 4. The boiler shall be CSA certified for at least 85% efficiency based on operating conditions

specified for testing under ANSI Z21.13 / CSA 4.9.


FVE027.02

5. The boiler shall be AHRI certified for at least 85% efficiency based on operating conditions specified for testing under BTS-2000.

6. The boiler shall be in compliance with ASME Section IV (latest edition). 7. The boiler shall be in compliance with ASME CSD-1 (latest edition). 8. The boiler's H-3 form shall be registered with the National Board.

B. Contractor's Certification - The Installing Contractor shall certify the following:

1. The products and systems installed are in strict compliance with the specifications and all applicable local and/or state codes.

2. The specified field tests have been satisfactorily performed by a factory authorized startup agent.

3. The equipment furnished contains inter-changeable parts with the specified equipment so that all major equipment parts can be obtained from the specified manufacturer.


A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain

cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Lochinvar

B. Or equal.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Equipment: 900-B-1.

B. Furnish and install factory "packaged" low pressure hot water boiler(s).

C. Hot water boiler shall be of the vertical, fire-tube, heat exchanger type complete with trim, valve trains, burner, and boiler control system.

D. Each factory "packaged" boiler shall be complete with all components and accessories necessary

for a complete and operable boiler as hereinafter specified. E. Hot water boiler shall be fully assembled, including burner and other appurtenances and ready for

wall mounting and connection of water, electrical, fuel, and vent lines. F. Each boiler shall be readily transported and ready for installation. G. Packaged unit shall be fire and hydrostatically tested at factory. H. Boiler shall have ASME certification. I. Boiler shall be constructed to ASME CSD-1 requirements. J. Boiler shall be of sealed combustion type suitable for drawing combustion air from the outdoors. K. Boiler shall be suitable for operation with a 45% propylene glycol/water solution.


FVE027.02

2.03 Operational Data:

A. Fuel shall be natural gas with an assumed higher heating value of 1,050 Btu/Cu Ft and an assumed specific gravity of 0.60 (relative to air). Burner shall be suitable for full fire operation with natural gas supply pressure between 6 and 14 inches of water column.

B. Power voltage shall be less than 20-amps at 115 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz.

2.04 Detailed Description

A. The BOILER shall be certified and listed by C.S.A. International under the latest edition of the harmonized ANSI Z21.13 test standard. The BOILER shall operate at a minimum of 95% AFUE Efficiency (KHB/WHB055-285) and 94.4% THERMAL Efficiency (WHB399) as registered with AHRI. The BOILER shall be certified for indoor installation.

B. The BOILER shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and pre-painted on both sides. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and completely enclosed, independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the outer jacket does not affect a proper seal. A burner/flame observation port shall be provided for observing the burner flame and combustion chamber. The burner shall be a premix design constructed of high temperature stainless steel with a woven Fecralloy outer covering to provide smooth operation at all modulating firing rates. The BOILER shall be supplied with a negative pressure regulation gas valve and be equipped with a pulse width modulation blower system to precisely control the fuel/air mixture to the burner. The BOILER shall operate in a safe condition with gas supply pressures as low as 4 inches of water column. The burner flame shall be ignited by direct spark ignition with flame monitoring via a flame sensor.

C. The BOILER shall utilize a 24 VAC control circuit and components. The control system shall have

a factory installed display for boiler set-up, boiler status, and boiler diagnostics. All components shall be easily accessed and serviceable from the front and top of the jacket. The BOILER shall be equipped with a temperature/pressure gauge; high limit temperature control with manual reset; ASME certified pressure relief valve set for 30 psi (standard); outlet water temperature sensor with a dual thermistor to verify accuracy; system supply water temperature sensor; outdoor air sensor, flue temperature sensor with dual thermistor to verify accuracy; low water cut off with manual reset, blocked drain switch and a condensate trap for the heat exchanger condensate drain.

D. The BOILER shall feature the "SMART SYSTEM™" control which is standard and factory installed with 128 x 128 resolution display, password security, outdoor air reset, pump delay with freeze protection, pump exercise, ramp delay featuring six steps, domestic hot water prioritization with limiting capabilities, USB drive for simple uploading of parameters and a PC port connection for connection to a local computer for programming and trending. A secondary operating control that is field mounted outside or inside the appliance is not acceptable. The BOILER shall have alarm contacts for any failure, runtime contacts and data logging of runtime at given modulation rates, ignition attempts and ignition failures. The BOILER shall have a built-in "Cascade" with leader redundancy to sequence and rotate while maintaining modulation of up to eight boilers of different Btu inputs without utilization of an external controller. The internal "Cascade" function shall be capable of lead-lag, efficiency optimization, front-end loading, and rotation of lead boiler every 24 hours. The BOILER shall be capable of remote communication via optional CON-X-US™ Remote Connectivity with the capability of historical trending and sending text message or email alerts to notify the caretaker of a boiler alarm and remote programming of onboard boiler control. The control must have optional capability to communicate via Modbus protocol with a minimum of 46 readable points. The BOILER shall have an optional gateway device which will allow integration with LON or BacNet protocols.


FVE027.02

E. The "SMART SYSTEM™" control shall increase fan speed to boost flame signal when a weak flame signal is detected during normal operation. A 0-10 VDC output signal shall control a variable speed boiler pump (pump shall be supplied by manufacturer) to keep a fixed Delta T across the boiler regardless of the modulation rate. The BOILER shall have the capability to receive a 0-10 VDC input signal from a variable speed system pump to anticipate changes in system heat load in order to prevent flow related issues such as erratic temperature cycling.

F. The BOILER shall be equipped with two terminal strips for electrical connection. A low voltage connection board with 46 connection points for safety and operating controls, i.e., Alarm Contacts, Runtime Contacts, Low Water Cut Off, Louver Proving Switch, Tank Thermostat, Domestic Hot Water Building Recirculation Pump Contacts, Domestic Hot Water Building Recirculation Temperature Sensor Contacts, Remote Enable/Disable, System Supply Temperature Sensor, Outdoor Temperature Sensor, Tank Temperature Sensor, Modbus Building Management System Signal and Cascade Control Circuit. A high voltage terminal strip shall be provided for Supply voltage. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt / 60 hertz / single phase on all models. The high voltage terminal strip plus integral relays are provided for independent pump control of the System pump, the Boiler pump and the Domestic Hot Water pump.

G. The BOILER shall be installed and vented with a Direct Vent system with horizontal sidewall termination of both the exhaust vent and combustion air. The flue shall be Category IV approved material constructed of PVC, CPVC, Polypropylene or Stainless Steel. A separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the boiler from the outside. The boiler's total combined air intake length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. The boiler's total combined exhaust venting length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet.

H. The BOILER shall have an independent laboratory rating for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) to meet

the requirements of South Coast Air Quality Management District in Southern California and the requirements of Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. The manufacturer shall verify proper operation of the burner, all controls and the integrity of the heat exchanger by connection to water and venting for a factory fire test prior to shipping.

I. The BOILER shall operate at altitudes up to 4,500 feet above sea level without additional parts or adjustments. The BOILER shall be certified for operation at elevations of 4,500 feet, and above, by a 3rd party organization.

J. The BOILER shall be suitable for use with polypropylene glycol up to a 50% concentration. The de-rate associated with the glycol will vary per glycol manufacturer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which heaters are to be installed. Do not proceed with

installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 GENERAL




FVE027.02

3.03 FACTORY TESTS

A. The complete packaged boiler shall be factory tested with all accessories to check construction and operation of all components.

B. All safety controls must be checked for proper operation.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation except as otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with installation requirements of local and state boiler, and applicable provisions of NFPA and ASME boiler and pressure vessel code standards.

C. Install equipment with manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over top of boilers.

D. Install boiler trim not installed at factory.

E. Connections:

1. Connect water, fuel, air inlet, and exhaust outlet piping as indicated and required by boiler manufacturer and as shown on Plans.

2. Gas piping shall be in accordance with Section 23 11 23. 3. Heating water piping shall be in accordance with Section 23 21 13. 4. Electrical connections shall be in accordance with Division 26. 5. Venting:

a. Boilers shall be dual certified as Category II or IV appliances and are capable of operating with slightly negative to slightly positive exhaust vent pressure, and the vent gas temperature is likely to cause condensate production in the vent.

b. Install the exhaust/flue venting system in accordance with NFPA 54/ANSI Z223.1 (United States), or CAN/CSA B/149.1 (Canada) and per the manufacturer's recommendations in the installation manual.

c. All exhaust venting components shall comply with the requirements of Section 23 51 00. 6. Combustion air intake:

a. The boilers shall be certified for Direct Vent / Sealed Combustion installations where the combustion air is supplied directly to the boiler through ductwork.

b. Install the air inlet system in accordance with NFPA 54/ANSI Z223.1 (United States), or CAN/CSA B/149.1 (Canada) and per the manufacturer's recommendations in the installation manual.

c. Install Manufacturer furnished combustion air damper in intake piping.

F. Furnish to Electrical Installer, manufacturer's wiring diagram and electrical requirements for installation of field wiring required for boilers. Verify electrical installer will make power connection to boiler with flexible conduit.

3.05 STARTUP

A. Start-up boilers using boiler and burner manufacturer's representative.

B. Test controls and demonstrates compliance with requirements.

C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.


FVE027.02


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at

jobsite or classroom designated by Owner for man-days indicated, travel time excluded, for assistance during plant construction, plant startup, and training of Owner's personnel for plant operation. Include: a. 1/2 workday for installation services. b. 1/4 workday for instructional services. c. 1/4 workday for post startup services

2. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system-related areas other than wastewater treatment process. See Section 01 61 00.

3. In addition to the services specified above, provide manufacturer's services as required to successfully complete systems demonstration as specified in Section 01 79 13.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 55 23-1 GAS FIRED RADIANT HEATERS

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 55 23

GAS FIRED RADIANT HEATERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Low Intensity Infra-red tube heaters (900-IRH-1-20-75, 900-IRH-2-20-75, 900-IRH-3-30-100, 900-IRH-4-30-100, 900-IRH-5-20-75)

B. This Section includes fuel fired, low intensity, two-stage, radiant heat as per ASHRAE Type (1b), AHRI CAN/ANSI/AHRI STANDARD 1330-2015.

C. The following is not work of this section, refer to Division 26. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on heaters. All components

required to make a complete installation shall be provided, including but not limited to starters, disconnects, outlets, and required electrical devices. Electrical equipment specified to be furnished or factory installed by manufacturer shall be provided under this section in accordance with Division 26.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Infrared radiant heaters 2. Accessories

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data, thermostats, intake and relief vents

2. Wiring Diagrams: Show power and control connections and distinguish between factory-installed and field-installed wiring



2. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23.


A. American National Standard/CSA Standard: Construct and certify gas fired infrared heaters in accordance with the latest edition ANSI A83.20/CSA 2.34 "Gas-Fired Low Intensity Infrared Heaters".

B. CSA Compliance: Provide CSA Seal affixed to each burner name plate and vacuum pump assembly. Provide CSA certification of heater design as 'Vented Infrared Heater'.

C. Temperature-Indicating and Regulating Equipment: Construct and certify radiant heater

temperature controls in accordance with latest edition UL873 including all current supplements.


FVE027.02

D. Installation Compliance: Install gas fired radiant systems in accordance with NFPA 54 'National

Fuel Gas Code' (ANSI Z223.1 – latest edition). E. Assembly and Rating per AHRI CAN/ANSI/AHRI STANDARD 1330-2015.


A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain

cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.02 VENTED INFRARED RADIANT HEATERS

A. As scheduled on the drawings and as listed below.

B. Model: Re-Verber-Ray HL3 Series as manufactured by Detroit Radiant Products.

C. Alternate Manufacturers: Combustion Research Corporation (Model Omega II DI), Detroit Radiant Products, and Roberts Gordon (Model Compact DF) may be consider equal by the Engineer based on full shop drawing submittals issued to the Engineer a minimum of seven (7) days prior to bid. See drawing schedules for specified maximum clearance to combustibles. Products from alternate manufacturers must not exceed specified clearances.

D. Fuel type: Burner shall be designed for natural gas.

E. Gas control: Operation shall include a defined input differential. Heater must be CSA Design Certified to operate at an input differential of at least 30% between the low and nominal rated input modes.

F. Combustion chamber: shall be 4 inch O.D. 16ga. Titanium stabilized aluminized steel (150-200MBH to allow for the operating temperature to exceed the 1030F as set forth in the ANSI Z83.20 standard) or aluminized steel (below 150 MBH), finished with a high emissivity rated, corrosion resistant, black coating with an emissivity level documented at .92 or higher.

G. Emitter tube: shall be 4 inch O.D. 16ga. aluminized steel finished with a high emissivity rated, corrosion resistant, black coating with an emissivity level documented at .92 or higher.

H. Burner type: Unit shall be a positive pressure power burner with a combustion fan upstream of the burner and exhaust gases for component longevity, maximum combustion efficiency, and energy transfer. Negative pressure (pull through) type appliances will not be allowed.

I. Fan enclosure: Combustion fan shall be totally housed inside burner control box and not exposed. Appliances with exposed combustion/exhauster fans shall not be permitted.

J. Burner: 1. Stainless-steel venturi burner. The flame anchoring screen shall have a minimum

temperature rating equivalent to 304 grade stainless steel. Non-stainless steel burners shall not be permitted.

2. The burner shall be a two stage firing type with low and high fire modes.


FVE027.02

K. Tube connections: The heater's combustion chamber and radiant emitter tube shall incorporate a 4 inch slip-fit, interlocking connection in which the upstream tube slides into the next tube and is held by a bolted clamp. A butted tube connection system shall not be permitted.

L. Ignition system: Hot surface silicon carbide capable of temperatures achieving 2400 F. Ignitor shall be readily accessible and serviceable without the use of tools. Spark ignition systems shall not be permitted.

M. Reflectors: Shall be .025 polished aluminum with a multi-faceted design which includes reflector end caps. Reflector shall have a polished bright finish with clear visual reflection ability. Reflector shall have a minimum of 7 sheet metal bends in its fabrication to optimize downward radiation. Reflectors shall be rotatable from 0 to 45 degrees when required. The heater's reflector hanging system shall be designed to permit expansion while minimizing noise and/or rattles.

N. Control box: Heater's exterior control chassis shall be constructed of corrosion resistant enameled steel. 1. The heater's top cover shall be constructed of ABS plastic material. 2. Air intake: An air intake collar shall be supplied as part of the burner control assembly to

accept a 4 inch O.D. supply duct. 3. The heater's control compartment shall be accessible without the use of tools and

serviceable while heater is operating.

O. Heaters shall be equipped with a sight glass allowing a visual inspection of ignitor and burner operation from the floor. Sight glass visible only at an appliance level shall not be permitted.

P. The heaters shall utilize a downstream turbulator baffle for maximum heat transfer.

Q. Heater shall be supplied with a stainless steel flexible gas connector.

R. Burner Safety Controls: 1. Heater controls shall include a safety differential pressure switch to monitor combustion air

flow, as to provide complete burner shutdown due to insufficient combustion air or flue blockage.

2. The heater shall incorporate a self-diagnostic ignition module, and recycle the heater after an inadvertent shutdown.

3. The heater's control system shall be designed to shut off the gas flow to the main burner in the event either a gas supply or power supply interruption occurs.

4. The heater's blower motor shall be thermally protected and the motor's impeller shall be balanced.

5. Heater control assembly shall include three indicator lights that define the unit's operating input ranges. One indicator shall validate air flow. Two indicator lights shall indicate low and high stages.

6. The heater's air flow control system shall provide a 45 second pre-purge prior to initiating burner operation and a 90 second post-purge upon completion, effectively removing all products of combustion from heat exchanger and/or radiant tubes.

7. No condensation shall form as a result of combustion in the combustion chamber or radiant tubes while at operating temperatures.

8. Thermostat control shall be two-stage operating on 24 volts.

S. Venting: shall be per manufacturer approval and specifications. See schedules for required flashing cones and roof and wall caps.

T. Control Transformer: Integrally mounted.

U. Supply thermostat as described in equipment schedule for installation by Electrical Contractor.


FVE027.02

V. Provide all required accessories as scheduled on the drawings and otherwise as required for a complete working system.


3.01 EXAMINATION



3.02 GENERAL



3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install radiant heaters with ½" per 20' slope between burners and 1" per 20' slope 40' after the last burner per branch. Slope systems towards the vacuum pump.

B. Install and connect gas-fired radiant heaters, associated fuel, vent features, and systems

according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written installation instructions.

C. Verify proposed height and location of radiant tube heaters in the field with the Engineer prior to

installation. 3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Support: Suspend heater, burner, gas piping, electrical and venting from building substrate as indicated, or in manner to provide durable and safe installation and in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions.

B. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 11 23. Connect gas piping to gas

train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service. Provide CSA-approved flexible units.

C. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirement in Division 26 sections.

D. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at

jobsite or classroom designated by Owner for man-days indicated, travel time excluded, for assistance during plant construction, plant startup, and training of Owner's personnel for plant operation. Include: a. 1 workday for Installation Services, Instructional and Post Startup Services.

2. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system-related areas other than wastewater treatment process. See Section 01 61 00.


FVE027.02

3. In addition to the services specified above, provide manufacturer's services as required to successfully complete systems demonstration as specified in Section 01 79 13.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 55 33-1 FUEL FIRED UNIT HEATERS

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 55 33

GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS


A. Drawings and General Requirements of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work of this Section.

B. Extent of heating units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and

by requirements of this section.

C. Types of Gas Fired Unit Heating Equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Gas fired unit heaters.


A. UL Compliance - Provide fuel fired unit heaters which are designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL requirements.

B. AGA Compliance - Construct gas-fired furnace sections in accordance with AGA safety

standards, and provide AGA label. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories, electrical components and installation and start-up instructions.

B. Shop Drawings - Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,

weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.

C. Wiring Diagrams - Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring for gas-fired heating and ventilating units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

D. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and parts list for each fuel fired unit heater, control,

and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual.

E. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.

B. Store units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,

construction debris, and physical damage.

C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading units, and moving them to final location.


FVE027.02

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Modine PTC. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Modine, Reznor (Model UEAS), or equivalent as determined by

engineer based on full submittals prior to bid.

B. Configuration: Condensing furnace section with 93% minimum efficiency provided by an indirect-fired tubular heat exchanger with individually fired tubes coupled to a secondary recuperative heat exchanger for maximum heat recovery.

C. Venting/Combustion Air Arrangement 1. The unit shall be separated combustion. The venting shall be a power exhausted

arrangement with a separate combustion air intake pipe connection to allow for fresh combustion air from outside the conditioned space. The unit shall be tested to insure proper ignition when the unit is subjected to 40 mile per hour wind velocities. The unit shall also include a factory mounted differential pressure switch designed to prevent main burner ignition until positive venting has been proven.

2. Venting shall be Schedule 40 PVC.

D. Casing: 1. The unit heater(s) casing shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge aluminized steel with

minimization of exposed fasteners. 2. All exterior casing parts shall be cleaned of all oils and a phosphate coating applied prior to

painting. The exterior casing parts shall then be painted with an electrostatically applied baked-on gray-green polyester powder paint (7-mil thickness) for corrosion resistance.

3. The unit shall be furnished with horizontal air deflectors. The deflectors are adjustable to provide for horizontal directional airflow control (up or down).

E. Furnace Section:

4. The heat exchanger(s) shall be made of 18 gauge 409 stainless steel tubes and headers. Each heat exchanger tube shall be individually and directly flame-fired. The heat exchanger tube shall be crimped to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. The flue collector box shall be made of 20 gauge AL29-4C stainless steel.

5. The thermal efficiency of the unit(s) shall be a minimum of 93% efficient for all air flow ranges through the use of a secondary recuperative heat exchanger. The secondary heat exchanger shall be constructed of AL29-4C stainless steel to withstand the corrosive environment of condensing gas fired equipment.

6. The heat exchanger(s) seams and duct connections shall be certified to withstand 0.9" W.C. external static pressure without burner flame disturbance.

7. The burner(s) shall be in-shot type, directly firing each heat exchanger tube individually and is designed for good lighting characteristics without noise of extinction for both natural and propane gas.

8. The ignition controller(s) shall be 100% shut-off with continuous retry. 9. The gas pressure shall be between 6-7" W.C for natural gas. 10. The solid state ignition system shall directly light the gas by means of a direct spark igniter

each time the system is energized. 11. The unit gas controls shall be provided with the following:

a. Single-stage gas controls with a single-stage combination gas control, an ignition control. The unit fires at 100% full fire based on a call for heat from a room thermostat.

b. An automatic reset high limit switch mounted in the air stream to shut off the gas supply in the event of overheating.

c. An automatic reset high limit switch mounted on the power exhauster housing to shut off the gas supply in the event of overheating flue gas temperatures.


FVE027.02

d. A condensate drain line overflow switch that senses if the condensate line is clogged and shuts the unit heater down. The switch is factory mounted inside the unit cabinet and wired to the unit controls.

e. An energy-saver control utilizes stratified ceiling air to heat the space at floor level before turning on the gas controls. Its operation is independent of the room thermostat and should have a higher set-point than the room thermostat. The Stat is factory mounted outside the unit and wired into the contractor convenience box.

f. A time delay relay that delays the start of the air mover to allow the heat exchanger a warm-up period after a call for heat. The time delay relay shall also continue the air mover operation after the thermostat has been satisfied to remove any residual heat in the heat exchanger.

12. The unit shall be orificed for 0-2000 feet elevation above sea level.

F. Electrical: 1. All electrical components shall carry UL, ETL, or CSA listing 2. A low voltage terminal board shall be provided for direct wiring connection to an external

thermostat. 3. A Contractor Convenience Package that consists of an external junction box featuring simple

connection of supply power wiring internally, thermostat wiring to terminals eternally, an On/Off switch, a single 115V outlet for connection of an external condensate pump, and status indicator lights to display the operational state of the unit shall be factory mounted on the rear panel of the casing.

4. A single 115V to 24V step down transformer shall be provided for all unit controls.

G. Air Mover: 5. The motor wiring shall be in flexible metal BX conduit. 6. The motor shall be controlled by a time delay relay. 7. Propeller models shall meet the following requirements:

a. The motor type shall be Single-Speed, Totally Enclosed (TE). b. The air mover motor shall be a 115V motor.

H. Mounting:

1. The unit shall be equipped with tapped holes to accept 3/8”-16 threaded rod for suspension. 2. Propeller Unit to have two point adjustable suspension points to allow for level hanging with a

variety of accessories.

I. Accessories: 1. Condensate Drain Kit. A condensate drain kit consisting of one threaded PVC elbow and two

specially designed condensate traps to allow the unit to operate and drain properly. 2. Concentric Vent Kit. A vertical concentric vent kit consisting of one concentric adapter, one

combustion air inlet cap, and two pipe terminal screens.

J. Provide all required accessories as scheduled on the drawings and otherwise as required for a complete working system.

K. Control Sequence: See Section 23 09 00 for control and interlock requirements to be work of that section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.


FVE027.02

3.02 INSTALLATION OF HEATING UNITS

A. General - Install heating units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted.

Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

C. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

D. Install vent piping in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and NFPA 54.

E. Gas Piping - Refer to Section 23 11 23. Connect gas piping to unit gas train with union, shut-off

cock and drip leg. 3.03 START-UP

A. Start-up units per manufacturer's written start-up instructions. 3.04 GROUNDING

A. Provide positive equipment ground for heating unit components. 3.05 TRAINING/START-UP SERVICES

A. Provide one half day training session for Owners' personnel. Training schedule shall be approved by Owner. 1. Provide one half day start-up/installation inspection services.

END OF SECTION

812008 23 73 33-1 DIRECT FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS

FVE027.02

SECTION 23 73 33

DIRECT FIRED MAKE-UP AIR UNITS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Types of heating equipment specified in this section includes the following:

1. Direct fired constant volume 100% OA makeup air unit (MAU) with factory controls and remote (field installed) control panel.

B. The following is not work of this section, refer to Division 26.

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on MAU. All components required to make a complete installation shall be provided, including but not limited to starters, disconnects, outlets, and required electrical devices. Electrical equipment specified to be furnished or factory installed by manufacturer shall be provided under this section in accordance with Division 26.

C. Control and interlock wiring between MAU and field installed devices shall be work of Division 26

and 40 installed, in accordance with Division 26. Interlock and control wiring specified as factory installed is work of this section.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for MAU specified. 2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 83. 3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide detailed product data and drawings including dimensions and weights, description of the design, manufacturer, model numbers, construction, materials, complete performance data and operational features of the equipment proposed including description of controls, electrical data, and preliminary electrical and controls wiring diagrams.

2. Sub-assembly/Reassembly: Provide a brief description of all and any required sub-assemblies or reassembly if required at the job site

3. Warranty: Provide a complete warranty statement. Minimum warranty to be one-year parts and labor.


1. Startup Reports. 2. Owner Training Sign-in Sheets. 3. Warranties: Submit manufacturer's warranty. 4. Operating instructions and maintenance data for materials and products for inclusion in O&M

Manual. 5. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23.


FVE027.02


A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): (Establishes requirements applicable to certifying direct gas-fired heaters.) 1. MUA Model: Standard Z83.4; Non-Recirculating Direct Gas-Fired Industrial Air Heaters 2. AM, VAV, AR Models: Standard Z83.18; Recirculating Direct Gas-Fired Industrial Air Heaters

B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. Standard A653/653M; Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process

C. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. (ETL): (Nationally recognized testing laboratory certifies code conformance.) 1. Requirements applicable to product labeling and listing in the Directory of ETL Listed

Products.

D. Factory Mutual Insurance (FM): (Certifies gas manifold to owner's insurance carrier.)

E. Industrial Risk Insurance (IRI): (Certifies gas manifold to owner's insurance carrier.)

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. Standard 250; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum)

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): (Establishes fire prevention standards.) 1. Article 54; National Fuel Gas Code 2. Article 70; National Electric Code 3. Article 90A; Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): (Enforces air quality standards and safety in the workplace.)

I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): (Nationally recognized testing laboratory certifies code conformance, product labeling and listing.) 1. Standard UL916 Energy Management Equipment 2. Standard UL873 Temperature Indicating & Regulating Equipment


A. The equipment shall, at a minimum, be in strict compliance with the requirements of this specification, shall perform as specified and shall be the manufacturer's standard commercial product unless specified otherwise.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Equipment shall be handled, stored and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Factory Authorized Start-up must be completed after all unit connections are completed, e.g., gas, electrical, etc.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Limited warranty of twenty-four (24) months from the date of purchase by Buyer or twenty-seven

(27) months from date of shipment by Seller, whichever occurs first. Labor reimbursement for removing and/or re-installing replacement parts is included in the warranty for 30 days from field start-up or 90 days from shipment, whichever comes first.


FVE027.02


A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all delivery, storage, and shipping and shall coordinate all

ship dates, receive trucks, unload equipment, store equipment, equipment protection, and shall be responsible for inspection of units, filing claims for shipping damage, etc.

B. Unpainted units shall be shrink-wrapped by the manufacturer prior to shipment to prevent damage due to weather and road debris during transportation and thereafter while in storage awaiting installation. Alternatively, units may be completely covered by tarps while in transit or shipped in an enclosed truck. Units not factory shrink-wrapped shall be re-covered by the contractor at the jobsite while awaiting installation.

C. All openings shall be protected against damage from shipping.

D. All loose-shipped items need to be packed, protected and secured with the unit.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. AbsolutAire

B. Acceptable Models and Manufacturers: For a MAU to be considered acceptable, it shall be

equivalent (as determined by the Engineer) to the specified model as manufactured by AbsolutAire. 1. The MAU shall be of welded construction using aluminized steel as is the case for the

specified AbsolutAire model. 2. Alternate units as manufactured by Greenheck, ThermoTek, Rapid, or Titan may be

determined to be acceptable based on full shop drawings submitted to the Engineer no later than seven days before the bid due date. If considered to be acceptable, the alternate manufacturer and model will be listed in an Addenda.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Provide a direct gas-fired horizontal makeup air unit with 100% outside air and constant volume

as scheduled.

B. Provide self-contained packaged heater that shall include the casing, modulating burner, non-overloading fan, fan motor & drives, outdoor air damper, and automatic controls for temperature control.

C. Provide with custom remote control panel. See detailed description below. D. Provide with pre-painted legs for interior applications. See Makeup Air Unit Schedule on plans for

height. Coordinate final height with wall opening E. Provide a casing, which shall be a minimum 18-gauge, aluminized steel welded to structural steel

framing. Both interior and exterior structural steel shall be red or gray oxide primed. All exterior casing seams shall be weather resistant. All interior and exterior surfaces will be cleaned of all oil

and grease. Painted exterior will consist of a high-quality prime coat and a finish coat of

epoxy paint in a standard color as selected by the Owner. F. Unit shall be double wall construction. Provide a minimum of (2) hinged access doors with

positive latching, watertight handles. All access doors shall be painted on the interior as well as


FVE027.02

the exterior, and hinged access doors shall include braces that lock in the open position during servicing.

G. Burner: shall be a direct-fired type gas burner which shall be Maxon Model NP1LE specifically designed to burn natural below the maximum non-contaminating levels required by ANSI. Burner shall have non-clogging, stainless steel baffles attached to a cast aluminum gas supply section with no moving parts. The burner shall be capable of a 30-to-1 turndown ratio and be designed for 100% thermal efficiency for the life of the equipment. The outdoor air velocity across the burner shall be constant and at an air velocity required for ANSI certification. The burner air velocity shall be constant at all times throughout the operation of the heater. Service of and access to the burner igniter and flame rod shall be accomplished through an access door or panel.

H. Burner Profile Adjustment System: shall consist of a means to monitor and adjust the pressure

differential across the burner profile while the fan is running. The burner profile will remain fixed while in service and use.

I. Pilot: the direct fired burner will include a direct spark ignition system including an ignition module,

spark igniter, and flame rod to verify ignition before allowing the main gas valve to fully open.

J. Supply fan: shall be a double-width, double-inlet, centrifugal design, belt driven heavy duty fan with extended grease lines for the required air capacity. The motor shall be 1750 rpm, standard NEMA frame, Premium Efficient Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) mounted on an adjustable pivot base. The motor shall have a 1.15 service factor, suitable for continuous service at 120° F ambient temperature, and shall be wired for the specified voltage. The fan, motor, and drive shall be factory tested to ensure the specified air delivery (per ANSI standards) at the design total static pressure. The fan shaft shall be connected to the motor by a V-belt drive, capacity designed for 30% over the motor nameplate horsepower. The fan shaft shall be a turned, ground and polished solid shaft. A protective coating shall be applied to the shaft to minimize oxidation. Fan

shall have ball bearings, and shall be designed for a minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours. Fan to

be mounted on spring vibration isolators within the unit.

K. Controls: 1. Main Unit Mounted Control Panel: shall meet NEMA 4X requirements and contain all

standard electrical components, such as non-fused disconnect switch; motor starter; 120-volt and 24-volt transformers; control circuit fuses; flame control relay and a number-coded terminal strip. The control panel shall have a burner flame safety circuit and components to lockout the burner flame in abnormal conditions. A remote flame reset button or switch shall allow personnel to reset the burner at the remote control panel. The complete control and safety system as well as the burner and gas manifold shall be factory tested before shipment and evidence of the factory start up provided with the O&M manual. Control panel to also include: a. General fault indication terminal for remote monitoring by Plant Controls System. b. Dry contact indicating selector switch in "Auto" mode for remote monitoring by Plant

Controls System. 2. Additional Factory Furnished Temperature Controls:

a. Outdoor Air Temperature: A solid state temperature control system, located inside the control panel includes a sensing thermistor located in the OA intake opening. The thermistor senses and controls the burner lockout temperature. The temperature control for adjusting the OA lockout temperature is located on the main unit panel.

b. Low-Temperature Limit Switch: turns the fan motor off when cold air is being discharged from the heater. The minimum discharge temperature may be selected from 0°F to 70°F (factory set at 40°F). An integral timer shall by-pass this switch for five (5) minutes on initial start-up.

c. High-Temperature Limit Switch: turns the burner off when the discharge air temperature exceeds 130°F (field adjustable). The switch must then be manually reset at the heater.

d. Custom Remote Panel including:


FVE027.02

1) NEMA 4X construction. 2) Off/Auto selector switch. 3) Space Temperature Control: A temperature control system, located inside the

control panel senses and controls the burner to maintain room temperature. 4) Remote enable/disable relay. To be used by site SCADA system. 5) MAU operating indication light(s).

L. Gas manifold: shall be sized for the rated BTU (MBH) capacity as scheduled on the drawings.

The gas manifold will be constructed in conformance to ANSI Standards and Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI) insurance requirements.

M. Manufacturer shall provide the following accessories: 1. High and Low Gas Pressure Switches: this includes a high gas-pressure switch located on

the burner end of the gas manifold and shall turn the burner off when the gas pressure is too high. The maximum gas-pressure range will be from 3" to 21" W.C. This is factory set at 1.5" W.C. above the high fire gas pressure. Also included with this option is a low gas-pressure switch located at the inlet of the gas manifold. The low gas switch shall turn the burner off when the gas pressure is too low. The minimum gas pressure range will be from 3" to 21" W.C. This switch shall be factory set at 3.0" W.C.

2. Side Access Filter Section: manufactured using the same gauge and metal type as the base unit and is field attached at the unit inlet (entering air) end. Filter section will be double wall construction. Filters are to be 2" pleated equivalent to Farr 30/30. Provide a clogged filter warning light at the main control panel. Filters are UL Class 2.

3. Motorized Inlet Damper: a parallel blade spring-closed damper is provided in a flange assembly shipped loose for field installation by others. Includes a 24-volt direct coupled actuator with a pre-wired cable.

4. Prepainted legs for unit support. 5. Spring vibration isolation within the unit. 6. Extended Grease Lines. 7. Solid Shaft Grounding Ring. 8. Mild Weather Stat.

N. Extra Materials 1. Provide one (1) spare set of belts for each MAU. 2. Provide three (3) total sets of filters for each MAU.


3.01 EXAMINATION



3.02 GENERAL



3.03 INSTALLATION OF MAU IN PLACE

A. It is the intent that the MAU be delivered completely assembled and capable of installation by the

installing contractor. In the event that field disassembly and/or assembly is required, the MAU vendor shall provide the following: 1. A general description of the required disassembly and reassembly.


FVE027.02

2. A detailed plan to be given to the installing contractors.

3.04 INSTALLATION ASSISTANCE AND START-UP SERVICES

A. Furnish a factory trained service technician to start the unit, perform performance and safety check test, operation, alarm conditions, etc., and provide a written startup report.

3.05 OWNER TRAINING

A. Work with the Installing Contractor to provide Owner Training in the proper operation and

maintenance of the new MAU equipment.

B. Review O&M documentation that was previously submitted.

C. Allow for a four (4) hour Owner Training session at Substantial Completion.

3.06 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install per NFPA 90A.

C. Install per NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223. 1)

D. Provide connection to fuel gas system.

E. Contractor shall provide a proper gas service drip leg and a lockable, lever handle manual shutoff valve.

F. Furnish Division 26 (Electrical) Contractor with field wiring diagram and electrical data to permit power wiring connections to the unit. 1. Verify requirements with manufacturer's installation instructions.

G. Work with factory trained and authorized service technician to check, test and commission all equipment. Provide a copy of the start-up report to the Engineer for review and approval and then include approved reports in the O&M Manuals. The startup report must be submitted by factory authorized personnel, not by the installing contractor.

END OF SECTION

2960 Lucerne Drive SE Grand Rapids, MI 49546 P: 616.977.1000 F: 616.977.1005 www.fveng.com